********************************************************** 26 Sections - Pr… · IEEE C57.13...

UFGS Energy Updates 2017-Option 1 60516512SO1

Section 26 11 13.00 20

***************************************************************************

USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS-26 11 13.00 20 (April 2007)

Change 1 - 08/17

--------------------------------

Preparing Activity: NAVFAC Superseding

UFGS-26 11 13.00 20 (April 2006)

UNIFIED FACILITIES GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS

References are in agreement with UMRL dated October 2017

***************************************************************************

SECTION 26 11 13.00 20

PRIMARY UNIT SUBSTATION

04/07

***************************************************************************

NOTE: This guide specification covers the

requirements for for primary substations and

associated load break switches and switchgear.

Adhere to UFC 1-300-02 Unified Facilities Guide

Specifications (UFGS) Format Standard when editing

this guide specification or preparing new project

specification sections. Edit this guide

specification for project specific requirements by

adding, deleting, or revising text. For bracketed

items, choose applicable item(s) or insert

appropriate information.

Remove information and requirements not required in

respective project, whether or not brackets are

present.

Comments, suggestions and recommended changes for

this guide specification are welcome and should be

submitted as a Criteria Change Request (CCR).

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: TO DOWNLOAD UFGS GRAPHICS

Go to http://www.wbdg.org/FFC/NAVGRAPH/graphtoc.pdf

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: A primary substation as used in this

specification is a substation in which the primary

and secondary voltages are both rated 1000 volts and

above, normally in the medium voltage range of 5 kV

to 35 kV. This specification includes indoor and

outdoor applications.

USE THE FOLLOWING RELATED GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS FOR

POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT:

http://www.wbdg.org/ffc/dod/unified-facilities-criteria-ufc/ufc-1-300-02

http://www.wbdg.org/ffc/dod/unified-facilities-guide-specifications-ufgs

http://www.wbdg.org/FFC/NAVGRAPH/graphtoc.pdf


Section 26 11 13.00 20

--Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING

--Section 26 12 19.10 THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED

TRANSFORMERS

--Section 26 12 21 SINGLE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED

TRANSFORMERS

--Section 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND

DISTRIBUTION

--Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL

DISTRIBUTION

--Section 26 13 00 SF6/HIGH-FIREPOINT FLUID INSULATED

PAD-MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR

--Section 26 11 16 SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS

--Section 26 23 00 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

--Section 26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The following information shall be indicated

on the project drawings or specified in the project

specifications:

1. Single-line diagram showing transformers, buses,

and interrupting devices with interrupting

capacities; current transformers and potential

transformers with ratings; instruments and meters

required; and description of instruments and meters.

2. Location, space available, arrangement, and

elevations of substations and switchgear.

3. Grounding plan.

4. Type and number of cables, size of conductors for

each power circuit, and point of entry (top or

bottom).

5. Minimum and maximum overall dimensions of

shipping section which can be handled and installed

at destination, as applicable.

6. Transformer primary and secondary voltages. (Use

IEEE C57.12.00, Table 11(b), Designation of voltage

ratings of three-phase windings".) State the primary

voltage (nominal) actually in service and not the

voltage class.

7. Special conditions, such as altitude, temperature

and humidity, exposure to fumes, vapors, dust, and

gases.

8. Where extensions or additions to existing

substations or switchgear are being specified,

clearly distinguish the difference between existing

equipment and the equipment the Contractor is

required to provide under this contract. Clearly

indicate the extent of the Contractor's

../Word/26%2008%2000.doc

../Word/26%2012%2019.10.doc

../Word/26%2012%2021.doc

../Word/33%2071%2001.doc

../Word/33%2071%2002.doc

../Word/26%2013%2000.doc

../Word/26%2011%2016.doc

../Word/26%2023%2000.doc

../Word/26%2024%2013.doc


Section 26 11 13.00 20

responsibility for testing the existing equipment

upon completion of his work.

***************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

***************************************************************************

NOTE: This paragraph is used to list the

publications cited in the text of the guide

specification. The publications are referred to in

the text by basic designation only and listed in this

paragraph by organization, designation, date, and

title.

Use the Reference Wizard's Check Reference feature

when you add a Reference Identifier (RID) outside of

the Section's Reference Article to automatically

place the reference in the Reference Article. Also

use the Reference Wizard's Check Reference feature to

update the issue dates.

References not used in the text will automatically be

deleted from this section of the project

specification when you choose to reconcile references

in the publish print process.

***************************************************************************

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the

extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the

basic designation only.

AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI C12.1 (2008) Electric Meters Code for Electricity

Metering

ANSI C39.1 (1981; R 1992) Requirements for Electrical

Analog Indicating Instruments

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM A123/A123M (2015) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-

Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products

ASTM A153/A153M (2016) Standard Specification for Zinc

Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM A167 (2011) Standard Specification for Stainless

and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip

ASTM A653/A653M (2015; E 2016) Standard Specification for

Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or


Section 26 11 13.00 20

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the

Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A780/A780M (2009; R 2015) Standard Practice for Repair

of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip

Galvanized Coatings

ASTM D117 (2010) Standard Guide for Sampling, Test

Methods, Specifications and Guide for

Electrical Insulating Oils of Petroleum

Origin

ASTM D1535 (2014) Specifying Color by the Munsell System

ASTM D2472 (2000; R 2014) Standard Specification for

Sulphur Hexafluoride

ASTM D3455 (2011) Compatibility of Construction Material

with Electrical Insulating Oil of Petroleum

Origin

ASTM D3487 (2016) Standard Specification for Mineral

Insulating Oil Used in Electrical Apparatus

ASTM D877/D877M (2013) Standard Test Method for Dielectric

Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using

Disk Electrodes

ASTM D92 (2012a) Standard Test Method for Flash and

Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup Tester

FM GLOBAL (FM)

FM APP GUIDE (updated on-line) Approval Guide

http://www.approvalguide.com/

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)

IEEE C2 (2017; Errata 1-2 2017; INT 1 2017) National

Electrical Safety Code

IEEE C37.04 (1999; R 2006; AMD 1 2003; R 2006; ERTA 2005;

R 2006; AMD 2 2008; CORR 2009; INT 2010)

Standard for Rating Structure for AC High-

Voltage Circuit Breakers

IEEE C37.06 (2009) Standard for AC High-Voltage Circuit

Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis

- Preferred Ratings and Related Required

Capabilities for Voltage Above 1000 V

IEEE C37.121 (2012) American National Standard for

Switchgear-Unit Substations - Requirements

IEEE C37.20.2 (1999; Corr 2000; R 2005) Standard for Metal-

Clad Switchgear


Section 26 11 13.00 20

IEEE C37.20.3 (2013) Standard for Metal-Enclosed

Interrupter Switchgear

IEEE C37.41 (2016) Standard Design Tests for High-Voltage

(>1000 V) Fuses and Accessories

IEEE C37.46 (2010) Standard for High Voltage Expulsion

and Current-Limiting Type Power Class Fuses

and Fuse Disconnecting Switches

IEEE C37.71 (2001) Standard Three-Phase, Manually

Operated Subsurface or Vault Load-

Interrupting Switches for Alternating-Current

Systems

IEEE C37.90 (2005; R 2011) Standard for Relays and Relay

Systems Associated With Electric Power

Apparatus

IEEE C57.12.00 (2015) General Requirements for Liquid-

Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating

Transformers

IEEE C57.12.28 (2014) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment -

Enclosure Integrity

IEEE C57.12.80 (2010) Standard Terminology for Power and

Distribution Transformers

IEEE C57.12.90 (2015; Corr 2017) Test Code for Liquid-


Transformers

IEEE C57.13 (2016) Requirements for Instrument

Transformers

IEEE C57.96 (2013) Guide for Loading Dry-Type

Distribution and Power Transformers

IEEE C57.98 (2011) Guide for Transformer Impulse Tests

IEEE C62.11 (2012) Standard for Metal-Oxide Surge

Arresters for Alternating Current Power

Circuits (>1kV)

INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)

NETA ATS (2017) Standard for Acceptance Testing

Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment

and Systems

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

NEMA C12.4 (1984; R 2011) Registers - Mechanical Demand

NEMA C37.72 (1987) Manually-Operated, Dead-Front

Padmounted Switchgear with Load Interrupting


Section 26 11 13.00 20

Switches and Separable Connectors for

Alternating-Current Systems

NEMA LI 1 (1998; R 2011) Industrial Laminating

Thermosetting Products

NEMA ST 20 (1992; R 1997) Standard for Dry-Type

Transformers for General Applications

NEMA TP 1 (2002) Guide for Determining Energy

Efficiency for Distribution Transformers

NEMA/ANSI C12.10 (2011) Physical Aspects of Watthour Meters -

Safety Standards

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 70 (2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2; TIA

17-3) National Electrical Code

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

UL 1437 (2006) Electrical Analog Instruments - Panel

Board Types

UL 467 (2013; Reprint Jun 2017) UL Standard for

Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION

AND TESTING on all projects involving medium voltage

and specialized power distribution equipment

***************************************************************************

Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS and Section 26

08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING apply to this section, with the

additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Review Submittal Description (SD) definitions

in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES and edit the

following list to reflect only the submittals

required for the project.

The Guide Specification technical editors have

designated those items that require Government

approval, due to their complexity or criticality,

with a "G". Generally, other submittal items can be

reviewed by the Contractor's Quality Control System.

Only add a “G” to an item, if the submittal is

sufficiently important or complex in context of the

project.

../Word/26%2008%2000.doc

../Word/26%2000%2000.00%2020.doc

../Word/26%2008%2000.doc

../Word/26%2008%2000.doc

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc


Section 26 11 13.00 20

For submittals requiring Government approval on Army

projects, a code of up to three characters within the

submittal tags may be used following the "G"

designation to indicate the approving authority.

Codes for Army projects using the Resident Management

System (RMS) are: "AE" for Architect-Engineer; "DO"

for District Office (Engineering Division or other

organization in the District Office); "AO" for Area

Office; "RO" for Resident Office; and "PO" for

Project Office. Codes following the "G" typically

are not used for Navy, Air Force, and NASA projects.

Use the "S" classification only in SD-11 Closeout

Submittals. The "S" following a submittal item

indicates that the submittal is required for the

Sustainability eNotebook to fulfill federally

mandated sustainable requirements in accordance with

Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING.

Choose the first bracketed item for Navy, Air Force

and NASA projects, or choose the second bracketed

item for Army projects.

***************************************************************************

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;

submittals not having a "G" designation are [for Contractor Quality Control

approval.][for information only. When used, a designation following the "G"

designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the

Government.] Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability

eNotebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING.

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL

PROCEDURES:

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include the bracketed options on "CI44 and 074

review" for NAVFAC LANT and NAVFAC SE projects

respectively. For other projects, submittal review

shall be performed by the designer of record. If

submittal review by NAVFAC LANT or NAVFAC SE is

specifically desired, the responsible Government

agency must coordinate with the respective Code CI44

or 074 during the design process. Add appropriate

information in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

to coordinate with the special requirements.

***************************************************************************

[Submit in accordance with paragraph entitled "Coordinated Submittal

Reviews" herein.

]1.3.1 Coordinated Submittal Reviews

a. Submit transformer submittals to Code [CI44, Atlantic][074, Southern]

Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command for approval. In

addition, submit one set of the remaining substation components for

surveillance.

../Word/01%2033%2029.doc

../Word/01%2033%2029.doc

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc


Section 26 11 13.00 20

b. Submit remaining substation component submittals to Engineer of Record

for approval. In addition, submit one set of transformer submittals

for surveillance and to insure alignment of equipment and coordination

for interconnections.

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Unit substation drawings; G[, [_____]]

[Transformer drawings [(to Code [CI44][074])]; G[, [_____]]

]SD-03 Product Data

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Use bracketed options referring to Codes CI44

and 074 for NAVFAC LANT and NAVFAC SE projects,

respectively. This requires the designer of record

to review and approve the substation equipment

submittals except for the transformer. The EFD will

review and approve the transformer submittals.

***************************************************************************

Primary unit substations[ excluding transformer data]; G[, [_____]]

[Unit substation transformer[ (to Code [CI44][074])]; G[, [_____]]

] Submittal shall include manufacturer's information for each

component, device and accessory provided with the equipment.

SD-05 Design Data

Capacity calculations for battery charger and batteries; G[,

[_____]]

SD-06 Test Reports

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include "Calibration test reports" for NAVFAC

SE projects.

***************************************************************************

[Calibration test reports; G[, [_____]]]

Submit report of results of acceptance checks and tests specified

by paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control"; G[, [_____]]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Field dielectric tests are recommended only

when new units added to an existing installation or

after major field modifications. If necessary,

service the equipment prior to the field test.

***************************************************************************

[Certified copies of dielectric tests report; G[, [_____]]]

SD-07 Certificates


Section 26 11 13.00 20

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Use "Tested transformer losses" for other than

NAVFAC LANT and NAVFAC SE projects. Use "Transformer

losses" for NAVFAC LANT projects. Use "Transformer

loss calculations" for NAVFAC SE projects.

***************************************************************************

[Tested Transformer Losses; G[, [_____]]]

[Transformer losses; G[, [_____]]]

[Transformer loss calculations; G[, [_____]]]

SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include following option if "less-flammable

transformer liquid" is chosen.

***************************************************************************

[Silicone compatibility tests[ (to code [CI44] [074])]; G[,

[_____]]

]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: If project includes special requirements or

unusual application of the equipment specified in

this section, factory tests may be specified on

completely assembled unit substations as well as

individual components. These completely assembled

tests involve additional cost and specific

requirements must be added to this specification when

they are deemed necessary.

***************************************************************************

Switchgear design tests; G[, [_____]]

Switchgear production tests; G[, [_____]]

Load interrupter switch design tests; G[, [_____]]

Load interrupter switch production tests; G[, [_____]]

Transformer design tests[ to code [CI44][074]]; G[, [_____]]

Transformer routine and other tests[ (to code [CI44][074])]; G[,

[_____]]

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Primary unit substations, Data Package 5; G[, [_____]]

[Unit substation transformer, Data Package 5; G[, [_____]]

] Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE DATA.

SD-11 Closeout Submittals

../Word/01%2078%2023.doc


Section 26 11 13.00 20

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include "Calibration schedule" and "Formal

request for settings" for NAVFAC SE projects.

***************************************************************************

[Calibration schedule; G[, [_____]]

][Formal request for settings; G[, [_____]]

]Equipment test schedule[ (to Code [CI44][074])]; G[, [_____]]

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.4.1 Battery Power Calculations

Submit capacity calculations for battery charger and batteries. Calculation

shall verify that battery capacity exceeds station d.c. power requirements.

1.4.2 [Transformer Losses

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Use this paragraph for NAVFAC LANT projects

only.

***************************************************************************

Submit certification from the manufacturer indicating conformance with the

paragraph entitled "Specified Transformer Losses".

]1.4.3 Unit Substation Drawings

Drawings shall include, but are not limited to the following:

a. An outline drawing with front, top, and side views

b. Ampere ratings of bus bars

c. Maximum short-circuit bracing

d. Nameplate data

[e. Provisions for future extension[ and future forced air equipment]

][f. Circuit breaker[ and switch] type(s), interrupting ratings, and trip

devices including available settings

]g. Elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams with terminals identified and

indicating prewired interconnections between items of equipment and the

interconnection between the items

h. One-line diagram, including switch(es),[ circuit breakers,][ current

transformers, meters,] and fuses

i. Manufacturer's instruction manuals and published time-current curves

(on full size 279 by 431 mm (11 by 17 inches) logarithmic paper) of

the[ fuse in the load interrupter switch,][ main secondary breaker,][

largest secondary feeder device]; transformer thermal and magnetic


Section 26 11 13.00 20

damage information; and transformer inrush current information

(magnetic inrush point). These shall be used by the designer of record

to verify fuse size and to[ provide breaker settings that will] ensure

protection and coordination are achieved.

[1.4.4 Transformer Drawings

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include bracketed option for separate

transformer drawings on NAVFAC LANT and NAVFAC SE

projects only.

***************************************************************************

Drawings shall include, but are not limited to the following:

a. An outline drawing, with top, front, and side views

b. ANSI nameplate data

][1.4.5 Calibration Schedule

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include "Calibration schedule" and "Formal

request for settings" for NAVFAC SE projects only.

***************************************************************************

a. Provide a calibration schedule including the anticipated dates when

equipment requiring coordination and protection will be installed, the

anticipated date when the Contractor will submit a formal request for

settings, and the anticipated date when the manufacturer's technical

representative will perform settings and calibrate equipment.

b. Submit the calibration schedule, via the Contracting Officer to:

NAVFAC SE, Code 05, Construction Department

NAVFAC SE; Code 162; Director, Utilities Engineering Division

][1.4.6 Formal Request for Settings

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The "30" days in brackets below may be

extended for projects involving major electrical

distribution work. Consult with NAVFAC SE Code 162.

***************************************************************************

a. Where settings will be provided by the Government to achieve protection

and coordination via relays and protective devices, submit a formal

request for settings [30][_____] days in advance of the date that

settings will be needed, to allow the Contracting Officer to forward a

copy of approved shop drawings to NAVFAC SE; Code 162; Director,

Utilities Engineering Division.

b. The equipment requiring protection and coordination shall be installed

prior to making this request.


Section 26 11 13.00 20

c. Include approved shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions to set the

protective devices, and manufacturer's time-current curves.

d. Submit the formal request for settings, via the Contracting Officer to:

NAVFAC SE; Code 162; Director, Utilities Engineering Division.

][1.4.7 Calibration Test Reports

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include this paragraph for NAVFAC SE projects.

***************************************************************************

Submit test results on protective relays via the Contracting Officer to

NAVFAC SE; Code 162; Director, Utilities Engineering Division.

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

]1.5 MAINTENANCE

1.5.1 Additions to Operation and Maintenance Data

In addition to requirements of Data Package 5, include the following on the

actual primary unit substations provided.

a. An instruction manual with pertinent items and information highlighted

b. An outline drawing, including front view and sectional views with items

and devices identified

c. Prices for spare parts and supply list

d. Routine and field acceptance test reports

e. Time-Current-Characteristic (TCC) curves of fuses[and circuit breakers]

[f. Information on metering

]g. Actual nameplate diagram

h. Date of purchase

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION

Products and materials not considered to be secondary unit substations and

related accessories are specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL

DISTRIBUTION, and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.2 PRIMARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS

IEEE C37.121, [single-ended][double-ended] arrangement, consisting of

[one][two] incoming sections, [one][two] transformer sections, [one][two]

transition sections, the number of auxiliary sections, bus-tie sections, and

outgoing sections indicated.[ Substation shall be designed for indoor

service.][ Substation shall be designed for outdoor service with

../Word/01%2078%2023.doc

../Word/33%2071%2002.doc

../Word/26%2020%2000.doc


Section 26 11 13.00 20

ventilation openings and gasketing provided to ensure a weatherproof

assembly under rain, snow, sleet, and hurricane conditions.] External doors

shall have provisions for padlocking.

2.2.1 Incoming Sections

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Choose one of the following three choices for

each incoming section: a metal-clad switchgear

section, a metal-enclosed switch section, or an air

filled terminal chamber.

***************************************************************************

[The][Each] incoming section shall consist of [a metal-clad switchgear

section][a metal-enclosed switch section][an air filled terminal chamber]

for connecting the incoming circuit [directly][through a [circuit breaker]

[[fused][nonfused]load interrupter switch]] to the transformer. If required

for proper connection and alignment, include a transition section with the

incoming section. Connection between [circuit breaker][interrupter switch]

and transformer shall be insulated copper bus or insulated copper cable

mounted on porcelain insulators spaced no more than 610 mm (2 feet) apart.

2.2.1.1 Conductor Termination

Conductor terminations shall be designed for terminating [one][two][_____]

single conductor cables per phase and shall be arranged for conduits

entering from [below][above]. Provide cable terminations of the [modular

molded rubber][porcelain insulator] type as specified in Section 33 71 02

UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.

[2.2.1.2 [Vacuum][ or ][SF6] Circuit Breaker as Main Protective Device

***************************************************************************

NOTE: When a separately enclosed, pad mounted SF6

switch is provided as the incoming

disconnecting/overcurrent protection device for the

primary unit substation, use Section 26 13 00

SF6/HIGH-FIREPOINT FLUID INSULATED PAD-MOUNTED

SWITCHGEAR. Modify Section 26 13 00 for vault-type

switches, where applicable.

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Choose this subparagraph or "Load Interrupter

Switch as Main Protective Device".

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Circuit breakers are more costly than fused

switches, but may be needed where switching is

frequent, and quick reclosing is required.

***************************************************************************

The [vacuum][ or ][SF6] circuit breaker shall be an electrically-operated,

three-pole, circuit interrupting device rated for [_____] amperes continuous

at [_____] kV and [_____] kV BIL. Breaker shall be designed for service on

a [_____] kV system with a short-circuit capacity of not less than [_____]

../Word/33%2071%2002.doc

../Word/26%2013%2000.doc

../Word/26%2013%2000.doc


Section 26 11 13.00 20

[amperes symmetrical][MVA]. Rating shall be based on IEEE C37.04 and IEEE

C37.06. Circuit breaker shall be drawout-mounted with position indicator,

operation counter, auxiliary switches, and primary and secondary disconnect

devices. Circuit breaker shall be operated by an electrically charged,

mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating mechanism.

Provide for manual charging of the mechanism. Circuit breaker control

voltage shall be [[_____] Vdc][[_____] Vac].[ SF6 circuit breakers shall be

shipped factory filled with SF6 gas conforming to ASTM D2472.]

a. Contacts: Silver-plated, multifinger, positive pressure, self-aligning

type for main drawout contacts.

b. Each drawout breaker shall be provided with three-position operation.

The connected position and the test/disconnect position shall be

clearly identified by an indicator on the circuit breaker front panel.

1. Connected position: Contacts are fully engaged. Breaker shall be

tripped before it can be racked into or out of this position.

2. Test/disconnect position: Position shall allow for complete

testing and operation of the breaker without energizing the primary

circuit.

3. Withdrawn (removed) positions: Places breaker completely out of

compartment, ready for removal.

][2.2.1.3 Load Interrupter Switch as Main Protective Device

IEEE C37.20.3. Provide a three-pole, single-throw, deadfront, metal-

enclosed, load interrupter switch with manual stored energy operator. Switch

shall be [fused, with fuses mounted on a single frame][non-fused][in series

with [vacuum][ or ][SF6] interrupters] and designed for easy inspection[ and

fuse replacement].[ SF6 gas shall conform to ASTM D2472.] The switch shall

be operated by a manually charged spring stored energy mechanism which shall

simultaneously disconnect or connect ungrounded conductors. The moveable

blade of the switch shall be deenergized when in the open position. The

mechanism shall enable the switch to close against a fault equal to the

momentary rating of the switch without affecting its continuous current

carrying or load interrupting ability. A ground bus shall extend the width

of the switch enclosure and shall be bolted directly thereto. Connect frame

of unit to ground bus. The door shall have an inspection window to allow

full view of the position of the three switch blades through the closed

door. Switch ratings shall be:

a. [_____] kV, [_____] kV BIL for service on a [_____] kV system with a

fault close rating of not less than [_____] amperes asymmetrical.

b. The switch shall be capable of carrying continuously or interrupting

[_____] amperes with a momentary rating of [_____] amperes at [_____]

kV.

c. Switch shall have provision for padlocking in the open and closed

positions.

d. [Fuses shall be current limiting type rated [[_____] amperes

continuous, and [_____] [amperes interrupting capacity.]][approximately


Section 26 11 13.00 20

[_____] percent of the transformer full-load rating and in accordance

with the fuse manufacturer's recommendation.]]

]2.2.2 Primary Transition Section

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Transition section should only be specified

where absolutely necessary.

***************************************************************************

Provide transition section for insulated copper [cable][bus-bar] connections

to the transformer primary terminals. Support [bus][cable] connections

between high-voltage [switch][breaker] and transformer primary by porcelain

insulators[ spaced no more than 610 mm (2 feet) apart]. Size and brace

[bus][cable] to withstand the specified available fault.

2.2.3 Transformer Sections

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Indicate and specify the type of transformers


1. Use mineral oil filled transformers and locate

transformers at least 7.6 meters (25 feet) from

buildings wherever possible. Where adequate distance

from structures cannot be attained, consult NAVFAC

design manuals and MIL-HDBK-1008, "Fire Protection

for Facilities Engineering, Design, and

Construction." Caution should be used in specifying

less-flammable liquid filled transformers. A

thorough analysis should be made by the designer

prior to using silicone filled transformers due to

the concern over operation of tap changers within the

silicone liquid.

2. Use the following option(s) when additional

capacity is required. This involves special

coordination with transformer KVA rating, as well as

sizes and ratings of fuses and secondary breakers.

a. If it is anticipated that future load

requirements will necessitate increasing the capacity

of the transformer, the specification for the

transformer should require the provision of

components and brackets for future forced air

cooling. Forced-air-cooling increases capacity by:

15 percent (750-2000 KVA); 25 percent (2500-5000

KVA).

b. On rare occasions, change "... insulation

system rated for a 65 degrees C rise..." to read

"...insulation system rated for a 55/65 degrees C

rise to allow transformer(s) to have a continuous

overload capacity of 12 percent at rated voltage

without exceeding 75 degrees C winding temperature

rise."


Section 26 11 13.00 20

3. Use IEEE C57.12.00, Figure 3(b), voltage

designations, such as "13200 V - 4160Y/2400 V".

4. Tap ratings may vary from those indicated,

especially in lower kVA ratings.

5. Energy efficient transformers usually have

impedance values in the range of 2.95 to 5.75

percent. Perform fault current calculations to

determine minimum acceptable transformer impedance.

Be sure that specified impedance is available in the

size and type transformer required.

6. Delete inapplicable sound levels.

7. Delete last sentence, referring to removable

ground strap, if transformer secondary winding is

delta type.

***************************************************************************

IEEE C57.12.00. [Less-flammable [bio-based] liquid-insulated] [Oil-

insulated][Less-flammable liquid-insulated], two winding, 60 hertz, 65

degrees C rise above a 30 degrees C average ambient, self-cooled type.

2.2.3.1 Transformer Ratings

a. Transformer shall be rated [_____] kVA, [_____] kV BIL primary, [_____]

kV BIL secondary.

b. Transformer voltage ratings: [_____] V - [_____] V.[ For GrdY - GrdY

transformers, provide transformer with five-legged core design for

third harmonic suppression.]

c. Provide four 2.5 percent full capacity taps, two above and two below

rated primary voltage. Provide tap changer, with external, pad-

lockable, manual type operating handle, for changing tap setting when

the transformer is de-energized.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Change 85 degrees C to 75 degrees C when

transformers are specifically rated for 55/65 degrees

C rise.

***************************************************************************

d. Minimum tested impedance shall not be less than [_____] percent at 85

degrees C.

e. Audible sound levels shall comply with the following:

kVA DECIBELS (MAX)

225 55


Section 26 11 13.00 20

kVA DECIBELS (MAX)

300 55

500 56

750 58

1000 58

1500 60

2000 61

2500 62

5000 65

7500 67

10000 68

f. Diagrammatic stainless steel or laser-etched anodized aluminum

nameplate.

g. Transformer shall include ground pads, lifting lugs and provisions for

jacking under base. The transformer base construction shall be

suitable for using rollers or skidding in any direction. Provide

transformer top with an access handhole. The transformer shall have an

insulated low-voltage neutral bushing with lugs for ground cable, and

with removable ground strap.

h. Transformer shall have the following accessories:

1. Liquid-level indicator

2. Pressure-vacuum gage

3. Liquid temperature indicator

4. Drain and filter valves

5. Pressure relief device

[6. Auxiliary cooling equipment and controls

[(a) Transformer shall have provisions for future addition of

automatically controlled fans for forced-air-cooling.

][(b) Transformer shall be forced-air-cooled. Forced-air-cooling

fans shall have [automatic temperature control relay][winding

temperature indicator with sequence contacts].


Section 26 11 13.00 20

]][2.2.3.2 Specified Transformer Efficiency

***************************************************************************

NOTE: On other than NAVFAC LANT and NAVFAC SE

projects, use "Specified Transformer Efficiency".

Delete "Specified Transformer Losses", "Transformer

Loss Calculations", and "Deduct Clause".

Efficiency shall be specified based on NEMA TP 1

until actual loss values can be coordinated with

industry using life cycle cost economics.

***************************************************************************

Minimum efficiency, based on test results, shall not be less than NEMA Class

1 efficiency as defined by NEMA TP 1.

a. Tested transformer losses: Submit certification from the manufacturer,

with the submitted catalog data, to show conformance with the specified

efficiency requirements. The values used to determine the actual

efficiency shall be the tested no-load losses (NLL) (in watts) at a

reference temperature of 20 degrees C and the tested load losses (LL)

(in watts) at a reference temperature of 85 degrees C. If the

efficiency based on the aforementioned test results, is less than the

NEMA Class 1 efficiency, the transformer is unacceptable. Transformer

efficiency values at both full load and at one-half full load shall be

included on the routine test report.

][2.2.3.3 Specified Transformer Losses

***************************************************************************

NOTE: On NAVFAC LANT projects, use "Specified

Transformer Losses". Delete "Specified Transformer

Efficiency", "Transformer Loss Calculations", and

"Deduct Clause". The appropriate NLL and LL values

for each transformer will be provided by Code CI44 at

the 100 percent review. Until that time, leave the

following bracketed values blank.

***************************************************************************

No-load losses (NLL shall be [_____] watts at 20 degrees C, and load losses

(LL) shall be [_____] watts at 85 degrees C. The values for the specified

losses shall be used for comparison with the losses determined during the

routine tests. If the routine test values exceed the specified no-load

losses by more than 10 percent, or the total losses exceed the specified

total losses (sum of no-load and load losses) by more than 6 percent, the

transformer is unacceptable.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: On NAVFAC SE projects, use "Transformer Loss

Calculations" and "Deduct Clause". Delete "Specified

Transformer Efficiency" and "Specified Transformer

Losses".


Section 26 11 13.00 20

TRANSFORMER LOSSES (WATTS)

kVA 1000 1500 2000 2500

NLL 1250 1725 2100 2775

LL 6050 7300 8425 12000

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

Specify values for the variables "A", "B", & "C"

using Transformer Losses (Watts) table above, Table I

below, and C equals A(NLL) plus B(LL).

TABLE I

ACTIVITY LOSS FACTORS

NAS KEY WEST A = 8.36 B = 2.95

CHARLESTON AFB A = 3.79 B = 1.91

GLAKES COMPLEX A = 4.89 B = 2.14

DFSP CHARLESTON A = 4.54 B = 2.36

NAS CORPUS CHRISTI A = 3.98 B = 2.10

MCAS BEAUFORT A = 4.54 B = 2.36

NAS KINGSVILLE A = 3.98 B = 2.10

MCRD PARRIS ISLAND A = 4.54 B = 2.36

NS INGLESIDE A = 3.98 B = 2.10

NH BEAUFORT A = 4.54 B = 2.36

NAS MERIDIAN A = 4.65 B = 2.19

NH CHARLESTON A = 4.54 B = 2.36

CAPE CANAVERAL A = 6.25 B = 1.78

NISE A = 4.54 B = 2.36

MCLB ALBANY A = 5.26 B = 1.50


Section 26 11 13.00 20

TABLE I


NWS CHARLESTON A = 4.54 B = 2.36

NAS ATLANTA A = 5.26 B = 1.50

NS PASCAGOULA A = 5.30 B = 1.51

NSB, KINGS BAY A = 5.26 B = 1.50

BARKSDALE AFB A = 3.59 B = 1.44

CSS PANAMA CITY A = 4.23 B = 1.96

NAS FORT WORTH A = 3.70 B = 1.70

NAS PENSACOLA A = 4.23 B = 1.96

NAS MEMPHIS A = 3.93 B = 2.09

NAS SAUFLEY A = 4.23 B = 1.96

ANDROS ISLAND A = 3.56 B = 1.84

NAS WHITING FIELD A = 4.23 B = 1.96

ASCENSION ISLAND A = 3.56 B = 1.84

NTTC CORRY A = 4.23 B = 1.96

DETROIT A = 3.56 B = 1.84

BLOUT ISLAND A = 4.72 B = 1.89

DFSP ALASKA A = 3.56 B = 1.84

NAS JACKSONVILLE A = 4.72 B = 1.89

EGLIN AFB A = 3.56 B = 1.84

NS MAYPORT A = 4.72 B = 1.89

INDIAN NAWC A = 3.56 B = 1.84

NAS NEW ORLEANS A = 3.23 B = 2.07

NASC LOUISVILLE A = 3.56 B = 1.84

SA NOLA WEST BAN A = 3.23 B = 2.07


Section 26 11 13.00 20

TABLE I


NPC FRINDLEY A = 3.56 B = 1.84

KEESLER AFB A = 4.03 B = 1.64

NWS CRANE A = 3.02 B = 1.55

NCBC GULFPORT A = 4.03 B = 1.64

POPE AFB A = 3.56 B = 1.84

STENNIS SPC A = 4.03 B = 1.64

SELFRIDGE ANG A = 3.56 B = 1.84

NSA NOLA EAST BANK A = 5.10 B = 1.97

SEYMOUR JOHNSON AFB A = 3.56 B = 1.84

ORLANDO COMPLEX A = 4.62 B = 1.84

SHAW AFB A = 3.56 B = 1.84

TINKER AFB A = 3.56 B = 1.84

***************************************************************************

][2.2.3.4 Transformer Loss Calculations

a. "A" and "B" are given loss factors. A equals [_____]; B equals

[_____]

b. "C" is the cost of losses. C equals $ [_____]

c. "NLL" and "LL" are the transformer no-load losses (watts) at 20 degrees

C, and load-losses (watts) at 85 degrees C, respectively.

][2.2.3.5 Deduct Clause

After routine test results are available, Contractor shall perform actual

transformer loss calculations (D) using test result values for NLL and LL,

and values specified above for A and B. Submit calculations for each

transformer with the routine test submittal. Calculate using equation: "D

equals A(NLL) plus B(LL)".

a. If D is less than or equal to C: No adjustment will be made to

contract price.

b. If D is greater than C: A unilateral contract modification will be

issued in the amount of difference between C and D.


Section 26 11 13.00 20

c. If D is greater than 1.25(C): The transformer is unacceptable.

]2.2.3.6 Insulating Liquids

a. Less-flammable [bio-based] transformer liquids: NFPA 70 and FM APP

GUIDE for less-flammable liquids having a fire point not less than 300

degrees C tested in accordance with ASTM D92 and a dielectric strength

not less than 33 kV tested in accordance with ASTM D877/D877M. Do not

provide askarel or insulating liquids containing polychlorinated

biphenyls (PCB's), tetrachloroethylene (perchloroethylene), chlorine

compounds, and halogenated compounds.

[1. Silicone compatibility tests: When silicone is used as a less-

flammable transformer liquid, compatibility of silicone with seals

and gasketing materials in oil-immersed type tap changers shall be

determined by compatibility tests conducted in accordance with ASTM

D3455. Test results shall show no evidence of shrinkage, swelling,

or absorption caused by the liquid.

][ba. Mineral oil: ASTM D3487, Type II, tested in accordance with ASTM

D117. Provide identification of transformer as "non-PCB" on the

nameplate.

][b. Less-flammable transformer liquids: NFPA 70 and FM APP GUIDE for

less-flammable liquids having a fire point not less than 300 degrees C

tested in accordance with ASTM D92 and a dielectric strength not less

than 33 kV tested in accordance with ASTM D877/D877M. Do not provide

askarel or insulating liquids containing polychlorinated biphenyls

(PCB's), tetrachloroethylene (perchloroethylene), chlorine compounds,

and halogenated compounds.

[1. Silicone compatibility tests: When silicone is used as a less-

flammable transformer liquid, compatibility of silicone with seals and

gasketing materials in oil-immersed type tap changers shall be

determined by compatibility tests conducted in accordance with ASTM

D3455. Test results shall show no evidence of shrinkage, swelling, or

absorption caused by the liquid.

]]2.2.4 Secondary Transition[ and Auxiliary] Section(s)

The secondary transition[ and auxiliary] section(s) shall have a hinged

front panel, a [_____]-ampere, three-phase, [three][four]-wire[ insulated]

main bus and connections, a ground bus, necessary terminal blocks, wiring

and control buses, control power transformer, and cable supports.[ In the

auxiliary section provide a [_____]-V battery complete with rack and

standard accessories, and a battery charger, static type, [without voltage

regulation][with automatic charger control], complete with ammeter,

voltmeter, and rheostat.]

2.2.4.1 Control Power Transformers

Transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at rated kVA 24

hours a day, 365 days a year with normal life expectancy as defined in IEEE

C57.96. Dry-type, two-winding type, 115 degrees C rise above 40 degrees C

maximum ambient designed for mounting in switchgear cubicle or drawer.

Transformer shall be sized as required to serve the connected load and shall


Section 26 11 13.00 20

have a voltage rating of [_____] kV three-phase, delta primary, and

[120/208][277/480] V wye secondary, 60 Hz.

2.2.4.2 Primary Protection

Provide drawout-mounted, primary current limiting fuses rated for the

specified transformer size and the available short-circuit current.

2.2.4.3 Secondary Protection

Provide molded-case circuit breakers or molded-case switch sized as

required, mounted in same compartment with transformer and primary fuses to

serve the indicated loads.

2.2.5 Metal-Clad Switchgear Outgoing Section

***************************************************************************

NOTE: This paragraph may also be used to specify

freestanding switchgear not directly connected to a

unit substation. This paragraph is not intended to

be used for generator control switchgear without

extensive modification and coordination with

applicable diesel engine generator guide

specifications. Specify Category A requirements when

switchgear area is subject to access by the

unsupervised general public. Category B enclosures

must be fence enclosed or in a locked room.

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: To help determine whether metal-clad

switchgear or metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear

is more appropriate for a project, consider that the

primary applications for interrupter switchgear are

where there are no instantaneous relaying and where

switching is infrequent. Also interrupter switchgear

is significantly less costly than metal-clad

switchgear.

***************************************************************************

IEEE C37.20.2 for metal-clad medium-voltage [vacuum][SF6] circuit breaker

type, insulated for [5][15] kV for use on [_____] kV system. Each steel

unit forming part of the switchgear structure shall be self-contained and

shall house [one-high][two-high] breaker or instrument compartments, and a

full height center and rear compartment for the buses and outgoing cable

connections. For two-high breaker units, provide a removable metal barrier

to separate the two cable circuits. Equip individual circuit-breaker

compartments with drawout contacts, rails, disconnecting mechanism, and a

cell interlock to prevent moving the removable element into or out of the

"connected" position while the circuit breaker is closed. Provide a steel

door for each breaker compartment. Enclosures shall be designed for

[indoor][outdoor] location and shall conform to the Category [A][B]

requirements of Table A1 of Appendix A to IEEE C37.20.2. Design the

structure to allow for future additions. Provide laminated plastic

nameplates for each relay, switch, meter, device, and cubicle to identify

its function. Provide permanent labels for wiring and terminals


Section 26 11 13.00 20

corresponding to the designations on approved shop drawings. Mount

nameplates on each circuit breaker compartment door.

a. Phase buses and connections: Mount bus structure on insulated supports

of high-impact, non-tracking, high-quality insulating material and

brace bus to withstand the mechanical forces exerted during short-

circuit conditions when connected directly to a source having maximum

of [_____] amperes rms symmetrical available. Bus bars shall be rated

[_____] amperes and shall be high conductivity copper having silver

plated joints. Make bus bar connections from main buses to the

incoming circuit breaker studs. Equip outgoing circuit breaker studs

with mechanical clamp type cable connectors for the size of cables

shown. Provide cable supports for outgoing cables. Wire secondary

circuits, including heater circuits, to terminal blocks. Terminal

blocks shall be readily accessible for making external connections as

required.

b. Ground bus: Provide a copper ground bus sized for full short-circuit

capacity. Secure ground bus to each vertical structure and extend

ground bus the entire length of switchgear. Include provisions for

making the station ground connections.

c. DC bus: Provide an insulated copper bus or wire extending the entire

length of switchgear. Bus shall be rated 100 amperes at 125 Vdc. Wire

shall be No. 6 AWG minimum.

d. Each breaker compartment shall have provision for mounting up to four

sets of ANSI rated current transformers, two on line side and two on

load side of each breaker.

2.2.5.1 Circuit Breaker

Each [vacuum][SF6] circuit breaker shall be an electrically operated, three-

pole, circuit interrupting device rated as indicated at maximum voltage of

[_____] kV and [_____] kV BIL. Breaker shall be designed for service on a

[_____] kV system with a short-circuit capacity of not less than [_____]

[amperes symmetrical][MVA]. Rating shall be based on IEEE C37.04 and IEEE

C37.06. Breaker frame size shall be as indicated. Circuit breaker shall be

drawout-mounted with position indicator, operation counter, auxiliary

switches, and primary and secondary disconnect devices. Circuit breaker

shall be operated by an electrically charged, mechanically and electrically

trip-free, stored-energy operating mechanism. Provide for manual charging

of the mechanism and for slow closing of the contacts for inspection or

adjustment. Circuit breaker control voltage shall be [_____] Vdc.

a. Contacts: Silver-plated, multifinger, positive pressure, self-aligning

type for main drawout contacts.

b. Each drawout breaker shall be provided with three-position operation.

The connected position and the test/disconnect position shall be

clearly identified by an indicator on the circuit breaker front panel.

1. Connected position: Contacts are fully engaged. Breaker shall be

tripped before it can be racked into or out of this position.


Section 26 11 13.00 20

2. Test/disconnect position: Position shall allow for complete

testing and operation of the breaker without energizing the primary

circuit.

3. Withdrawn (removed) positions: Places breaker completely out of

compartment, ready for removal.

2.2.5.2 Space Only Compartments

Provide fully equipped with busing, control switch, indicating lights, and

drawout breaker mounting and connecting straps to accommodate future

breakers. Provide compartments with doors.

2.2.5.3 Breaker Lifter

Provide a portable lifter rated for lifting and lowering circuit breakers

from two-high cubicles. Portable lifter shall have swivel casters in front

for ease of movement.

2.2.6 Protective Relays, Metering, and Control Devices

2.2.6.1 Relays

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The definition and application of device

function numbers used in electrical substations and

switchgear are found in ANSI C37.2, "IEEE Standard

Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers." For

description and application of commonly used relays,

refer to MIL-HDBK-1004/3, "Switchgear and Relaying."

This guide specification does not cover all possible

relay applications. Choose only the relay types

applicable to the specific project.

***************************************************************************

Relays shall conform to IEEE C37.90. Protective relays shall be induction

type or solid-state type enclosed in rectangular, semiflush, switchboard-

type drawout cases with indicating targets and provisions for testing in

place by use of manufacturer's standard test blocks or test switches. One

complete set of test blocks or test switches to fit each type of relay in

the equipment shall be provided. Auxiliary and lockout relays are not

required to have drawout cases or test provisions. Controls, relays, and

protective functions shall be provided completely assembled and wired.

a. Phase overcurrent relays (device [50/]51): Provide [_____] sets of

three time overcurrent relays responding to phase currents wired to

trip associated circuit breakers upon the occurrence of a current above

the tap setting of the relays. Each relay shall have [very][extremely]

inverse time characteristics with a tap range of [_____] to [_____]

amperes.[ Each relay shall be equipped with an instantaneous

overcurrent unit having a pickup value over the range of [_____] to

[_____] amperes.][ Relays shall be Type [_____].]

b. Ground overcurrent relays (device [50/]51N): Provide a time

overcurrent relay responding to ground (residual) current, wired to

trip the associated circuit breaker upon occurrence of ground current

above the tap setting of the relay. Relay shall have [very][extremely]


Section 26 11 13.00 20

inverse time characteristics with a tap range of [_____] to [_____]

amperes. Relay shall be equipped with an instantaneous overcurrent

unit having a pickup value adjustable over the range of [_____] to

[_____] amperes.[ Relays shall be Type [_____].]

c. Ground overcurrent relays (device 51N): Provide a time overcurrent

relay responding to ground (residual) current, wired to trip the

associated circuit breaker upon occurrence of ground current above the

tap setting of the relay. Relay shall have [very][extremely] inverse

time characteristics with a tap range of [_____] to [_____] amperes.[

Relay shall be equipped with an instantaneous overcurrent unit having a

pickup value adjustable over the range of [_____] to [_____] amperes.][

Relays shall be Type [_____].]

d. Directional phase overcurrent relays (device 67): Provide [_____] sets

of three directionally controlled time overcurrent relays sensing phase

current, wired to trip associated circuit breakers upon a current

exceeding the tap setting in the direction indicated. Relays shall

have a voltage polarized directional unit and an inverse time

characteristic overcurrent unit. Overcurrent unit shall have a tap

range of [_____] to [_____] amperes.[ Relays shall be Type [_____].]

e. Directional ground overcurrent relays (device 67N): Provide

directionally controlled time overcurrent relays sensing ground

(residual) current. Relays shall be wired to trip the associated

circuit breaker upon a current exceeding the tap setting in the

direction indicated. Relays shall have a current and voltage polarized

directional unit and an inverse time characteristic overcurrent unit.

Relays shall be voltage polarized. Auxiliary potential transformers

shall be provided to obtain polarizing voltage. Overcurrent unit shall

have a tap range of [_____] to [_____] amperes.[ Relays shall be Type

[_____].]

f. Lockout relays (device 86): Provide hand reset, electrically tripped,

high-speed auxiliary relays where indicated. Relays shall be tripped

by the indicated devices and shall be wired to trip the associated

circuit breaker and prohibit closing of the circuit breaker by local

and remote controls until the lockout relay has been reset by hand to

its normal position. Each relay shall be provided with the number of

contacts required to perform the indicated function and, in addition,

shall have a minimum of two spare normally closed contacts and two

spare normally open contacts.

g. Bus differential relays (device 87B): Provide a set of three high-

speed, high-impedance, single-phase bus differential relays, wired to

trip the circuit breakers connected to the protected bus upon

occurrence of a fault within the zone of protection. Relays shall not

trip the circuit breakers on through current to a fault outside the

zone of protection. Current signals shall be obtained from dedicated

current transformers. Bus differential relay shall include a voltage-

operated unit which shall operate in three to six cycles for low-

magnitude faults and a current-operated unit which shall operate in one

to three cycles on moderate to severe faults. Relay shall include a

thyrite voltage-limiting unit. Voltage-operated unit shall have an

adjustment range of 75 to 500 V. Current-operated unit shall have an

adjustment range of 2 to 50 amperes.


Section 26 11 13.00 20

[h. Trip blocking test switches: Trip blocking test switches shall be

provided to block tripping of 34.5-kV circuit breakers from the bus

differential lockout relay. Trip blocking test switches shall be back-

connected knife switches in a semiflush panel-mounted insulating case

with removable clear glass or acrylic cover. Knife switches shall be

rated for at least 125 Vdc and 30 amperes. Knife switches shall have

an insulated operating knob.

][i. Transformer differential relays (device 87T): Provide a set of three

high-speed, percentage differential relays for protection of three-

phase, delta-wye, two-winding transformer. Relays shall sense phase

currents from the transformer primary current transformers and

transformer secondary breaker current transformers. Relays shall trip

the primary circuit breakers and the transformer secondary breakers.

Relays shall have a sensitive differential unit to detect faults within

the protected zone. Relays shall have a harmonic restraint unit to

prevent tripping on transformer inrush current and two restraint

transformers to prevent tripping on through-current to a fault outside

the zone. Relays shall have a sensitivity of 0.35 times the tap value.

Relays shall have ratio taps in the range of 2.9 to 8.7 amperes.

Relays shall be Type [_____].

][j. Fault pressure relay (device 63): Provide a fault pressure relay

sensitive to rate of rise of transformer tank pressure to detect

internal faults in transformer windings. Fault pressure relay shall be

wired to a compatible auxiliary seal-in relay (Device 63X), which shall

trip primary circuit breakers and transformer secondary breakers of the

associated transformer via a lockout relay. Fault pressure relay shall

be transformer mounted and auxiliary relay shall be panel mounted in a

semiflush case. Auxiliary relay shall have trip-indicating targets.

]k. Thermal relay (device 49): Provide a winding thermal relay, with

associated accessories. Equipment shall indicate the winding

temperature of the transformer, provide automatic cooling fan control,

and shall have one spare single-pole, double-throw contact for remote

indication of overtemperature for connection to a future Supervisory

Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System.

l. Auxiliary control relays: Provide as required to implement protective

functions and interlocking as indicated. Auxiliary relays shall have

contacts rated to carry 30 amperes for one minute and 12 amperes

continuously. Coils shall be a long-life design with a projected

service life of 40 years.

1. Auxiliary relays used for tripping circuit breakers shall be

multicontact, high-speed relays operating in one-half cycle or

less.

2. Auxiliary relays for functions other than tripping circuit breakers

shall be normal-speed relays operating in two cycles or less.

3. Auxiliary timing relays shall be electro-pneumatic relays with

contacts rated for at least the load they are controlling.

2.2.6.2 Instruments

***************************************************************************


Section 26 11 13.00 20

NOTE: Select essential instruments and meters. Add

to the specification any special metering not listed

which is required for a specific project. Use of an

Electronic Monitoring System and Electronic Trip

Assemblies in the breakers may eliminate the need for

many individual electro-mechanical meters. This may

also be accomplished on simpler systems by using the

electronic watthour meter and identifying the desired

special programming features. For NAVFAC SE

projects, provide three thermal demand ammeters.

***************************************************************************

ANSI C39.1 for electrical indicating switchboard instruments, with one

percent accuracy class, antiparallax pointer, and glare-free face with

scales as indicated and coordinated to the ratios of the current and

potential transformers provided. AC ammeters and voltmeters shall be a

minimum of [50][115] mm ([2][4 1/2] inches) square, with 4.36 rad (250

degree )scale. Provide single-phase indicating instruments with flush-

mounted transfer switches for reading three phases.

a. AC ammeters: Transformer rated, 5-ampere input, 60 Hz.

b. AC voltmeters: Transformer rated, 150-volt input, 60 Hz.[ Provide

external dropping resistors.]

c. AC wattmeters: Transformer rated for 120-volt input, 60 Hz, three-

phase, four-wire, with scale range coordinated to the ratios of the

associated current transformers and potential transformers.[ Provide

external dropping resistors.]

d. Frequency meters: Rated for 120-volt input, 60 Hz nominal frequency,

[_____] to [_____] Hz scale range.

e. Synchroscope: Transformer rated at 120-volt input, 60 Hz, with slow-

fast scale.

f. Power-factor meters: Transformer rated 5-ampere, [120][208]-volt

input, [_____] scale range for use on [three][four]-wire, three-phase

circuits. The accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.01.

g. DC ammeters: [Self-contained][Shunt-rated], [0 to [_____]

ampere][[_____] to 0 to [_____] ampere] scale range.

h. DC voltmeters: Self-contained, [0 to [_____] volt][[_____] to 0 volt]

scale range. Furnish resistors, if required, with the voltmeter.

2.2.6.3 Instrument Control Switches

Provide rotary cam-operated type with positive means of indicating contact

positions. Switches shall have silver-to-silver contacts enclosed in a

protective cover which can be removed to inspect the contacts.

2.2.6.4 Electronic Watthour Meter

***************************************************************************

NOTE: On standard projects, use of the electronic

meter versus the optional electro-mechanical meter is


Section 26 11 13.00 20

recommended due to decreasing availability of

electro-mechanical meters.

***************************************************************************

Provide a switchboard style electronic programmable watthour meter, semi-

drawout, semi-flush mounted, [in the outgoing section][as indicated]. Meter

shall either be programmed at the factory or shall be programmed in the

field. When field programming is performed, turn field programming device

over to the Contracting Officer at completion of project. Meter shall be

coordinated to system requirements.

a. Design: Provide meter designed for use on a 3-phase, 4-wire, [___/___]

volt system with 3 current transformers. Include necessary KYZ pulse

initiation hardware for Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS)[ as

specified in Section 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC].

b. Coordination: Provide meter coordinated with ratios of current

transformers and transformer secondary voltage.

c. Class: [_____]. Form: [_____]. Accuracy: plus or minus 1.0 percent.

Finish: Class II.

d. Kilowatt-hour Register: 5 digit electronic programmable type.

e. Demand Register:

1. Provide solid state.

2. Meter reading multiplier: Indicate multiplier on meter face.

3. Demand interval length: shall be programmed for [15][30][60]

minutes with rolling demand up to six subintervals per interval.

f. Meter fusing: Provide a fuse block mounted in the metering compartment

containing one fuse per phase to protect the voltage input to the

watthour meter. Size fuses as recommended by the meter manufacturer.

[g. Special Programming Instructions: [_____].

]2.2.6.5 Electro-mechanical Watthour Meters

***************************************************************************

NOTE: On bases that employ Energy Monitoring and

Control Systems (EMCS) and monitor each building

individually, add the following to this paragraph:

"Provide watthour meter with a three-wire, single-

pole double-throw, quick-make, quick-break pulse

initiator. Coordinate pulse output ratio with main

circuit breaker rating."

***************************************************************************

NEMA/ANSI C12.10. Kilowatt-hour meters shall be transformer rated,

polyphase, 60 Hz, semiflush mounted, drawout or semidrawout switchboard

meters for use on a four-wire wye, three-phase system. Kilowatt-hour meters

shall be [two and one-half][three]-stator.[ Totalizing kilowatt-hour meters

shall be four-stator, two-circuit. For totalizing meters, provide devices

and equipment required to provide single point metering of real power and

../Word/23%2009%2000.doc


Section 26 11 13.00 20

reactive power from two inputs as indicated.] Each meter shall have a five-

dial pointer type register and shall be secondary reading. Register ratio

shall be selected to provide a meter reading multiplier of even hundreds

after applying the product of the current transformer ratio and the

potential transformer ratio. Indicate the meter reading multiplier on the

meter face. The kilowatt-hour meter shall have a [sweep hand][cumulative]

type KW demand register with 15-minute interval conforming to NEMA C12.4.

2.2.6.6 Electric Strip-Chart Recording AC Wattmeter

UL 1437 for [surface][semiflush] mounting. Chart speed shall be [_____] mm

([_____] inches)per [hour][minute] and chart drive motor shall be rated

[240][120][120/240] V, 60 Hz. The instrument shall have a full scale

accuracy of one percent.

2.2.6.7 Instrument Transformers

IEEE C57.13, as applicable.

a. Current transformers: Transformers shall be [multi-ratio][ or ][single

ratio] as indicated, 60 Hz, and coordinated to the rating of the

associated switchgear, relays, meters, and instruments.

b. Potential transformers: Transformers shall be drawout type, 60 Hz,

with voltage ratings and ratios coordinated to the ratings of the

associated switchgear, relays, meters, and instruments. Potential

transformers shall be with [one fuse][two fuses] in the primary. Fuses

shall be current limiting and sized as recommended by the potential

transformer manufacturer.

2.2.6.8 Heaters

Provide 120-volt heaters in each switchgear section. Heaters shall be of

sufficient capacity to control moisture condensation in the compartments,

and shall be sized 250 watts minimum. Heaters shall be controlled by a

thermostat[ and humidistat] located inside each section. Thermostats shall

be industrial type, high limit, to maintain compartments within the range of

15 to 32 degrees C (60 to 90 degrees F).[ Humidistats shall have a range of

30 percent to 60 percent relative humidity.] Provide transformer rated to

carry 125 percent of heater full load rating. Transformers shall have 220

degrees C insulation system with a temperature rise not exceeding 115

degrees C and shall conform to NEMA ST 20. Provide panelboard and circuit

breakers in each switchgear assembly to serve the heaters in that switchgear

assembly. Energize electric heaters in switchgear assemblies while the

equipment is in storage or in place prior to being placed in service.

Provide method for easy connection of heater to external power source.

2.2.6.9 Pilot and Indicating Lights

Provide transformer, resistor, or diode type.

2.2.7 Station Batteries and Charger

***************************************************************************

NOTE: For NAVFAC SE projects, specify maintenance-

free sealed batteries only.

***************************************************************************


Section 26 11 13.00 20

Provide station batteries and charger, suitable for the requirements of the

switchgear and [vacuum][SF6] circuit breakers. Batteries shall be [_____]

V, 60 cells, lead-acid, [pasted plate type][ or ][sealed, totally absorbed

electrolyte type].

a. Pasted plate type batteries: Positive plates shall be of the

manchester type and negative plates shall have a life equal to or

greater than the positive plates. Battery containers shall be heat and

impact resistant clear plastic with electrolyte level lines permanently

marked on all four sides. A permanent leakproof seal shall be provided

between cover and container and around cell posts. Sprayproof vent

plugs shall be provided in covers. Sufficient sediment space shall be

provided so that the battery will not have to be cleaned out during its

normal life. High porosity separators to provide correct spacing

between plates shall be provided. Capacity shall be calculated by

switchgear manufacturer and approved by Contracting Officer before

acceptance.

b. Sealed batteries: Provide batteries with leakproof, spillproof

electrolyte utilizing highly absorbent material to separate the

positive and negative plates. Battery jars shall be hermetically

sealed with welded seams. Batteries shall be maintenance-free and

shall not require water to be added. Capacity shall be calculated by

switchgear manufacturer and approved by Contracting Officer before

acceptance.

c. Battery charger shall be full-wave rectifier type, utilizing silicon

semiconductor devices. Charger shall maintain a float charge of 2.15 V

per cell and an equalizing charge of 2.33 V per cell. An equalizing

charge timer shall be provided which operates automatically after an AC

power failure of 5 seconds or more. Timer shall be adjustable for any

time period up to 24 hours. Timer shall also be capable of being

actuated manually. Adjustable float and equalizing voltage

potentiometers shall be provided. Charger voltage shall be maintained

within plus or minus 1/2 percent from no load to full load with AC line

variations of plus or minus 10 percent and frequency variations of plus

or minus 5 percent. DC voltmeter and ammeter with a minimum 90 mm (3

1/2 inch) scale and 2 percent accuracy of full scale shall be provided.

Output current shall be limited to 115 percent of rated output current,

even down to short circuit of the DC output terminals. Solid state

circuit shall have AC and DC transient voltage terminals. AC and DC

magnetic circuit breakers shall be provided. Circuit breakers shall

not be overloaded or actuated under any external circuit condition,

including recharge of a fully discharged battery and short circuit of

the output terminals. Charger shall be capable of continuous operation

at rated current at an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. Output DC

current capacity shall match the requirements of the batteries

provided.

d. Secure battery rack such that it can not overturn or be disrupted by

lateral forces accompanying a seismic disturbance. Provide steel,

three-step racks, painted with two coats of acid resistant paint for

mounting batteries. Provide lead-plated copper inter-rack connectors

and cell numbers with each rack.


Section 26 11 13.00 20

2.2.8 Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear Outgoing Section

***************************************************************************

NOTE: This paragraph may also be used to specify

freestanding switchgear not directly connected to a

unit substation. This paragraph can not be used for

generator control switchgear. Specify Category A

requirements when switchgear area is subject to

access by the unsupervised general public. Category

B enclosures must be fence enclosed or in a locked

room.

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: To help determine whether metal-clad

switchgear or metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear

is more appropriate for a project, consider that the

primary applications for interrupter switchgear are

where there are no instantaneous relaying and where

switching is infrequent. Also interrupter switchgear

is significantly less costly than metal-clad

switchgear.

***************************************************************************

IEEE C37.20.3 for metal-enclosed [air][vacuum][SF6] load interrupter type

switches, insulated for [5][15][27] kV for use on [_____] kV system. The

metal-enclosed switchgear assembly shall consist of individual, factory-

assembled, freestanding modular units, each with provisions for bolt-

together installation. Modules shall have uniform dimensions, constructed

of rigidly braced 14-gage steel with a durable corrosion-resistant finish.

Units shall include a removable front panel, capable of being locked, for

access to cable connections and fusing, internal venting for air

circulation, lifting/mounting provisions and centralized, front facing

controls[ with mimic bus line diagram] and identification nameplates.

Modules shall allow incoming/outgoing cable entry from the bottom, sides or

rear with adequate access for training and connection of cable using lugs

and indoor terminations. Modular units shall include necessary provisions

for future expansion with removable end covers and extendable high-

conductivity copper main and ground bus interconnections. Main bus shall be

fully insulated and mounted on insulated supports of high-impact, non-

tracking, high-quality insulating material. Bus shall be braced to

withstand the mechanical forces exerted during short-circuit conditions when

connected directly to a source having maximum of [_____] amperes rms

symmetrical available. Phase bus bars shall be rated [_____] amperes.

Ground bus shall be sized for full short-circuit capacity and shall include

provisions for external ground connections. Enclosures shall be designed

for [indoor][outdoor] location and shall conform to Category [A][B]

requirements of Table A1 of Appendix A to IEEE C37.20.3. Provide permanent

labels for wiring and terminals corresponding to the designations on

approved shop drawings. A safety glass window shall be provided in the door

panel in front of each interrupter switch to observe its position.

[2.2.8.1 Air-Insulated Load Interrupter Switches

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Choose this paragraph or one of the

subparagraphs below entitled, "SF6-Insulated Load


Section 26 11 13.00 20

Interrupter Switches" or "Vacuum-Insulated Load

Interrupter Switches."

***************************************************************************

Load interrupter switches shall be three-pole, gang-operated, [fused][non-

fused], arranged with hinge end of switch on load side to provide for "dead

blade."[ Fuses shall be located on hinge side of switch.] Switch handles

shall be non-removable, operable from front of cubicle. Switch shall be

equipped with stored-energy, quick-make and quick-break device to operate

the switch independent of the handle or power operator speed. Load

interrupter switches shall be rated at [600][1200] amperes continuous, 61 kA

momentary, 38 kA short-time fault closing. Switches shall be [manual handle

operated "close" and "open"][manual handle operated "close" and remote

operated "open" by electrical release device][power operated "close" and

"open" utilizing motor charged closing spring mechanism and electrical

release device].

][2.2.8.2 SF6-Insulated Load Interrupter Switches

SF6 filled, puffer-type load interrupter switches shall be [fused][ or

][non-fused] as indicated. Switches shall incorporate self-aligning,

copper-silver plated, wiping-type contacts. SF6 puffer interrupters to

minimize arcing during operation; and an internal absorbent to neutralize

arc by-products. Switch contacts shall be enclosed and sealed in

maintenance-free, SF6 filled, molded epoxy insulated case, surrounded by

dead-front metallic barriers. Switch operation shall be controlled by

permanently lubricated quick-make, quick-break spring operator with solid

linkage connection to contact operating shaft. Switch operator shall be

mounted in separate dead-front compartment with access for addition of

remote or automatic accessories, and shall include removable operating

handle with storage provision, positive position indicators, and padlock

provisions. SF6 gas shall conform to ASTM D2472.[ Fused load interrupter

switches shall be provided with clip-style, mounted air-insulated current

limiting fuses and molded epoxy interphase barriers. Provide neon voltage

indicators for blown fuse indication.] Load interrupter switch shall be

rated [_____] continuous, [_____] kA momentary, [_____] kA short-time fault

closing.

][2.2.8.3 Vacuum-Insulated Load Interrupter Switches

Circuit interrupting device shall be [fused][non-fused], fixed mounted,

[manually][electrically] operated, and shall be quick-make, quick-break with

speed of operation independent of the operator. Electrically operated

device shall be [120 Vac][125 Vdc]. Spring charging mechanism shall not

rely on chains or cables.[ Motor operator assembly shall be a separate

device, isolated from high voltage and coupled through a direct drive

shaft.] Circuit interrupter shall consist of automatic visible blade

disconnects in series with vacuum interrupters. Arc interruption shall take

place within the envelope of the vacuum interrupter. Upon opening, contacts

in the vacuum interrupter shall separate 12 to 18 milliseconds before

disconnect blades open. Total circuit interrupt opening time shall not

exceed 3.0 cycles after the trip coil is energized at 85 to 100 percent of

rated control voltage. Upon closing, disconnect blades shall close 9 to 12

milliseconds before contact is made in the vacuum interrupter. Local

interrupter switch shall be rated [_____] continuous, [_____] kA momentary,

[_____] kA short-time fault closing.


Section 26 11 13.00 20

][2.2.8.4 Fuses

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Other fuse types may be specified if more

appropriate to the project.

***************************************************************************

IEEE C37.41 and IEEE C37.46 as applicable. High-voltage fuses and non-

disconnecting fuse mountings shall be accessible only through a separate

door mechanically interlocked with the load break switch, to ensure the

switch is in the open position when fuses are accessible. Switch shall be

designed with full height fuse access doors and shall have a solid barrier

covering the area of the main cross bus and line side of the switch. Metal

screen barriers are not acceptable. No energized parts shall be within

normal reach of the opened doorway. Four single full length interphase

barriers shall isolate the three phases of the switch from each other and

from the enclosures. Fuses shall be [current limiting type of self-

contained design to limit available fault current stresses on the system and

shall have interrupting capacity [as indicated][of [_____] amperes

symmetrical rms].][boric acid type with provisions for refill units complete

with muffler exhaust. Furnish three spare fuse refill units for each switch

and fuse assembly.] Fuses shall be affixed in position with provisions for

removal and replacement from the front of the gear without the use of

special tools.

]2.2.9 Insulated Barriers

Where insulated barriers are required by reference standards, provide

barriers in accordance with NEMA LI 1, Type GPO-3, 6.35 mm (0.25 inch)

minimum thickness.

[2.2.10 SF6 Refill Cylinders

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Coordinate with activity to determine if

refill cylinders are required. Many activities have

an adequate supply of SF6 gas on hand.

***************************************************************************

Provide two SF6 refill cylinders, with a minimum of 2.724 kg (6 pounds) of

SF6 in each. Include regulator, valves, and hose for connection to the fill

valve of the switch.

]2.2.11 Corrosion Protection

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Choose the level of corrosion protection

required for the specific project location. Use

stainless steel bases for most applications. In less

corrosive environments galvanized steel can be

included as an alternative to stainless steel. In

hostile environments, the additional cost of totally

stainless steel tanks and metering may be justified.

Manufacturer's standard construction material is

acceptable only in noncoastal and noncorrosive

environments.

***************************************************************************


Section 26 11 13.00 20

Bases frames, and channels of unit substation shall be corrosion resistant

and shall be fabricated of stainless steel[ or galvanized steel]. Base

shall include any part of unit substation that is within 75 mm (3 inches) of

concrete pad. Paint unit substation, including bases, light gray No. 61 or

No. 49.[ Paint coating system shall comply with IEEE C57.12.28 regardless

of base and substation material.] The color notation is specified in ASTM

D1535.

2.2.11.1 Stainless Steel

ASTM A167, Type 304 or 304L.

[2.2.11.2 Galvanized Steel

ASTM A123/A123M, ASTM A653/A653M G90 coating, and ASTM A153/A153M, as

applicable. Galvanize after fabrication where practicable.

]2.2.12 Terminal Boards

Provide with engraved plastic terminal strips and screw type terminals for

external wiring between components and for internal wiring between removable

assemblies. Terminal boards associated with current transformers shall be

short-circuiting type. Terminate conductors for current transformers with

ring-tongue lugs. Terminal board identification shall be identical in

similar units. External wiring shall be color coded consistently for

similar terminal boards.

2.2.13 Wire Marking

Mark control and metering conductors at each end. Provide factory-installed

white plastic tubing heat stamped with black block type letters on factory-

installed wiring. On field-installed wiring, provide multiple white

preprinted polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sleeves, heat stamped with black block

type letters. Each sleeve shall contain a single letter or number, shall be

elliptically shaped to fit the wire securely, and shall be keyed, or

otherwise arranged, in such a manner to ensure alignment with adjacent

sleeves. Provide specific wire markings using the appropriate combination

of individual sleeves. Wire markers for factory installed conductors shall

indicate wire designations corresponding to the schematic drawings. Wire

markers on field installed conductors shall indicate the device or

equipment, including specific terminal number to which the remote end of the

wire is attached, as well as the terminal number to which the wire is

directly attached (near end/far end marking).

2.2.14 Surge Arresters

Provide one surge arrester for each conductor on circuits where indicated.

Surge arresters shall conform to IEEE C62.11 for [station class][class

indicated] and shall be rated [_____] kV.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Use "reserves the right to" on all projects,

except those for NAVFAC SE.

***************************************************************************


Section 26 11 13.00 20

2.3.1 Equipment Test Schedule

The Government [reserves the right to][will] witness tests. Provide

equipment test schedules for tests to be performed at the manufacturer's

test facility. Submit required test schedule and location, and notify the

Contracting Officer 30 calendar days before scheduled test date. Notify

Contracting Officer 15 calendar days in advance of changes to scheduled

date.

a. Test Instrument Calibration

1. The manufacturer shall have a calibration program which assures

that all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated

accuracy.

2. The accuracy shall be directly traceable to the National Institute

of Standards and Technology.

3. Instrument calibration frequency schedule shall not exceed 12

months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty

equipment.

4. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.

5. Calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the

instrument tested.

6. Keep up-to-date records that indicate dates and test results of

instruments calibrated or tested. For instruments calibrated by

the manufacturer on a routine basis, in lieu of third party

calibration, include the following:

(a) Maintain up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and

procedures for each test instrument.

(b) Identify the third party/laboratory calibrated instrument to

verify that calibrating standard is met.

[2.3.2 Integral Assembly Test

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Coordinate with paragraph "Factory Test

Reports" prior to use of option requiring testing of

integral assemblies.

***************************************************************************

Switchgear and substation transformer shall be tested as an integral

assembly at the transformer manufacturer's test facility. Once acceptance

of test results is received, ship switchgear and substation.

]2.3.3 Switchgear Design Tests

IEEE C37.20.2 or IEEE C37.20.3 as applicable. Furnish documentation showing

the results of design tests on a product of the same series and rating as

that provided by this specification. Required tests shall be as follows:


Section 26 11 13.00 20

a. Design Test

[1. Dielectric test

][2. Rated continuous current test

][3. Short-time current withstand tests

][4. Short-circuit current withstand tests

]5. Mechanical endurance tests

6. Flame-resistance tests

7. Rod entry tests

[8. Rain test for outdoor MV switchgear

]2.3.4 Switchgear Production Tests

IEEE C37.20.2 or IEEE C37.20.3 as applicable. Furnish reports which include

results of production tests performed on the actual equipment for this

project. Required tests shall be as follows:

a. Production Test

1. Dielectric test

2. Mechanical operation tests

3. Grounding of instrument transformer case test

4. Electrical operation and control-wiring tests

5. Impulse withstand test.

2.3.5 Load Interrupter Switch Design Tests

IEEE C37.71 or NEMA C37.72 as applicable, and IEEE C37.20.3. Furnish

documentation showing the results of design tests on a product of the same

series and rating as that provided by this specification. Required tests

shall be as follows:

a. Design Tests

1. Dielectric:

(a) Low-frequency withstand

(b) Impulse withstand

2. Continuous current

3. Short-time current withstand (2 - second)

4. Momentary current (10 cycles)


Section 26 11 13.00 20

5. Mechanical endurance

6. Insulator supports

(a) Flame-resistance

(b) Tracking-resistance

7. Bus-bar insulation

(a) Dielectric strength

(b) Flame-resistance

8. Paint qualification

9. Rain

2.3.6 Load Interrupter Switch Production Tests

IEEE C37.71 or NEMA C37.72 as applicable, and IEEE C37.20.3. Furnish

reports of production tests performed on the actual equipment for this

project. Required tests shall be as follows:

a. Production Tests

1. Dielectric

2. Mechanical operation

[3. Grounding of instrument transformer case

][4. Electrical operation and control wiring

]2.3.7 Transformer Design Tests

In accordance with IEEE C57.12.00 and IEEE C57.12.90. Additionally, IEEE

C57.12.80, section 5.1.2 states that "design tests are made only on

representative apparatus of basically the same design." Submit design test

reports (complete with test data, explanations, formulas, and results), in

the same submittal package as the catalog data and drawings for[ each of]

the specified transformer(s). Design tests shall have been performed prior

to the award of this contract.

a. Tests shall be certified and signed by a registered professional

engineer.

b. Temperature rise: "Basically the same design" for the temperature rise

test means a unit-substation transformer with the same coil

construction (such as wire wound primary and sheet wound secondary),

the same kVA, the same cooling type (ONAN), the same temperature rise

rating, and the same insulating liquid as the transformer specified.

c. Lightning impulse: "Basically the same design" for the lightning

impulse dielectric test means a unit-substation transformer with the

same BIL, the same coil construction (such as wire wound primary and

sheet wound secondary), and a tap changer (if specified). Design


Section 26 11 13.00 20

lightning impulse tests shall include both the primary and secondary

windings of that transformer.

1. IEEE C57.12.90 paragraph entitled "Lightning Impulse Test

Procedures" and IEEE C57.98.

2. State test voltage levels.

3. Provide photographs of oscilloscope display waveforms or plots of

digitized waveforms with test report.

d. Lifting and moving devices: "Basically the same design" for the

lifting and moving devices test means a transformer in the same weight

range as the transformer specified.

e. Pressure: "Basically the same design" for the pressure test means a

unit-substation transformer with a tank volume within 30 percent of the

tank volume of the transformer specified.

2.3.8 Transformer Routine and Other Tests

In accordance with IEEE C57.12.00 and IEEE C57.12.90. Routine and other

tests shall be performed by the manufacturer on[ each of] the actual

transformer(s) prepared for this project to ensure that the design

performance is maintained in production. Submit test reports, by serial

number and receive approval before delivery of equipment to the project

site. Required tests and testing sequence shall be as follows:

a. Cold resistance measurements (provide reference temperature)

b. Phase relation

c. Ratio

d. Insulation power-factor by manufacturer's recommended test method.

e. No-load losses (NLL) and excitation current

f. Load losses (LL) and impedance voltage

g. Dielectric

1. Impulse: Per IEEE C57.12.90 paragraph 10.3 entitled "Lightning

Impulse Test Procedures," and IEEE C57.98. Test the primary

winding only.

(a) State test voltage levels

(b) Provide photographs of oscilloscope display waveforms or

plots of digitized waveforms with test reports.[ As an

alternative, photographs of oscilloscope display waveforms or plots

of digitized waveforms may be hand-delivered at the factory witness

test.]

2. Applied voltage

3. Induced voltage


Section 26 11 13.00 20

h. Leak

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the

requirements specified herein.

3.2 GROUNDING

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Where rock or other soil conditions prevent

obtaining a specified ground value, specify other

methods of grounding. Where it is impractical to

obtain indicated ground resistance values, the

designer should make every effort, to obtain ground

resistance values as near as possible to the

indicated values.

***************************************************************************

NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, except that grounds and grounding systems shall have a

resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding 5 ohms.

3.2.1 Grounding Electrodes

Provide driven ground rods as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND

ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Connect ground conductors to the upper end of the

ground rods by exothermic welds or compression connectors. Provide

compression connectors at equipment ends of ground conductors.

3.2.2 Substation Grounding

Provide bare copper cable not smaller than No. 4/0 AWG, not less than 610 mm

(24 inches) below grade connecting to the indicated ground rods. Substation

transformer neutral connections shall not be smaller than No. 1/0 AWG. When

work, in addition to that indicated or specified, is directed to obtain the

specified ground resistance, the provision of the contract covering

"Changes" shall apply.[ Fence and equipment connections shall not be

smaller than No. 4 AWG. Ground fence at each gate post and corner post and

at intervals not exceeding 3050 mm (10 feet). Bond each gate section to the

fence post through a 3 by 25 mm (1/8 by one inch) flexible braided copper

strap and clamps.]

3.2.3 Connections

Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or

compression connector. Exothermic welds and compression connectors shall be

installed as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL

DISTRIBUTION, paragraph regarding "Grounding".

3.2.4 Ground Cable Crossing Expansion Joints in Structures and Pavements

Protect from damage by means of approved devices or methods of installation

to allow the necessary slack in the cable across the joint to permit

../Word/33%2071%2002.doc

../Word/33%2071%2002.doc


Section 26 11 13.00 20

movement. Provide stranded or other approved flexible copper cable across

such separations.

3.2.5 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

UL 467, except as indicated or specified otherwise.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

Install and connect unit substations furnished under this section as

indicated on project drawings, the approved shop drawings, and as specified

herein.

3.3.1 Medium-Voltage Switchgear and Load Interrupter Switches

IEEE C37.20.2 and IEEE C37.20.3 as applicable.

3.3.2 Meters and Instrument Transformers

ANSI C12.1.

3.3.3 Galvanizing Repair

Repair damage to galvanized coatings caused by handling, transporting,

cutting, welding, or bolting. Make repairs in accordance with ASTM

A780/A780M, zinc rich paint. Do not heat surfaces that repair paint has

been applied to.

3.4 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Mounting slab connections may have to be given

in detail depending on the requirements for the

seismic zone in which the equipment is located.

Include construction requirements for concrete slab

only if slab is not detailed in drawings. Curbs or

raised edges may also be required around liquid

filled transformers.

***************************************************************************

3.4.1 Exterior Location

Mount[ substation][ and][ switchgear] on concrete slab. Unless otherwise

indicated, the slab shall be at least 200 mm (8 inches) thick, reinforced

with a 152 by 152 - MW19 by MW19 (6 by 6 - W2.9 by W2.9) mesh, placed

uniformly 100 mm (4 inches) from the top of the slab. Slab shall be placed

on a 150 mm (6 inch) thick, well-compacted gravel base. Top of concrete

slab shall be approximately 100 mm (4 inches) above finished grade. Edges

above grade shall have 15 mm (1/2 inch) chamfer. Slab shall be of adequate

size to project at least 200 mm (8 inches) beyond equipment, except that

front of slab shall be large enough to serve as a platform to withdraw

breakers or to operate two-high breaker lifters. Provide conduit turnups

and cable entrance space required by the equipment to be mounted[ and as

indicated]. Seal voids around conduit openings in slab with water- and oil-

resistant caulking or sealant. Cut off and bush conduits 75 mm (3 inches)

above slab surface. Concrete work shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

../Word/03%2030%2000.doc


Section 26 11 13.00 20

3.4.2 Interior Location

Mount[ substation][ and][ switchgear] on concrete slab. Unless Otherwise

indicated, the slab shall be at least 100 mm (4 inches) thick. Top of

concrete slab shall be approximately 100 mm (4 inches) above finished floor.

Edges above floor shall have 15 mm (1/2 inch) chamfer. Slab shall be of

adequate size to project at least 200 mm (8 inches) beyond the equipment,

except that front of slab shall be large enough to serve as a platform to

withdraw breakers or to operate two-high breaker lifters. Provide conduit

turnups and cable entrance space required by the equipment to be mounted.

Seal voids around conduit openings in slab with water- and oil-resistant

caulking or sealant. Cut off and bush conduits 75 mm (3 inches) above slab

surface. Concrete work shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-

PLACE CONCRETE.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.5.1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests

Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include

the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests,

performed in accordance with NETA ATS.[ The [_____] Division, Naval

Facilities Engineering Command will witness formal tests after receipt of

written certification that preliminary tests have been completed and that

system is ready for final test and inspection.]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Thermographic surveying is not required on

most projects. NETA recommends that surveys be

performed during periods of maximum possible loading

but with not less than 40 percent of rated load on

the electrical equipment being inspected. Testing at

start-up will therefore not be beneficial except for

hard-to-reach areas where solid connections cannot be

verified by mechanical methods. Thermographic

surveying may be useful if equipment operates under

load for a specified period of time, preferably 3 to

6 months, before testing. The additional costs and

the additional trip (3 to 6 months after the initial

inspection) for the NETA contractor to perform the

survey should be considered prior to specifying the

requirement.

***************************************************************************

3.5.1.1 Interrupter Switch(es)

a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection

1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved

shop drawings.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

3. Confirm correct application of manufacturer's recommended

lubricants.

../Word/03%2030%2000.doc


Section 26 11 13.00 20

4. Verify appropriate anchorage and required area clearances.

5. Verify appropriate equipment grounding.

6. Verify correct blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops,

and mechanical operation.

[7. Verify that fuse sizes and types correspond to approved shop

drawings.

][8. Verify that each fuse holder has adequate mechanical support.

]9. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by

calibrated torque-wrench method. Thermographic surveying[ is not][

is]required.

10. Test interlocking systems for correct operation and sequencing.

11. Verify correct phase barrier materials and installation.

12. Compare switch blade clearances with industry standards.

13. Inspect all indicating devices for correct operation

b. Electrical Tests

1. Perform insulation-resistance tests.

2. Perform over-potential tests.

3. Measure contact-resistance across each switch blade[ and fuse

holder].

[4. Measure fuse resistance.

]5. Verify heater operation.

3.5.1.2 Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers (Vacuum)

a. Visual and mechanical inspection


shop drawings.



lubricants.

4. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

5. Perform all mechanical operational tests on both the circuit

breaker and its operating mechanism.

6. Measure critical distances such as contact gap as recommended by

manufacturer.


Section 26 11 13.00 20

7. Verify tightness of accessible bolted connections by calibrated

torque-wrench method. Thermographic survey[ is not][ is] required.

8. Record as-found and as-left operation counter readings.

b. Electrical Tests

1. Perform a contact-resistance test.

2. Verify trip, close, trip-free, and antipump function.

3. Trip circuit breaker by operation of each protective device.


5. Perform vacuum bottle integrity (overpotential) test across each

bottle with the breaker in the open position in strict accordance

with manufacturer's instructions. Do not exceed maximum voltage

stipulated for this test.

3.5.1.3 Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers (SF6)



shop drawings.



lubricants.

4. Inspect anchorage and grounding.

5. Inspect and verify adjustments of mechanism in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions.

[6. Inspect and service air compressor in accordance with


]7. Test for gas leaks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

8. Verify correct operation of all air and SF6 gas pressure alarms

and cutouts.

9. Slow close/open breaker and check for binding.

10. Perform time-travel analysis.

11. Verify tightness of accessible bolted connections by calibrated

torque-wrench method. Thermographic survey[ is not][ is] required.

12. Record as-found and as-left operation counter readings.

b. Electrical Tests

1. Measure contact resistances.


Section 26 11 13.00 20


3. Verify trip, close, trip-free, and antipump functions.

4. Trip circuit breaker by operation of each protective device.

3.5.1.4 Transformers (Liquid-Filled)



shop drawings.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Check for damaged or

cracked insulators and leaks.

[3. Verify that cooling fans operate correctly and that fan motors

have correct overcurrent protection.

][4. Verify operation of all alarm, control, and trip circuits from

temperature and level indicators, pressure relief device, and fault

pressure relay.

]5. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connection by

calibrated torque-wrench method. Thermographic survey[ is not][

is] required.

6. Verify correct liquid level in transformer tank.

7. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as recommended by

manufacturer.

8. Verify correct equipment grounding.

b. Electrical Tests


2. Perform turns-ratio tests.

3. Perform insulation power-factor/dissipation-factor tests on

windings.

4. Sample insulating liquid. Sample shall be tested for:

(a) Dielectric breakdown voltage

(b) Acid neutralization number

(c) Specific gravity

(d) Interfacial tension

(e) Color

(f) Visual condition


Section 26 11 13.00 20

(g) Parts per million water

(h) Measure dissipation factor or power factor.

5. Perform dissolved gas analysis (DGA).

6. Test for presence of PCB.

7. Verify that tap-changer is set at specified ratio.

8. Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral

after energization and prior to loading.

3.5.1.5 Switchgear Assemblies



shop drawings.

2. Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condition.


lubricants.

4. Verify appropriate anchorage, required area clearances, and correct

alignment.

5. Inspect all doors, panels, and sections for paint, dents,

scratches, fit, and missing hardware.

6. Verify that[ fuse and] circuit breaker sizes and types correspond

to approved shop drawings.

[7. Verify that current and potential transformer ratios correspond to

approved shop drawings.

]8. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by


is] required.

9. Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and

mechanical interlock systems.

10. Clean switchgear.

11. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated

surfaces.

12. Verify correct barrier[ and shutter] installation[ and operation].

13. Exercise all active components.

14. Inspect all mechanical indicating devices for correct operation.

15. Verify that vents are clear.


Section 26 11 13.00 20

16. Test operation, alignment, and penetration of instrument

transformer withdrawal disconnects.

17. Inspect control power transformers.

b. Electrical Tests

1. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section.

2. Perform overpotential tests.

3. Perform insulation-resistance test on control wiring; Do not

perform this test on wiring connected to solid-state components.

4. Perform control wiring performance test.

5. Perform primary current injection tests on the entire current

circuit in each section of assembly.

[6. Perform phasing check on double-ended switchgear to ensure correct

bus phasing from each source.

]7. Verify operation of heaters.

3.5.1.6 Instrument Transformers



shop drawings.


3. Verify correct connection.

4. Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary

circuit.

5. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by


is] required.

6. Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections provide

good contact.

7. Verify correct operation of transformer with drawout mechanism and

grounding operation.

8. Verify correct primary and secondary fuse sizes for potential

transformers.

b. Electrical Tests - Current Transformers


2. Perform polarity tests.


Section 26 11 13.00 20

3. Perform ratio-verification tests.

4. Perform excitation test on transformers used for relaying

applications.

5. Measure circuit burden at transformer terminals and determine the

total burden.

6. When applicable, perform insulation resistance and dielectric

withstand tests on the primary winding with secondary grounded.

7. CAUTION: Changes of connection, insertion, and removal of

instruments, relays, and meters shall be performed in such a manner

that the secondary circuits of energized current transformers are

not opened momentarily.

c. Electrical Tests - Voltage (Potential) Transformers


2. Perform a polarity test on each transformer to verify the polarity

marks or H1 - X1 relationships as applicable

3. Perform a turns ratio test on all tap positions , if applicable.

4. Measure potential circuit burdens at transformer terminals and

determine the total burden.

5. Measure circuit burden at transformer terminals and determine the

total burden.

3.5.1.7 Battery Systems



shop drawings.


3. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by

calibrated torque-wrench method. Thermographic survey[ is not] [

is] required.

4. Measure electrolyte specific gravity and temperature and visually

check fill level.

5. Verify adequacy of battery support racks, mounting, anchorage, and

clearances.

b. Electrical tests

1. Set charger float and equalizing voltage levels.

2. Verify all charger functions and alarms.


Section 26 11 13.00 20

3. Measure each cell voltage and total battery voltage with charger

energized and in float mode of operation.

4. Perform a capacity load test.

3.5.1.8 Metering and Instrumentation



shop drawings.


3. Verify tightness of electrical connections.

b. Electrical Tests

1. Determine accuracy of meters at 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of full

scale.

2. Calibrate watthour meters according to manufacturer's published

data.

3. Verify all instrument multipliers.

4. Electrically confirm that current transformer and voltage

transformer secondary circuits are intact.

3.5.1.9 Grounding System


1. Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and

specifications.

b. Electrical Tests

1. Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-

potential method. On systems consisting of interconnected ground

rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete. On

systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any

wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather, not

less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground testing

megger in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to test each

ground or group of grounds. The instrument shall be equipped with

a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate

the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test.

Submit the measured ground resistance of each ground rod and grounding

system, indicating the location of the rod and grounding system.

Include the test method and test setup (i.e., pin location) used to

determine ground resistance and soil conditions at the time the

measurements were made.

[3.5.2 Field Dielectric Tests


Section 26 11 13.00 20

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Field dielectric tests are recommended when

new units are added to an existing installation or

after major field modifications. If necessary,

service the equipment prior to the field test.

***************************************************************************

Perform field dielectric tests on medium-voltage switchgear according to

IEEE C37.20.2 or IEEE C37.20.3 as applicable.

]3.5.3 Follow-Up Verification

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Use "10" working days and include last

bracketed sentence in the paragraph for NAVFAC SE

projects.

***************************************************************************

Upon completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, the Contractor

shall show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good

operating condition and properly performing the intended function. Circuit

breakers shall be tripped by operation of each protective device. Test

shall require each item to perform its function not less than three times.

As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, notify the

Contracting Officer [5][10] working days in advance of the dates and times

for checks, settings, and tests[, to allow the Contracting Officer to notify

NAVFAC SE Code 0742; Electrical Engineering Division and Code 162; Director,

Utilities Engineering Division].

-- End of Section --


Section 26 12 19.10 Page 1

***************************************************************************

USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS-26 12 19.10 (May 2017)

--------------------------------


UFGS-26 12 19.10 (February 2012)



***************************************************************************

SECTION 26 12 19.10

THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

05/17

***************************************************************************


requirements for three-phase pad-mounted transformers

of the dead-front and live-front types for exterior

applications.











present.




***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Use pad-mounted transformers (properly

protected with bayonet type, oil-immersed, expulsion

fuses in series with oil-immersed, partial-range,

current-limiting fuses) for kVA ratings up to and

including 1500 kVA on 5 kV systems and for kVA

ratings up to and including 2500 kVA on 15, 25, and

35 kV systems.

For voltages above 35 kV and in ratings above those

previously indicated, this specification requires

significant modifications and additional

specification sections may need to be added on the

project.

This specification is for standard step-down

applications in utility distribution systems. For





step-up applications (i.e. solar/wind generation,

etc.), this specification requires significant

modifications to address proper voltage designations,

overcurrent and fault protection, etc.

The use of pad-mounted transformers with secondary

currents exceeding 3000 amperes is discouraged due to

the size and quantity of secondary conductors.

Therefore, transformers above 1000 kVA serving

208Y/120 volt loads and transformers above 2500 kVA

serving 480Y/277 volt loads should be in a secondary

unit substation configuration.

Available fault current level and arc-flash energy

become extremely hazardous at the larger kVA size

transformers. Designer should consider these

parameters and evaluate multiple service points.

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: For Navy and Air Force projects, this

specification incorporates a "reduced shop drawing

submittal process" for listed manufacturers who

previously satisfied reduced shop drawing submittal

process requirements. This specification also

includes unique routine and other test requirements,

transformer loss certificate, transformer test

schedule, and field quality control acceptance tests

and reports. The preparing activity, NAVFAC LANT,

has significant experience and technical expertise in

these areas. If Reach-back support is desired, for a

specific NAVFAC or Air Force project, the technical

representative (electrical engineer) editing this

document for that project must contact the NAVFAC

LANT Capital Improvements Electrical Engineering

(Code CI44) Office for consultation during the design

stage of the project, prior to including the

requirement in the specification.

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Use the following related guide specifications

for power distribution equipment:


--Section 26 11 13.00 20 PRIMARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS

--Section 26 11 16 SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATION

--Section 26 12 21 SINGLE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED

TRANSFORMERS



--Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM



--Section 26 27 13.10 30 ELECTRIC METERS

--Section 26 27 14.00 20 ELECTRICITY METERING


DISTRIBUTION

../Word/26%2008%2000.doc

../Word/26%2011%2013.00%2020.doc

../Word/26%2011%2016.doc

../Word/26%2012%2021.doc

../Word/26%2013%2000.doc

../Word/26%2020%2000.doc

../Word/26%2023%2000.doc

../Word/26%2024%2013.doc

../Word/26%2027%2013.10%2030.doc

../Word/26%2027%2014.00%2020.doc

../Word/33%2071%2001.doc



Do not use the following related guide specifications

except for Army Civil Works projects. They have not

been unified.

--Section 26 11 14.00 10 MAIN ELECTRIC SUPPLY STATION

AND SUBSTATION

--Section 26 28 00.00 10 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS,

SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS

--Section 26 22 00.00 10 480-VOLT STATION SERVICE

SWITCHGEAR AND TRANSFORMERS

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Coordination is required between this section

and metering equipment specification sections. See

Section 26 27 14.00 20 ELECTRICITY METERING or 26 27

13.10 30 ELECTRIC METERS for transformer and metering

details, which are available in metric (SI) and U.S.

Customary (IP) system dimension. Use these files to

develop project specific drawings, including:

File Name Description

PADMDE1 Three Phase, Ungrounded or Single Grounded Primary System

- with Surge Arresters

PADMDE2 Three Phase, Ungrounded or Single Grounded Primary System

- without Surge Arresters

PADMDE3 Three Phase, Multi-Grounded Primary System (Delta-Wye) -

with Surge Arresters

PADMDE4 Three Phase, Multi-Grounded Primary System (Delta-Wye) -

without Surge Arresters

PADMDE5 Three Phase, Multi-Grounded Primary System (Wye-Wye) -

with Surge Arresters

PADMDE6 Three Phase, Multi-Grounded Primary System (Wye-Wye) -

without Surge Arresters

ARCFLASH Arc Flash Warning Label

TO DOWNLOAD UFGS GRAPHICS


Select the appropriate Electrical .ZIP file(s) and

extract the desired details.

../Word/26%2011%2014.00%2010.doc

../Word/26%2028%2000.00%2010.doc

../Word/26%2022%2000.00%2010.doc

../Word/26%2027%2014.00%2020.doc

../Word/26%2027%2013.10%2030.doc

../Word/26%2027%2013.10%2030.doc




Do not include list of details, or details

themselves, in project specifications. Insert the

appropriate details on drawings and modify optional

and blank items. If special features are required,

do not modify details, but indicate these changes as

notes below the detail.

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Show the following information on the project

drawings:

1. Single-line diagram showing pad-mounted

transformer connectors, inserts, surge arresters,

switches, fuses, current transformers with ratings,

and meters as applicable.

2. Grounding plan.

3. Type and number of cables, and size of conductors

for each power circuit.


IEEE C57.12.00, Table 8, "Designation of voltage

ratings of three-phase windings (schematic

representation)".) State the primary voltage

(nominal) actually in service and not the voltage

class.

5. Special conditions, such as altitude, temperature

and humidity; exposure to fumes, vapors, dust, and

gases; and seismic requirements.

***************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

***************************************************************************






title.













***************************************************************************




AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)

ACI 318 (2014; Errata 1-2 2014; Errata 3-5 2015;

Errata 6 2016; Errata 7 2017) Building Code

Requirements for Structural Concrete and

Commentary

ACI 318M (2014; ERTA 2015) Building Code Requirements

for Structural Concrete & Commentary



Metering


ASTM A240/A240M (2016) Standard Specification for Chromium

and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,

Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for

General Applications

ASTM C260/C260M (2010a; R 2016) Standard Specification for

Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete




Origin






Disk Electrodes



ASTM D97 (2017a) Standard Test Method for Pour Point

of Petroleum Products

FM GLOBAL (FM)






IEEE 386 (2016) Separable Insulated Connector Systems

for Power Distribution Systems Rated 2.5 kV

through 35 kV



IEEE C37.47 (2011) Standard for High Voltage Distribution

Class Current-Limiting Type Fuses and Fuse

Disconnecting Switches



Transformers


Enclosure Integrity


Enclosure Integrity for Coastal Environments

IEEE C57.12.34 (2009) Standard for Requirements for Pad-

Mounted, Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled,

Three-Phase Distribution Transformers, 5 MVA

and Smaller; High Voltage, 34.5 kV Nominal

System Voltage and Below; Low Voltage, 15 kV

Nominal System Voltage and Below





Transformers


Transformers




Circuits (>1kV)

IEEE Stds Dictionary (2009) IEEE Standards Dictionary: Glossary of

Terms & Definitions




and Systems




ANSI C12.7 (2014) Requirements for Watthour Meter

Sockets

NEMA 260 (1996; R 2004) Safety Labels for Pad-Mounted

Switchgear and Transformers Sited in Public

Areas

NEMA LI 1 (1998; R 2011) Industrial Laminating

Thermosetting Products

NEMA Z535.4 (2011) American National Standard for Product

Safety Signs and Labels


Safety Standards




ORGANISATION FOR ECONOMIC CO-OPERATION AND DEVELOPMENT (OECD)

OECD Test 203 (1992) Fish Acute Toxicity Test

U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

EPA 712-C-98-075 (1998) Fate, Transport and Transformation

Test Guidelines - OPPTS 835.3100- "Aerobic

Aquatic Biodegradation"

EPA 821-R-02-012 (2002) Methods for Measuring the Acute

Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to

Freshwater and Marine Organisms

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

10 CFR 431 Energy Efficiency Program for Certain

Commercial and Industrial Equipment





***************************************************************************



and specialized power distribution equipment.

***************************************************************************

Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING applies to this section,

with the additions and modifications specified herein.

../Word/26%2008%2000.doc

../Word/26%2008%2000.doc



1.3 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms

used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined in IEEE

Stds Dictionary.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

***************************************************************************








with a "G." Generally, other submittal items can be


Only add a "G" to an item, if the submittal is


project.





















***************************************************************************






eNotebook, in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING.


PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc

../Word/01%2033%2029.doc

../Word/01%2033%2029.doc

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc



Pad-mounted Transformer Drawings; G[, [_____]]

SD-03 Product Data

Pad-mounted Transformers; G[, [_____]]

SD-06 Test Reports

Acceptance Checks and Tests; G[, [_____]]

SD-07 Certificates

Transformer Efficiencies; G[, [_____]]


Transformer Test Schedule; G[, [_____]]

Pad-mounted Transformer Design Tests; G[, [_____]]

Pad-mounted TransformerRoutine and Other Tests; G[, [_____]]


Transformer(s), Data Package 5; G[, [_____]]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include the bracketed option below on Navy and

Air Force projects where "reach-back support" has

already been coordinated with NAVFAC LANT per the 3rd

introductory Technical Note. Add appropriate



***************************************************************************

[1.4.1 Government Submittal Review

[Code CI44, NAVFAC LANT, Naval Facilities Engineering Command][_____] will

review and approve all submittals in this section requiring Government

approval.

]1.4.2 Reduced Submittal Requirements

Transformers designed and manufactured by ABB in Jefferson City, MO; by

Easton's Cooper Power Series Transformers in Waukesha, WI; by ERMCO in

Dyersburg, TN; or by Howard Industries in Laurel, MS need not submit the

entire submittal package requirements of this contract. Instead, the

following items shall be submitted:

a. A certification, signed by the manufacturer, stating that the

manufacturer will meet the technical requirements of this

specification.

b. An outline drawing of the transformer with devices identified

(paragraph PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMER DRAWINGS, item a).

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc



c. ANSI nameplate data of the transformer (paragraph PAD-MOUNTED

TRANSFORMER DRAWINGS, item b).

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The designer is responsible for providing

proper settings for secondary over-current device(s)

to ensure proper protection of equipment and

coordination with transformer high side fuses.

Include the following option for transformers serving

secondary over-current devices containing adjustable

trips.

***************************************************************************

[d. Manufacturer's published time-current curves in PDF format and in

electronic format suitable for import or updating into the [EasyPower]

[SKM PowerTools for Windows] [_____] computer program of the

transformer high side fuses (paragraph PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMER

DRAWINGS, item e).

]e. Routine and other tests (in PART 2, see paragraph SOURCE QUALITY

CONTROL, subparagraph ROUTINE AND OTHER TESTS), conducted by the

manufacturer. These tests may be witnessed by the government. Provide

transformer test schedule required by submittal item "SD-11 Closeout

Submittals". Provide certified copies of the tests.

f. Provide acceptance test reports required by submittal item "SD-06 Test

Reports".

g. Provide operation and maintenance manuals required by submittal item

"SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data".


1.5.1 Pad-Mounted Transformer Drawings

***************************************************************************

Note: Delete bracketed information for Navy and Air

Force projects when separate metering specification

is used. May still need for Army and NASA projects

until metering specification is unified.

***************************************************************************

Include the following as a minimum:

a. An outline drawing, including front, top, and side views.

b. IEEE nameplate data.

c. Elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams[ with terminals identified of

watthour meter and current transformers].

d. One-line diagram, including switch(es)[, current transformers, meters,

and fuses].

e. Manufacturer's published time-current curves in PDF format and in





transformer high side fuses.

1.5.2 Regulatory Requirements

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory

provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" or "must" had been

substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these

publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar

meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Provide equipment, materials,

installation, and workmanship in accordance with NFPA 70 unless more

stringent requirements are specified or indicated.

1.5.3 Standard Products

Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly

engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material,

design and workmanship, and:

a. Have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years

prior to bid opening including applications of equipment and materials

under similar circumstances and of similar size.

b. Have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements,

manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period.

c. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required,

provide products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts

of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless

stated in this section.

1.5.3.1 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable

if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000

hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is

furnished.

1.5.3.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date

Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site

are not acceptable.

1.6 MAINTENANCE


***************************************************************************





***************************************************************************


OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein. In addition to

../Word/01%2078%2023.doc



requirements of Data Package 5, include the following on the actual

transformer(s) provided:

a. An instruction manual with pertinent items and information highlighted

b. An outline drawing, front, top, and side views

c. Prices for spare parts and supply list

d. Routine and field acceptance test reports

e. Fuse curves for primary fuses

[f. Information on watthour demand meter, CT's, and fuse block

]g. Actual nameplate diagram

h. Date of purchase

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Products and materials not considered to be pad-mounted transformers and

related accessories are specified in[ Section 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION

AND DISTRIBUTION,][ Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM,][ and][

Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION].

2.2 THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

***************************************************************************

NOTE: According to IEEE 386, 200 ampere separable

insulated connectors normally used on dead-front pad-

mounted transformers have both a fault closure and a

short-time current rating of 10,000 amperes.

Therefore, from a safety standpoint, dead-front

configurations which utilize these connectors should

only be used at system locations which have available

fault currents of less than 10,000 rms symmetrical

amperes.

This specification does not address the materials

used for the winding (copper versus aluminum) and it

is assumed that the manufacturer will provide their

standard product with respect to the winding

construction, based on the cost of materials at the

time of order acceptance. No failure data has been

obtained indicating that copper windings have a

longer life than aluminum windings. If copper

windings are specified, the cost increase for three-

phase distribution transformers has recently been

about 15 percent. Do NOT specify winding materials.

***************************************************************************

IEEE C57.12.34, IEEE C57.12.28 and as specified herein. Submit

manufacturer's information for each component, device, insulating fluid, and

accessory provided with the transformer.

../Word/33%2071%2001.doc

../Word/26%2020%2000.doc

../Word/33%2071%2002.doc



2.2.1 Compartments

Provide high- and low-voltage compartments separated by steel isolating

barriers extending the full height and depth of the compartments.

Compartment doors: hinged lift-off type with stop in open position and

three-point latching.

2.2.1.1 High Voltage, Dead-Front

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Current policy is to use oil-immersed fuses in

series with current limiting fuses to achieve better

protection and obtain life cycle cost benefits.

For 15 kV and 25 kV, 200 A bushings, select bushing

wells and bushing well inserts. For 15 kV and 25 kV,

600 A bushings and for 35 kV bushings, select one-

piece bushings.

Do not provide standoff bushings unless this

transformer is the only dead-front transformer on the

base. The Public Works Department normally carries

standoff bushings in their vehicles. Provide

protective caps when providing standoff bushings and

to cover unused bushing well inserts when not

providing surge arresters.

Coordinate lead-in paragraph with bracketed options

below.

Choose minimum high-voltage compartment dimensions

for transformers used in loop feed applications to

accomodate installation of loop feed, feed-through

inserts, and surge arresters.

NOTE: For systems with a fault capability greater

than 10,000 amps, for applications utilizing loop

feed load-break switches, or when the primary cable

size is greater than No. 4/0 AWG, use 600A separable

insulated dead-break connectors.

***************************************************************************

High-voltage compartment contains: the incoming line, insulated high-

voltage [load-break ][dead-break ]connectors, [bushing well inserts,][ feed-

thru inserts,] six high-voltage [bushing wells][one-piece bushings]

configured for loop feed application, load-break switch handle(s), [access

to oil-immersed bayonet fuses,][ dead-front surge arresters,] tap changer

handle, connector parking stands[ with insulated standoff bushings],[

protective caps,] and ground pad.

[Minimum high-voltage compartment dimensions: IEEE C57.12.34, Figures 16

and 17.

][a. Insulated high-voltage load-break connectors: IEEE 386, rated [15

kV, 95 kV BIL][25 kV, 125 kV BIL][35 kV, 150 kV BIL]. Current rating:

200 amperes rms continuous. Short time rating: 10,000 amperes rms



symmetrical for a time duration of 0.17 seconds. Connector shall have

a steel reinforced hook-stick eye, grounding eye, test point, and arc-

quenching contact material.

][b. Insulated high-voltage dead-break connectors: IEEE 386, rated [15

kV, 95 kV BIL][25 kV, 125 kV BIL][35 kV, 150 kV BIL]. Current rating:

600 amperes rms continuous. Short time rating: 25,000 amperes rms

symmetrical for a time duration of 0.17 seconds. Connector shall have

a [200 ampere bushing interface for surge arresters,] steel reinforced

hook-stick eye, grounding eye, test point, and arc-quenching contact

material.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Provide bushing well inserts and feed-through

inserts only on load-break applications, not on dead-

break.

***************************************************************************

][c. Bushing well inserts[ and feed-thru inserts]: IEEE 386, 200 amperes,

[15][25] kV Class. Provide a bushing well insert for each bushing well

unless indicated otherwise.[ Provide feed-thru inserts as indicated.]

][d. One-piece bushings: IEEE 386, [200][600] amperes,

[15][25][35][_____] kV Class.

]e. Load-break switch

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Choose between load-break radial-feed switch

and load-break loop feed switches.

***************************************************************************

[Radial-feed oil-immersed type rated at [15 kV, 95 kV BIL][25 kV, 125

kV BIL][35 kV, 150 kV BIL], with a continuous current rating and load-

break rating of [200][300][_____] amperes, and a make-and-latch rating

of 12,000 rms amperes symmetrical. Locate the switch handle in the

high-voltage compartment.

][Loop feed sectionalizer switches: Provide three, two-position, oil-

immersed type switches to permit closed transition loop feed and

sectionalizing. Each switch must be rated at [15 kV, 95 kV BIL][25 kV,

125 kV BIL][35 kV, 150 kV BIL], with a continuous current rating and

load-break rating of [200][300][_____] amperes, and a make-and-latch

rating of 12,000 rms amperes symmetrical. Locate the switch handles in

the high-voltage compartment. Operation of switches must be as

follows:

ARRANGEMENT

NO.

DESCRIPTION OF SWITCH

ARRANGEMENT

SWITCH POSITION

LINE A SW. LINE B SW XFMR. SW

OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE

1 Line A connected to

Line B and both lines

connected to

transformer

X X X



2 Transformer connected

to Line A only

X X X


to Line Bonly

X X X

4 Transformer open and

loop closed

X X X


loop open

X X X

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Provide bayonet type fuses for all transformer

applications 38 kV and below.

***************************************************************************

][f. Provide bayonet oil-immersed, expulsion fuses in series with oil-

immersed, partial-range, current-limiting fuses. The bayonet fuse

links sense both high currents and high oil temperature in order to

provide thermal protection to the transformer. Coordinate transformer

protection with expulsion fuse clearing low-current faults and current-

limiting fuse clearing high-current faults beyond the interrupting

rating of the expulsion fuse. Include an oil retention valve inside

the bayonet assembly housing, which closes when the fuse holder is

removed, and an external drip shield to minimize oil spills. Display a

warning label adjacent to the bayonet fuse(s) cautioning against

removing or inserting fuses unless the transformer has been de-

energized and the tank pressure has been released.

Bayonet fuse assembly: 150 kV BIL.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: For transformers with loop-feed sectionalizer

switching, delete the bracketed option regarding

placement of current-limiting fuses.

***************************************************************************

Oil-immersed current-limiting fuses: IEEE C37.47; 50,000 rms amperes

symmetrical interrupting rating at the system voltage specified.[

Connect current-limiting fuses ahead of the radial-feed load-break

switch.]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Provide bushing-mounted elbow type arresters

at the ends of all radials and in normally open

locations in loops. Provide arresters for all

voltage levels above 5 kV.

***************************************************************************

][g. Surge arresters: IEEE C62.11, rated

[3][6][9][10][12][15][18][21][24][27][30][36][_____] kV, fully



shielded, dead-front, metal-oxide-varistor, elbow type with resistance-

graded gap.[ Provide three arresters for radial feed circuits.][

Provide [three][six] arresters for loop feed circuits.]

]h. Parking stands: Provide a parking stand near each bushing.[ Provide

insulated standoff bushings for parking of energized high-voltage

connectors on parking stands.]

[i. Protective caps: IEEE 386, [200][600] amperes, [15][25][35][_____] kV

Class. Provide insulated protective caps (not shipping caps) for

insulating and sealing out moisture from unused bushings.

][2.2.1.2 High Voltage, Live-Front

***************************************************************************

NOTE: When live-front is selected, delete the above

paragraphs on dead-front.

***************************************************************************

High-voltage compartment contains: the incoming line, transformer high-

voltage bushings, load-break switch handle(s),[ access to oil-immersed

bayonet fuses,][ surge arresters,] tap changer handle, insulated phase

barriers, and ground pad.

a. Cable terminators: Provide as specified in Section 33 71 02


b. Load-break switch

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Choose between load-break radial-feed switch

and load-break loop feed switches.

***************************************************************************

[Radial-feed oil-immersed type rated at [15 kV, 95 kV BIL][25 kV, 125





][Loop feed sectionalizer switches: Provide three, two-position, oil-

immersed type switches to permit closed transition loop feed and

sectionalizing. Each switch must be rated at [15 kV, 95 kV BIL][25 kV,

125 kV BIL][35 kV, 150 kV BIL], with a continuous current rating and

load-break rating of [200][300][_____] amperes, and a make-and-latch

rating of 12,000 rms amperes symmetrical. Locate the switch handles in

the high-voltage compartment. Operation of switches must be as

follows:

ARRANGEMENT

NO.

DESCRIPTION OF SWITCH

ARRANGEMENT

SWITCH POSITION

LINE A SW. LINE B SW XFMR. SW

OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE

../Word/33%2071%2002.doc



1 Line A connected to

Line B and both lines

connected to

transformer

X X X


to Line A only

X X X


to Line B only

X X X


loop closed

X X X


loop open

X X X

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Provide bayonet type fuses for all transformer

applications 38 kV and below.

***************************************************************************

][c. Provide bayonet oil-immersed, expulsion fuses in series with oil-













***************************************************************************

NOTE: For transformers with loop-feed sectionalizer

switching, delete the bracketed option regarding

placement of current-limiting fuses.

***************************************************************************




switch.]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Provide arresters at the ends of all radials

and in normally open locations in loops. Provide

arresters for all voltage levels above 5 kV.



***************************************************************************

][d. Surge arresters: IEEE C62.11, rated

[3][6][9][10][12][15][18][21][24][27][30][36][_____] kV.[ Provide

three arresters for radial feed circuits.][ Provide [three][six]

arresters for loop feed circuits.]

]e. Insulated phase barriers: NEMA LI 1, Type GPO-3, 6.35 mm (0.25 inch)

minimum thickness. Provide vertical barriers between the high-voltage

bushings and a single horizontal barrier above the high-voltage

bushings.

]2.2.1.3 Low Voltage

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Installation of circuit breakers in the

secondary compartment is not recognized by IEEE

standards, and limits accessibility by covering lugs,

gages, and accessories. Do not use.

***************************************************************************

Low-voltage compartment contains: low-voltage bushings with NEMA spade

terminals, accessories, metering, stainless steel or laser-etched anodized

aluminum diagrammatic transformer nameplate, and ground pad.

a. Include the following accessories: drain valve with sampler device,

fill plug, pressure relief device, liquid level gage, pressure-vacuum

gage, and dial type thermometer with maximum temperature indicator.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Many Activities have, or are in the process

of, converting to basewide metering systems. A

unified metering specification is under development

to replace the metering requirements in this section.

Use the first bracketed metering paragraph below for

Navy projects and possibly for Air Force projects.

Navy projects require use of section 26 27 14.00 20

ELECTRICITY METERING. Air Force projects may require

use of section 26 27 13.10 30 ELECTRIC METERS.

Delete theAir Force and Navy projects.

Coordinate with the Activity and provide specific

requirements "to match existing systems" when

necessary. If specifying proprietary products,

insure that appropriate "Justification and

Authorization (J & A)" documentation has been

obtained by project manager and "proprietary language

requirements" have been added to Division 1 as well

as to this section of the specifications.

If there are any components (such as meters, housing,

or current transformers) that will be Government

Furnished Contractor Installed (GFCI), or Government

Furnished Government Installed (GFGI), edit Division

1 and this specification.

../Word/26%2027%2014.00%2020.doc

../Word/26%2027%2013.10%2030.doc



***************************************************************************

[b. Metering: Provide as specified in Section [26 27 14.00 20 ELECTRICITY

METERING][26 27 13.10 30 ELECTRIC METERS].

][c. Metering: NEMA/ANSI C12.10. Provide a socket-mounted electronic

programmable outdoor watthour meter, surface mounted flush against the

side of the low-voltage compartment as indicated. Program the meter at

the factory or in the field. When field programming is performed, turn

field programming device over to the Contracting Officer at completion

of project. Coordinate the meter to system requirements.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: When Section 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND

CONTROL FOR HVAC is used, coordinate meter

requirements. Form 9S, in text below, is for three-

phase, four-wire wye systems, for other system

configurations, designer must determine the

appropriate form designation.

***************************************************************************

(1) Design: Provide meter designed for use on a 3-phase, 4-wire,

[208Y/120][480Y/277] volt system with 3 current transformers.

Include necessary KYZ pulse initiation hardware for Energy

Monitoring and Control System (EMCS)[ as specified in Section 23 09

00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC].

(2) Coordination: Provide meter coordinated with ratios of current


(3) Class: 20; Form: [9S][_____]; Accuracy: plus or minus 1.0

percent; Finish: Class II

(4) Cover: Polycarbonate and lockable to prevent tampering and

unauthorized removal.

(5) Kilowatt-hour Register: five digit electronic programmable type

(6) Demand Register:

(a) Provide solid state

(b) Meter reading multiplier: Indicate multiplier on the meter

face.

(c) Demand interval length: programmed for [15][30][60] minutes

with rolling demand up to six subintervals per interval.

(7) Meter fusing: Provide a fuse block mounted in the secondary

compartment containing one fuse per phase to protect the voltage

input to the watthour meter. Size fuses as recommended by the

meter manufacturer.

(8) Socket: ANSI C12.7. Provide NEMA Type 3R, box-mounted socket

having automatic circuit-closing bypass and having jaws compatible

with requirements of the meter. Cover unused hub openings with

blank hub plates. Paint box Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5 green to match the

../Word/26%2027%2014.00%2020.doc

../Word/26%2027%2013.10%2030.doc

../Word/23%2009%2000.doc

../Word/23%2009%2000.doc

../Word/23%2009%2000.doc



pad-mounted transformer to which the box-mounted socket is

attached. The Munsell color notation is specified in ASTM D1535.

(9) Current transformers: IEEE C57.13. Provide butyl-molded window

type current transformers with 600-volt insulation, 10 kV BIL and

mount on the low-voltage bushings. Route current transformer leads

in a location as remote as possible from the power transformer

secondary cables to permit current measurements to be taken with

hook-on-ammeters. Provide three current transformers per power

transformer with characteristics listed in the following table.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The following guidelines for specifying

current transformers are based on the standard

current transformer primary rating which is just

below the full load current of the power transformer.

1. Select the appropriate current transformer (CT)

ratio, continuous-thermal-current rating factor (RF)

at 30 degrees C and ANSI Metering Accuracy Class

values based on transformer kVA size and secondary

voltage. Example: for a 500 kVA transformer at 208

volts - select 1200/5, 1.5, 0.3 - B-0.5.

VOLTS

208 240

kVA CT Ratio RF Meter Class CT Ratio RF Meter Class

75 200/5 4.0 0.3 thru B-0.1 200/5 4.0 0.3 thru B-0.1

112.5 300/5 3.0 0.3 thru B-0.2 200/5 4.0 0.3 thru B-0.1

150 400/5 4.0 0.3 thru B-0.2 300/5 3.0 0.3 thru B-0.2

225 600/5 3.0 0.3 thru B-0.5 400/5 4.0 0.3 thru B-0.2

300 800/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.5 600/5 3.0 0.3 thru B-0.5

500 1200/5 1.5 0.3 thru B-0.5 1200/5 1.5 0.3 thru B-0.5

750 2000/5 1.5 0.3 thru B-1.8 1500/5 1.5 0.3 thru B-0.9

VOLTS

480 600


75 200/5, 4.0 0.3 thru B-0.1 200/5 4.0 0.3 thru B-0.1



VOLTS

480 600


112.5 200/5, 4.0 0.3 thru B-0.1 200/5 4.0 0.3 thru B-0.1

150 200/5, 4.0 0.3 thru B-0.1 200/5 4.0 0.3 thru B-0.1

225 200/5, 4.0 0.3 thru B-0.1 200/5 4.0 0.3 thru B-0.1

300 300/5, 3.0 0.3 thru B-0.2 200/5 4.0 0.3 thru B-0.1

500 600/5, 3.0 0.3 thru B-0.5 400/5 4.0 0.3 thru B-0.2

750 800/5, 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.5 600/5 3.0 0.3 thru B-0.5

1000 1200/5 1.5 0.3 thru B-0.5 800/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.5

1500 1500/5 1.5 0.3 thru B-0.9 1200/5 1.5 0.3 thru B-0.5

2000 2000/5 1.5 0.3 thru B-1.8 1500/5 1.5 0.3 thru B-0.9

2500 3000/5 1.33 0.3 thru B-1.8 2000/5 1.5 0.3 thru B-1.8

2. Incorporate the appropriate values in table

below.

***************************************************************************

kVA Sec. Volt CT Ratio RF Meter Acc. Class

[500] [208Y/120] [1200/5] [1.5] [0.3 thru B-0.5]

[750] [480Y/277] [ 800/5] [2.0] [0.3 thru B-0.5]

]2.2.2 Transformer

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Use the following guidelines for specifying

transformers and insulating liquids.

1. On Navy projects use of biodegradable less-

flammable liquid is required.

For other projects, biodegradable less-flammable

liquid and mineral oil are permitted. Previously the

use of mineral oil-filled transformers was

recommended wherever possible. Currently,

biodegradable less-flammable transformer liquids that

improve transformer operating characteristics are

available with little, if any premium cost. This



requirement is supported by UFC 3-600-01, "Fire

Protection Engineering for Facilities", identifies

building and equipment separation distances based on

insulating liquid type. Mineral oil is more

restrictive than less-flammable liquid. For example,

a 1500 kVA transformer containing 600 gallons of

less-flammable liquid requires a building separation

distance of 1.5 meters (5 feet) when the construction

is fire-resistant or non-combustible. An equally

sized mineral oil-filled transformer requires 4.6

meters (15 feet) and 7.6 meters (25 feet) of

separation for fire-resistant and non-combustible

construction, respectively. Do not specify silicone-


2. Use IEEE C57.12.00, Table 8 - Designation of

voltage ratings of three-phase windings, such as

"4160 V - 480Y / 277 V". Connections must be Delta-

GrdY configuration for three phase systems. Other

system connections require waiver from UFC 3-550-01

criteria.

3. Include bracketed option to display transformer

rating on enclosure when directed by Activity. For

NASA projects only, include 3 inch yellow lettering

bracketed options.

4. Delete last sentence of item g regarding

removable ground strap if transformer secondary

winding is delta type.

***************************************************************************

a. Less-flammable [bio-based] ]liquid-insulated[ or oil-insulated], two

winding, 60 hertz, 65 degrees C rise above a 30 degrees C average

ambient, self-cooled type.

b. Transformer rated [_____] kVA.

c. Transformer voltage ratings: [_____] V [Delta][_____] - [_____] V

[GrdY][_____].[ For GrdY - GrdY transformers, provide transformer with

five-legged core design for third harmonic suppression.]

d. Tap changer: externally operated, manual type for changing tap

setting when the transformer is de-energized. Provide four 2.5 percent

full capacity taps, two above and two below rated primary voltage.

Indicate which tap setting is in use, clearly visible when the

compartment is opened.

e. Minimum tested percent impedance at 85 degrees C:

2.50 for units rated 75kVA and below

2.87 for units rated 112.5kVA to 300kVA

4.03 for 500kVA rated units

5.32 for units rated 750kVA and above

f. Comply with the following audible sound level limits:



kVA DECIBELS

(MAX

75 51

112.5 55

150 55

225 55

300 55

500 56

750 57

1000 58

1500 60

2000 61

2500 62

g. Include:

(1) Lifting lugs and provisions for jacking under base, with base

construction suitable for using rollers or skidding in any

direction.

(2) An insulated low-voltage neutral bushing with NEMA spade terminal,

and with removable ground strap.

(3) Provide transformer top with an access handhole.

[(4) kVA rating conspicuously displayed [using 75 mm (3 inch) high

yellow letters ]on its enclosure.

]2.2.2.1 Specified Transformer Efficiencies

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Transformer losses and efficiency requirements

have been modified into the table included within the

specification and the previous Navy loss tables have

been deleted. The requirement for transformers

larger than 2500 kva is an addition to the table in

10 CFR 431, Subpart K and was coordinated with

leading transformer manufacturers.

10 CFR 431, Subpart K is a result of the Energy

Policy and Conservation Act (EPACT) of 2005 and is



the "minimum" industry standard for distribution

transformers manufactured on or after January 1,

2016.

***************************************************************************

Provide transformer efficiency calculations utilizing the actual no-load and

load loss values obtained during the routine tests performed on the actual

transformer(s) prepared for this project. Reference no-load losses (NLL) at

20 degrees C. Reference load losses (LL) at 55 degrees C and at 50 percent

of the nameplate load. The transformer is not acceptable if the calculated

transformer efficiency is less than the efficiency indicated in the "KVA /

Efficiency" table below. The table is based on requirements contained

within 10 CFR 431, Subpart K. Submit certification, including supporting

calculations, from the manufacturer indicating conformance.

kVA EFFICIENCY

(percent)

15 98.65

30 98.83

45 98.92

75 99.03

112.5 99.11

150 99.16

225 99.23

300 99.27

500 99.35

750 99.40

1000 99.43

1500 99.48

2000 99.51

2500 99.53

above

2500

99.54

2.2.3 Insulating Liquid

a. Less-flammable [bio-based ]transformer liquids: NFPA 70 and FM APP


degrees C tested per ASTM D92 and a dielectric strength not less than

33 kV tested per ASTM D877/D877M. Provide identification of



transformer as "non-PCB" and "manufacturer's name and type of fluid" on

the nameplate.

Provide a fluid that is a biodegradable, [bio-based ]electrical

insulating, and cooling liquid classified by UL and approved by FM as

"less flammable" with the following properties:

(1) Pour point: ASTM D97, less than -15 degree C

(2) Aquatic biodegradation: EPA 712-C-98-075, 100 percent

(3) Trout toxicity: OECD Test 203, zero mortality of EPA 821-R-02-012,

pass

[b. Mineral oil: ASTM D3487, Type II, tested in accordance with ASTM

D117. Provide identification of transformer as "non-PCB" and "Type II

mineral oil" on the nameplate.

]2.2.3.1 Liquid-Filled Transformer Nameplates

Provide nameplate information in accordance with IEEE C57.12.00 and as

modified or supplemented by this section.

2.2.4 Corrosion Protection

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Use stainless steel bases and cabinets for

most applications. In hostile environments, the

additional cost of totally stainless steel tanks and

metering enclosures may be justified. Manufacturer's

standard construction material is acceptable only in

noncoastal and noncorrosive environments. Choose the

second bracketed option for hostile environments.

***************************************************************************

[Provide corrosion resistant bases and cabinets of transformers, fabricated

of stainless steel conforming to ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or 304L. Base

includes any part of pad-mounted transformer that is within 75 mm (3 inches)

of concrete pad.

][Provide entire transformer assembly, including tank and radiator, base,

enclosure, and metering enclosure fabricated of stainless steel conforming

to ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or 304L. Form enclosure of stainless steel

sheets. The optional use of aluminum is permitted for the metering

enclosure.

]Paint entire transformer assembly [Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5 green][Munsell

5BG7.0/0.4 sky gray (ANSI 70)][_____], with paint coating system complying

with IEEE C57.12.28 [and IEEE C57.12.29 ]regardless of base, cabinet, and

tank material. The Munsell color notation is specified in ASTM D1535.

2.3 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

Provide warning signs for the enclosures of pad-mounted transformers having

a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts in accordance with NEMA Z535.4 and NEMA

260.



a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in

accordance with IEEE C57.12.28, such as for pad-mounted transformers,

provide self-adhesive warning labels (decals, Panduit No. PPSO710D72 or

approved equal) on the outside of the high voltage compartment

door(s)with nominal dimensions of 178 by 255 mm (7 by 10 inches) with

the legend "WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of nominal 50 mm

(2 inch) high letters. Include the work "WARNING" in white letters on

an orange background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters on a

white background.

[b. When such equipment is guarded by a fence, mount signs on the fence.

Provide metal signs having nominal dimensions of 355 by 255 mm (14 by

10 inches) with the legend "WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE KEEP OUT" printed in

three lines of nominal 75 mm (3 inch) high white letters on an orange

and black field.

]2.4 ARC FLASH WARNING LABEL

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include the Arc Flash Warning Label detail on

the drawings. See the technical notes at the

beginning of section to obtain the AutoCAD drawing

file of the label.

***************************************************************************

Provide arc flash warning label for the enclosure of pad-mounted

transformers. Locate this self-adhesive warning label on the outside of the

high voltage compartment door warning of potential electrical arc flash

hazards and appropriate PPE required. Provide label format as indicated..

2.5 GROUNDING AND BONDING

UL 467. Provide grounding and bonding as specified in Section 33 71 02


[2.6 PADLOCKS

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Designer must assure that Section 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE is included and is edited to include

padlocks.

Do not use this paragraph for Navy and Air Force

projects.

***************************************************************************

Provide padlocks for pad-mounted equipment[ and for each fence gate], keyed

[alike][as directed by the Contracting Officer]. Comply with Section 08 71

00 DOOR HARDWARE.

]2.7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Use the first bracketed paragraph when project

includes a concrete section in Division 03;

otherwise, the second bracketed paragraph may be

used. Coordinate requirements with Section 03 30

../Word/33%2071%2002.doc

../Word/08%2071%2000.doc

../Word/08%2071%2000.doc

../Word/08%2071%2000.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.00%2010.doc



00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE or Section 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. Use Section 03 30 00 for

Navy projects and Section 03 30 00.00 10 for other

projects.

***************************************************************************

[Provide concrete associated with electrical work for other than encasement

of underground ducts rated for 30 MPa (4000 psi) minimum 28-day compressive

strength unless specified otherwise. Conform to the requirements of

Section[ 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE][ 03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE

CONCRETE].

]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: If concrete requirements are detailed and no

cast-in-place section is to be included in the

project specification, refer to Section 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE or Section 03 30 00.00 10

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE and select such portions as

needed to provide complete requirements in addition

to the requirements below.

***************************************************************************

[Provide concrete associated with electrical work as follows:

a. Composed of fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, portland cement, and

water so proportioned and mixed as to produce a plastic, workable

mixture.

b. Fine aggregate: hard, dense, durable, clean, and uncoated sand.

c. Coarse aggregate: reasonably well graded from 4.75 mm to 25 mm (3/16

inch to 1 inch).

d. Fine and coarse aggregates: free from injurious amounts of dirt,

vegetable matter, soft fragments or other deleterious substances.

e. Water: fresh, clean, and free from salts, alkali, organic matter, and

other impurities.

f. Concrete associated with electrical work for other than encasement of

underground ducts: 30 MPa (4000 psi) minimum 28-day compressive

strength unless specified otherwise.

g. Slump: Less than 100 mm (4 inches). Retempering of concrete will not

be permitted.

h. Exposed, unformed concrete surfaces: smooth, wood float finish.

i. Concrete must be cured for a period of not less than 7 days, and

concrete made with high early strength portland cement must be repaired

by patching honeycombed or otherwise defective areas with cement mortar

as directed by the Contracting Officer.

j. Air entrain concrete exposed to weather using an air-entraining

admixture conforming to ASTM C260/C260M.

k. Air content: between 4 and 6 percent.

../Word/03%2030%2000.00%2010.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.00%2010.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.00%2010.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.00%2010.doc



]2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

2.8.1 Transformer Test Schedule

The Government reserves the right to witness tests. Provide transformer

test schedule for tests to be performed at the manufacturer's test facility.

Submit required test schedule and location, and notify the Contracting

Officer 30 calendar days before scheduled test date. Notify Contracting

Officer 15 calendar days in advance of changes to scheduled date.

a. Test Instrument Calibration

(1) Provide a calibration program which assures that all applicable

test instruments are maintained within rated accuracy.

(2) Accuracy: Traceable to the National Institute of Standards and

Technology.

(3) Instrument calibration frequency schedule: less than or equal to

12 months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty

equipment.

(4) Dated calibration labels: visible on all test equipment.

(5) Calibrating standard: higher accuracy than that of the instrument

tested.

(6) Keep up-to-date records that indicate dates and test results of

instruments calibrated or tested. For instruments calibrated by

the manufacturer on a routine basis, in lieu of third party

calibration, include the following:

(a) Maintain up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and


(b) Identify the third party/laboratory calibrated instrument to

verify that calibrating standard is met.

2.8.2 Design Tests

IEEE C57.12.00, and IEEE C57.12.90. Section 5.1.2 in IEEE C57.12.80 states

that "design tests are made only on representative apparatus of basically

the same design." Submit design test reports (complete with test data,

explanations, formulas, and results), in the same submittal package as the

catalog data and drawings for[ each of] the specified transformer(s), with

design tests performed prior to the award of this contract.

a. Tests: certified and signed by a registered professional engineer.


test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same coil construction

(such as wire wound primary and sheet wound secondary), the same kVA,

the same cooling type (ONAN), the same temperature rise rating, and the

same insulating liquid as the transformer specified.




impulse dielectric test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same

BIL, the same coil construction (such as wire wound primary and sheet

wound secondary), and a tap changer, if specified. Design lightning

impulse tests includes the primary windings only of that transformer.

(1) IEEE C57.12.90, paragraph 10.3 entitled "Lightning Impulse Test

Procedures," and IEEE C57.98.

(2) State test voltage levels.

(3) Provide photographs of oscilloscope display waveforms or plots of


d. Lifting and moving devices: "Basically the same design" requirement

for the lifting and moving devices test means a test report confirming

that the lifting device being used is capable of handling the weight of

the specified transformer in accordance with IEEE C57.12.34.


pad-mounted transformer with a tank volume within 30 percent of the


f. Short circuit: "Basically the same design" for the short circuit test

means a pad-mounted transformer with the same kVA as the transformer

specified.

2.8.3 Routine and Other Tests

IEEE C57.12.00. Routine and other tests: performed in accordance with IEEE

C57.12.90 by the manufacturer on[ each of] the actual transformer(s)

prepared for this project to ensure that the design performance is

maintained in production. Submit test reports, by serial number and receive

approval before delivery of equipment to the project site. Required tests

and testing sequence as follows:

a. Phase relation

b. Ratio

c. No-load losses (NLL) and excitation current

d. Load losses (LL) and impedance voltage

e. Dielectric

(1) Impulse

(2) Applied voltage

(3) Induced voltage

f. Leak

PART 3 EXECUTION



3.1 INSTALLATION

Conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified herein.

Provide new equipment and materials unless indicated or specified otherwise.

3.2 GROUNDING

NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, except provide grounding systems with a resistance to

solid earth ground not exceeding 925 [_____] ohms.



ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Connect ground conductors to the upper end of

ground rods by exothermic weld or compression connector. Provide

compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors.

3.2.2 Pad-Mounted Transformer Grounding

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Ensure plans show the secondary neutral

grounding conductor sized in accordance with NFPA 70

and the primary neutral grounding conductor when

required. Ensure the CADD detail used matches how

this paragraph is edited. Transformer is to have a

ground ring and the normal number of ground rods is

either four or two. The one ground rod option should

only be chosen if required by local installation

requirements.

***************************************************************************

Provide a ground ring around the transformer with [1/0][4/0] AWG bare

copper.[ Provide four ground rods in the ground ring, one per corner.][

Provide two ground rods in the ground ring at opposite corners.][ Provide

one ground rod in the ground ring with the ground rod located in the

transformer cabinet.] Install the ground rods at least 3000 mm (10 feet)

apart from each other. Provide separate copper grounding conductors and

connect them to the ground loop as indicated. When work in addition to that

indicated or specified is required to obtain the specified ground

resistance, the provision of the contract covering "Changes" applies.

3.2.3 Connections


compression connector. Install exothermic welds and compression connectors

as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.




Install and connect pad-mounted transformers furnished under this section as


herein.

../Word/33%2071%2002.doc

../Word/33%2071%2002.doc



[3.3.1 Meters and Current Transformers

***************************************************************************

Note: Delete bracketed paragraph for Navy and Air

Force projects, this information is covered in their

associated metering specifications.

***************************************************************************

ANSI C12.1.

]3.4 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

Where field painting of enclosures is required to correct damage to the

manufacturer's factory applied coatings, provide manufacturer's recommended

coatings and apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

[3.5 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include the following option when pad-mounted

transformer is guarded by a fence.

***************************************************************************

Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible

side, but space the signs a maximum of 9 meters (30 feet) apart.

]3.6 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

***************************************************************************



seismic zone in which the requirement is located.


only if slab is not detailed on drawings. Do not

provide curbs or raised edges around liquid filled

transformers unless specifically approved by

Technical Proponent (link provided in the technical

note at the beginning of this section).

***************************************************************************

Mount transformer on concrete slab as follows:

a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide the slab with dimensions at least

200 mm (8 inches) thick, reinforced with a 152 by 152 mm MW19 by MW19

(6 by 6 inches - W2.9 by W2.9) mesh placed uniformly 100 mm (4 inches)

from the top of the slab.

b. Place slab on a 150 mm (6 inch) thick, well-compacted gravel base.

c. Install slab such that top of concrete slab is approximately 100 mm (4

inches) above the finished grade with gradual slope for drainage.

d. Provide edges above grade with 15 mm (1/2 inch) chamfer.

e. Provide slab of adequate size to project at least 200 mm (8 inches)

beyond the equipment.



Stub up conduits, with bushings, 50 mm (2 inches) into cable wells in the

concrete pad. Coordinate dimensions of cable wells with transformer cable

training areas.

3.6.1 Cast-In-Place Concrete

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Use the first bracketed option when project


otherwise, the second bracketed option may be used.

***************************************************************************

Provide cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with the requirements of[


CONCRETE]][ ACI 318][ ACI 318M].

[3.6.2 Sealing

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Require sealing of cable wells (windows) in

the concrete pad if rodent intrusion is a problem.

***************************************************************************

When the installation is complete, seal all entries into the equipment

enclosure with an approved sealing method. Provide seals of sufficient

strength and durability to protect all energized live parts of the equipment

from rodents, insects, or other foreign matter.

]3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL




performed in accordance with NETA ATS. Submit reports, including acceptance

criteria and limits for each test in accordance with NETA ATS "Test Values".

3.7.1.1 Pad-Mounted Transformers


(1) Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved

shop drawings.

(2) Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Check for damaged or


(3) Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

(4) Verify the presence of PCB content labeling.

(5) Verify the bushings and transformer interiors are clean.

(6) Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using

low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible bolted

electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or

performing thermographic survey.

../Word/03%2030%2000.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.00%2010.doc



(7) Verify correct liquid level in tanks and bushings.

(8) Verify that positive pressure is maintained on gas-blanketed

transformers.

(9) Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as recommended by

manufacturer.

(10) Verify de-energized tap changer position is left as specified.

[(11) Verify the presence of transformer surge arresters.

]b. Electrical tests

(1) Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with

low-resistance ohmmeter.

(2) Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral


***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include the bracketed option for additional

field electrical tests for NASA projects only.

***************************************************************************

[(3) Perform insulation-resistance tests, winding-to-winding and each

winding-to-ground. Calculate polarization index.

(4) Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions.

(5) Perform insulation power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on all

windings in accordance with test equipment manufacturer’s published

data.

(6) Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on each bushing

equipped with a power-factor/capacitance tap. In the absence of a

power-factor/capacitance tap, perform hot-collar tests.

(7) Measure the resistance of each high-voltage winding in each de-

energized tap-changer position. Measure the resistance of each

low-voltage winding in each de-energized tap-changer position, if

applicable.

(8) Remove and test a sample of insulating liquid for the following:

Dielectric breakdown voltage, Acid neutralization number, Specific

gravity, Interfacial tension, Color, Visual Condition, Water in

insulating liquids (Required on 25 kV or higher voltages and on all

silicone-filled units.), and Power factor or dissipation factor.

(9) Perform dissolved-gas analysis (DGA) on a sample of insulating

liquid.

][3.7.1.2 Current Transformers

***************************************************************************



Note: Delete bracketed optional paragraphs for Navy

and Air Force projects. This information is covered

in their associated metering specifications.

***************************************************************************



shop drawings.

(2) Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

(3) Verify correct connection.

(4) Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary

circuit wiring.

(5) Verify the unit is clean.





(7) Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections provide

good contact.

(8) Verify correct operation of transformer withdrawal mechanism and


(9) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and

on moving and sliding surfaces.

b. Electrical tests


low-resistance ohmmeter, if applicable.

(2) Perform insulation-resistance test.

(3) Perform a polarity test.

(4) Perform a ratio-verification test.

][3.7.1.3 Watthour Meter

***************************************************************************

Note: Delete bracketed optional paragraphs for Navy



***************************************************************************



shop drawings.




(3) Verify tightness of electrical connections.

b. Electrical tests

(1) Calibrate watthour meters according to manufacturer's published

data.

(2) Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of meter,

where applicable.

(3) Verify that current transformer secondary circuits are intact.

]3.7.1.4 Grounding System


(1) Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and

specifications.

b. Electrical tests

(1) Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-





less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground

resistance tester in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to

test each ground or group of grounds. Use an instrument equipped

with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to

indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems

under test.

(2) Submit the measured ground resistance of each ground rod and

grounding system, indicating the location of the rod and grounding

system. Include the test method and test setup (i.e., pin

location) used to determine ground resistance and soil conditions

at the time the measurements were made.

[3.7.1.5 Surge Arresters, Medium- and High-Voltage



shop drawings.


(3) Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.

(4) Verify the arresters are clean.







(6) Verify that the ground lead on each device is individually attached

to a ground bus or ground electrode.

b. Electrical tests



(2) Perform an insulation-resistance test on each arrester, phase

terminal-to-ground.

(3) Test grounding connection.


Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, show by demonstration in

service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and

properly performing the intended function. As an exception to requirements

stated elsewhere in the contract, notify the Contracting Officer 5 working

days in advance of the dates and times of checking and testing.



Section 26 12 21 Page 1

***************************************************************************

USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS-26 12 21 (May 2017)

-----------------------------


UFGS-26 12 21 (November 2013)



***************************************************************************

SECTION 26 12 21

SINGLE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

05/17

***************************************************************************


requirements for single-phase clam shell type and

two-compartment type pad-mounted transformers of the

dead-front type for exterior applications.











present.




***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: For Navy and Air Force projects, this

specification incorporates a "reduced shop drawing

submittal process" for listed manufacturers who

previously satisfied reduced shop drawing submittal

process requirements. This specification also

includes unique routine and other test requirements,

transformer loss certificate, transformer test

schedule, and field quality control acceptance tests

and reports. The preparing activity, NAVFAC LANT,

has significant experience and technical expertise in

these areas. If Reach-back support during

construction is desired, for a specific NAVFAC or Air

Force project, the technical representative

(electrical engineer) editing this document for that

project must contact the NAVFAC LANT Capital

Improvements Electrical Engineering (Code CI44)





Office for consultation during the design stage of

the project, prior to including the requirement in

the specification.

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************




--Section 26 11 13.00 20 PRIMARY UNIT SUBSTATION

--Section 26 11 16 SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS

--Section 26 12 19.10 THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED

TRANSFORMERS



--Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM



--Section 26 27 13.10 30 ELECTRIC METERS

--Section 26 27 14.00 20 ELECTRICITY METERING


DISTRIBUTION

Do not use the following related guide specifications

except for Army Civil Works projects. They have not

been unified:

--Section 26 11 14.00 10 MAIN ELECTRIC SUPPLY STATION

AND SUBSTATION

--Section 26 22 00.00 10 480-VOLT STATION SERVICE

SWITCHGEAR AND TRANSFORMERS

--Section 26 28 00.00 10 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS,

SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Coordination is required between this Section

and metering equipment specification sections. See

Section 26 27 14.00 20 ELECTRICITY METERING or

Section 26 27 13.10 30 ELECTRIC METERS for

transformer and metering details, which are available

in metric (SI) and U.S. Customary (IP) system

dimension. Use these files to develop project

specific drawings, including:

File Name Description

PADMDE7 Single Phase, One Circuit with Surge Arresters

PADMDE8 Single Phase, Feed-Thru Circuit with Surge Arresters

ARCFLASH Arc Flash Warning Label

TO DOWNLOAD DRAWINGS

../Word/26%2008%2000.doc

../Word/26%2011%2013.00%2020.doc

../Word/26%2011%2016.doc

../Word/26%2012%2019.10.doc

../Word/26%2013%2000.doc

../Word/26%2020%2000.doc

../Word/26%2023%2000.doc

../Word/26%2024%2013.doc

../Word/26%2027%2013.10%2030.doc

../Word/26%2027%2014.00%2020.doc

../Word/33%2071%2001.doc

../Word/26%2011%2014.00%2010.doc

../Word/26%2022%2000.00%2010.doc

../Word/26%2028%2000.00%2010.doc

../Word/26%2027%2014.00%2020.doc

../Word/26%2027%2013.10%2030.doc



Go to http://www.wbdg.org/FFC/NAVGRAPH/graphtoc.pdf.

Select the appropriate Electrical .ZIP file(s) and

extract the desired details.

Do not include list of details, or details

themselves, in project specifications. Insert the

appropriate details on drawings and modify optional

and blank items. If special features are required,

do not modify details, but indicate these changes as

notes below the detail.

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Show the following information on the project

drawings:

1. Single-line diagram showing pad-mounted

transformer connectors, inserts, surge arresters,

switches, fuses, current transformers with ratings,

and meters as applicable.

2. Grounding plan.

3. Type and number of cables, and size of conductors

for each power circuit.


IEEE C57.12.00, Table 7, "Designation of voltage

ratings of single-phase windings"). State the

primary voltage (nominal) actually in service and not

the voltage class.

5. Special conditions, such as altitude,

temperature, and humidity; exposure to fumes, vapors,

dust, and gases; and seismic requirements.

***************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

***************************************************************************






title.














***************************************************************************




AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)

ACI 318 (2014; Errata 1-2 2014; Errata 3-5 2015;

Errata 6 2016; Errata 7 2017) Building Code

Requirements for Structural Concrete and

Commentary

ACI 318M (2014; ERTA 2015) Building Code Requirements

for Structural Concrete & Commentary



Metering


ASTM A240/A240M (2016) Standard Specification for Chromium

and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,

Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for

General Applications

ASTM C260/C260M (2010a; R 2016) Standard Specification for

Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete




Origin






Disk Electrodes



ASTM D97 (2017a) Standard Test Method for Pour Point

of Petroleum Products

FM GLOBAL (FM)






IEEE 386 (2016) Separable Insulated Connector Systems

for Power Distribution Systems Rated 2.5 kV

through 35 kV



IEEE C37.47 (2011) Standard for High Voltage Distribution

Class Current-Limiting Type Fuses and Fuse

Disconnecting Switches



Transformers

IEEE C57.12.25 (1990) Standard for Transformers - Pad-

Mounted, Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled,

Single-Phase Distribution Transformers With

Separable Insulated High-Voltage Connectors;

High Voltage, 34,500 Grdy/ 19,920 Volts and

Below; Low Voltage, 240/120 Volts; 167 kVa

and Smaller Requirements


Enclosure Integrity


Enclosure Integrity for Coastal Environments





Transformers


Transformers




Circuits (>1kV)


Terms & Definitions






and Systems



Sockets

NEMA 260 (1996; R 2004) Safety Labels for Pad-Mounted

Switchgear and Transformers Sited in Public

Areas

NEMA Z535.4 (2011) American National Standard for Product

Safety Signs and Labels


Safety Standards




ORGANISATION FOR ECONOMIC CO-OPERATION AND DEVELOPMENT (OECD)

OECD Test 203 (1992) Fish Acute Toxicity Test

U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

EPA 712-C-98-075 (1998) Fate, Transport and Transformation

Test Guidelines - OPPTS 835.3100- "Aerobic

Aquatic Biodegradation"

EPA 821-R-02-012 (2002) Methods for Measuring the Acute

Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to

Freshwater and Marine Organisms


10 CFR 431 Energy Efficiency Program for Certain

Commercial and Industrial Equipment





***************************************************************************




***************************************************************************

../Word/26%2008%2000.doc



Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING applies to this Section,


1.3 DEFINITIONS


used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined in IEEE

Stds Dictionary.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

***************************************************************************










Only add a "G" to an item, if the submittal is


project.





















***************************************************************************






eNotebook, in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING.

../Word/26%2008%2000.doc

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc

../Word/01%2033%2029.doc

../Word/01%2033%2029.doc




PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Pad-Mounted Transformer Drawings; G[, [_____]]

SD-03 Product Data

Single-Phase Pad-Mounted Transformers (Dead-Front); G[, [_____]]

SD-06 Test Reports


SD-07 Certificates

Transformer Efficiencies; G[, [_____]]


Transformer Test Schedule; G[, [_____]]

Pad-Mounted Transformer Design Tests; G[, [_____]]

Pad-Mounted Transformer Routine and Other Tests; G[, [_____]]


Transformer(s), Data Package 5; G[, [_____]]

[1.4.1 Government Submittal Review

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include this bracketed option on Navy and Air

Force projects where "reach-back support" has already

been coordinated with NAVFAC LANT per the 2nd

introductory Technical Note. Add appropriate



***************************************************************************

[Code CI44, NAVFAC LANT, Naval Facilities Engineering Command][_____] will

review and approve all submittals in this section requiring Government

approval.

][1.4.2 Reduced Submittal Requirements

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include this bracketed reduced submittal

requirements paragraph on Navy and Air Force

Projects.

***************************************************************************

Transformers designed and manufactured by ABB in Jefferson City, MO; by

Eaton's Cooper Power Series Transformers in Waukesha, WI; by ERMCO in

Dyersburg, TN; or by Howard Industries in Laurel, MS need not submit the

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc



entire submittal package requirements of this contract. Instead, submit the

following items:

a. A certification, signed by the manufacturer, stating that the

manufacturer will meet the technical requirements of this

specification.

b. An outline drawing of the transformer with devices identified

(paragraph PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMER DRAWINGS, item a).

c. ANSI nameplate data of the transformer (paragraph PAD-MOUNTED

TRANSFORMER DRAWINGS, item b).

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The designer is responsible for providing

proper settings for secondary over-current device(s)

to ensure proper protection of equipment and

coordination with transformer high side fuses.

Include the following option for transformers serving

secondary over-current devices containing adjustable

trips.

***************************************************************************

[d. Manufacturer's published time-current curves in PDF format and in



transformer high side fuses (paragraph PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMER

DRAWINGS, item e).

]e. Routine and other tests (in PART 2, see paragraph SOURCE QUALITY

CONTROL, subparagraph ROUTINE AND OTHER TESTS), conducted by the

manufacturer. These tests may be witnessed by the government. Provide

transformer test schedule required by submittal item "SD-11 Closeout

Submittals". Provide certified copies of the tests.

f. Provide acceptance test reports required by submittal item "SD-06 Test

Reports".

g. Provide operation and maintenance manuals required by submittal item

"SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data".

]1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.5.1 Pad-Mounted Transformer Drawings

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete bracketed information for Navy and Air




***************************************************************************

Include the following as a minimum:

a. An outline drawing, including front, top, and side views.

b. IEEE nameplate data.



[c. Elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams with terminals identified of

meter and current transformers.

]d. One-line diagram, including switch(es)[, current transformers,

meters,] and fuses.

e. Manufacturer's published time-current curves in PDF format and in



transformer high side fuses.



provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" or "must" had been

substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these


meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Provide equipment, materials,

installation, and workmanship in accordance with NFPA 70 unless more

stringent requirements are specified or indicated.




design and workmanship, and:

a. Have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years

prior to bid opening including applications of equipment and materials

under similar circumstances and of similar size.

b. Have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements,

manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period.

c. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required,

provide products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts

of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless

stated in this section.





furnished.



are not acceptable.

1.6 MAINTENANCE


***************************************************************************







***************************************************************************


OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein. In addition to

requirements of Data Package 5, include the following on the actual

transformer(s) provided:

a. An instruction manual with pertinent items and information highlighted.

b. An outline drawing, front, top, and side views.

c. Prices for spare parts and supply list.

d. Routine and field acceptance test reports.

e. Fuse curves for primary fuses.

[f. Information on watthour demand meter, CT's, and fuse block.

]g. Actual nameplate diagram.

h. Date of purchase.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Products and materials not considered to be pad-mounted transformers and

related accessories are specified in[ Section 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION

AND DISTRIBUTION,][ Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM,][ and][

Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION].

2.2 SINGLE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS (DEAD-FRONT)

***************************************************************************

NOTE: According to IEEE 386, 200 ampere separable

insulated connectors normally used on dead-front pad-

mounted transformers have both a fault closure and a

short-time current rating of 10,000 amperes.

Therefore, from a safety standpoint, dead-front

configurations which utilize these connectors should

only be used at system locations which have available

fault currents of less than 10,000 rms symmetrical

amperes.

Normally use single compartment (clam shell)

transformers. If two-compartment transformers are

required, their use must be approved by the the

technical review authority.

Utilization of 35 kV single-phase transformers is not

a recommended design practice. Therefore, approval

for use is required by the technical review authority

../Word/01%2078%2023.doc

../Word/33%2071%2001.doc

../Word/26%2020%2000.doc

../Word/33%2071%2002.doc



and significant changes to this specification would

be required.

This specification does not address the materials

used for the winding (copper versus aluminum) and it

is assumed that the manufacturer will provide their

standard product with respect to the winding

construction, based on the cost of materials at the

time of order acceptance. No failure data has been

obtained indicating that copper windings have a

longer life than aluminum windings. If copper

windings are specified, the cost increase for single-

phase distribution transformers has recently been

about 15 percent. Do NOT specify winding materials.

***************************************************************************

IEEE C57.12.25, IEEE C57.12.28 and as specified herein. Submit

manufacturer's information for each component, device, insulating fluid, and

accessory provided with the transformer.

2.2.1 Compartment Construction

[a. Single compartment: Provide Type 1 combination high- and low-voltage

compartment, clam shell style, with lockable (having pad-locking

provisions) hinged cover and single-point latching. Type 1 is defined

by IEEE C57.12.25.

][b. Two compartment: Provide high- and low-voltage compartments

separated by steel isolating barriers extending the full height and

depth of the compartments. Compartment doors:

(1) Hinged lift-off type with stop in open position and three-point

latching.

(2) High voltage door fastening accessible only after the low voltage

door has been opened.

]2.2.1.1 High Voltage

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Current policy is to use oil-immersed fuses in

series with current limiting fuses to achieve better

protection and obtain life cycle cost benefits.

For 15 kV and 25 kV, 200 A bushings, select bushing

wells and bushing well inserts.

Use two bushing wells for phase-to-neutral systems

and four bushing wells for phase-to-phase systems.

Coordinate with transformer voltage designations in

paragraph TRANSFORMER. If feed through applications

are required, special transformer compartment sizing

may be necessary.

If feed through inserts are used, then ensure the

enclosure is specified to be wide enough and deep



enough to contain the inserts with conductors

terminated.

Delete dead-break connectors and load-break switch

handle options except for systems with a fault

capability greater than 10,000 amps or when the

primary cable size is greater than No. 4/0 AWG. This

design requires approval of the technical review

authority.

Do not provide standoff bushings unless this

transformer is the only dead-front transformer on the

base. Public works normally carries standoff

bushings in their vehicles. Provide protective caps

when providing standoff bushings and to cover unused

bushing well inserts when not providing surge

arresters.


below.

***************************************************************************

High-voltage portion contains: the incoming line, insulated high-voltage

[load-break ][dead-break ]connectors, bushing well inserts,[ feed-through

inserts,] [two][four] high-voltage bushing wells configured for loop feed

application,[ load-break switch handle(s),] access to oil-immersed fuses,[

dead-front surge arresters,] tap changer handle, connector parking stands[

with insulated standoff bushings],[ protective caps,] and ground pad.

[a. Insulated high-voltage load-break connectors: IEEE 386, rated

[15][_____] kV, [95][_____] kV BIL. Current rating: 200 amperes rms

continuous. Short time rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for a

time duration of 0.17 seconds. Provide connectors and inserts from the

same manufacturer. Provide connectors with a steel reinforced hook-

stick eye, grounding eye, test point, and arc-quenching contact

material.

][b. Insulated high-voltage dead-break connectors: IEEE 386, rated [15

kV, 95 kV BIL][25 kV, 125 kV BIL]. Current rating: 600 amperes rms

continuous. Short time rating: 25,000 amperes rms symmetrical for a

time duration of 0.17 seconds. Provide connectors with a [200 ampere

bushing interface for surge arresters,] steel reinforced hook-stick

eye, grounding eye, test point, and arc-quenching contact material.

]c. Bushing well inserts[ and feed-through inserts]: IEEE 386, 200

amperes, [15][_____] kV class. Provide a bushing well insert for each

bushing well unless indicated otherwise.[ Provide feed-through inserts

as indicated.]

[d. One-piece bushings: IEEE 386, 600 amperes, [15][25] kV Class.

][e. Load-break switch: Radial-feed oil-immersed type rated at [15 kV, 95







]f. Provide bayonet oil-immersed, expulsion fuses in series with oil-













***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete the bracketed option regarding

placement of current-limiting fuses except when load-

break switch is specified.

***************************************************************************




switch.]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Provide bushing-mounted elbow type arresters

at the ends of all radials. Provide arresters for

all voltage levels above 5 kV.

***************************************************************************

[g. Surge arresters: IEEE C62.11, rated [3][6][9][10][12][15][_____] kV,

fully shielded, dead-front metal-oxide-varistor, elbow type with

resistance-graded gap suitable for plugging into inserts as indicated.

]h. Parking stands: Provide a parking stand near each bushing well.[

Provide insulated standoff bushings for parking of energized load-break

connectors on parking stands.]

[i. Protective caps: IEEE 386, 200 amperes, [15][25][_____] kV class.

Provide insulated protective caps (not shipping caps) for insulating

and sealing out moisture from unused bushing well inserts[ and

insulated standoff bushings].

]2.2.1.2 Low Voltage

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Installation of circuit breakers in the

transformer is not recognized by IEEE standards, and

limits accessibility by covering lugs, gauges, and

accessories. Do not use.


below.

***************************************************************************



Low-voltage portion contains: low-voltage bushings with NEMA spade

terminals, accessories,[ metering,] stainless steel or laser-etched anodized

aluminum diagrammatic transformer nameplate, and ground pad.

a. Include the following accessories: drain plug, fill plug, pressure

relief device and a liquid level sight gage.

***************************************************************************


of, converting to basewide metering systems. A

unified metering specification is under development

to replace the metering requirements in this section.

For single-compartment (clam shell type)

transformers, use the first bracketed paragraph to

provide a self-contained meter base at the facility

served by the transformer, such as individual housing

units or lift stations. For two-compartment

transformers, use the second bracketed paragraph

below for Navy projects and possibly for Air Force

projects. Navy projects require use of Section 26 27

14.00 20 ELECTRICITY METERING. Air Force projects

may require use of Section 26 27 13.10 30 ELECTRIC

METERS. Delete the third bracketed paragraphs below

for Air Force and Navy projects.








as to this section of the specifications.





1 and this specification section.

***************************************************************************

b. Metering

[For single-compartment (clam shell type) transformers, provide a self-

contained meter base at the facility to be served by the transformer,

as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

][For two-compartment transformers, provide as specified in Section [26

27 13.10 30 ELECTRIC METERS][26 27 14.00 20 ELECTRICITY METERING].

][For two-compartment transformers, provide a transformer-rated meter

at the secondary portion of the transformer.

[(1) NEMA/ANSI C12.10. Provide a socket-mounted electronic

programmable outdoor watthour meter, surface mounted flush against

the side of the low-voltage compartment as indicated. Program the

../Word/26%2027%2014.00%2020.doc

../Word/26%2027%2014.00%2020.doc

../Word/26%2027%2013.10%2030.doc

../Word/26%2020%2000.doc

../Word/26%2027%2013.10%2030.doc

../Word/26%2027%2013.10%2030.doc

../Word/26%2027%2014.00%2020.doc



meter at the factory or in the field. When field programming is

performed, turn field programming device over to the Contracting

Officer at completion of project. Coordinate the meter to system

requirements.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: When Section 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND

CONTROL FOR HVAC is used, coordinate meter

requirements. Form 4S, in text below, is for single-

phase, three-wire systems, for other system

configurations, designer must determine the

appropriate form designation.

***************************************************************************

(a) Design: Provide meter designed for use on a single-phase,

three-wire, [240/120][480/240] volt system with two current

transformers. Include necessary KYZ pulse initiation hardware for

energy monitoring and control system (EMCS)[ as specified in

Section 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC].

(b) Coordination: Provide meter coordinated with ratios of current


(c) Class: 20; Form: 4S, accuracy: plus or minus 1.0 percent

Finish: Class II.

(d) Cover: Polycarbonate and lockable to prevent tampering and

unauthorized removal.

(e) Kilowatt-hour register: five digit electronic programmable

type.

(f) Demand register:

1. Provide solid state.

2. Meter reading multiplier: Indicate multiplier on the meter

face.

3. Demand interval length: programmed for [15][30][60]

minutes with rolling demand up to six subintervals per interval.

(g) Meter fusing: Provide a fuse block mounted in the secondary

side containing one fuse per phase to protect the voltage input to

the meter. Size fuses as recommended by the meter manufacturer.

(h) Socket: ANSI C12.7. Provide NEMA Type 3R, box-mounted socket

having automatic circuit-closing bypass and having jaws compatible

with requirements of the meter. Cover unused hub openings with

blank hub plates. Paint box Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5 green to match the

pad-mounted transformer to which the box-mounted socket is

attached. The Munsell color notation is specified in ASTM D1535.

](2) Current transformers IEEE C57.13. Provide butyl-molded window

type current transformers with 600-volt insulation, 10 kV BIL and

mount on the low-voltage bushings. Route current transformer leads

in a location as remote as possible from the power transformer

../Word/23%2009%2000.doc

../Word/23%2009%2000.doc



secondary cables to permit current measurements to be taken with

hook-on-ammeters. Provide two current transformers per power


***************************************************************************

NOTE: The following guidelines for specifying

current transformers are based on the standard

current transformer primary rating which is just

below the full load current of the power transformer.

1. Select the appropriate current transformer (CT)

ratio, continuous-thermal-current rating factor (RF)

at 30 degrees C and ANSI metering accuracy class

values based on transformer kVA size and secondary

voltage. Example: for a 50 kVA transformer at 240

volts - select 200/5, 4.0, 0.3 through B-0.1.

VOLTS

240 480


15 200/5, 4.0, 0.3 thru B-0.1 200/5, 4.0, 0.3 thru B-0.1

25 200/5, 4.0, 0.3 thru B-0.1 200/5, 4.0, 0.3 thru B-0.1

37.5 200/5, 4.0, 0.3 thru B-0.1 200/5, 4.0, 0.3 thru B-0.1

50 200/5, 4.0, 0.3 thru B-0.1 200/5, 4.0, 0.3 thru B-0.1

75 300/5, 3.0, 0.3 thru B-0.2 200/5, 4.0, 0.3 thru B-0.1

160 400/5, 4.0, 0.3 thru B-0.2 200/5, 4.0, 0.3 thru B-0.1

167 600/5, 3.0, 0.3 thru B-0.5 300/5, 3.0, 0.3 thru B-0.2

2. Incorporate the appropriate values in table.

***************************************************************************

NAME kVA Sec. Volt CT Ratio RF Meter Acc. Class

[T1] [50] [240] [200/5] [4.0] [0.3 thru B-0.1]

[T2] [75] [480] [200/5] [4.0] [0.3 thru B-0.1]

]2.2.2 Transformer

***************************************************************************



NOTE: Use the following guidelines for specifying

transformers and insulating liquids.

1. On Navy projects use of biodegradable less-


For other projects, biodegradable less-flammable

liquid and mineral oil are permitted. Previously the

use of mineral oil-filled transformers was

recommended wherever possible. Currently,

biodegradable less-flammable transformer liquids that

improve transformer operating characteristics are

available with little, if any premium cost. This

requirement is supported by UFC 3-600-01, "Fire

Protection Engineering for Facilities", identifies

building and equipment separation distances based on

insulating liquid type. Mineral oil is more

restrictive than less-flammable liquid. For example,

a 1500 kVA transformer containing 600 gallons of

less-flammable liquid requires a building separation

distance of 1.5 meters (5 feet) when the construction

is fire-resistant or non-combustible. An equally

sized mineral oil-filled transformer requires 4.6

meters (15 feet) and 7.6 meters (25 feet) of

separation for fire-resistant and non-combustible

construction, respectively. Do not specify silicone-


2. Use IEEE C57.12.00, Table 7, voltage

designations, such as "4160 V - 240/120 V" for

transformers connected phase-phase on the primary

side, or "4160GrdY/2400 V - 240/120 V" for

transformers connected phase-neutral on the primary

side. Coordinate the number of bushing wells (either

two or four depending on phase-to-neutral, or phase-

to-phase systems) with the primary voltage.

3. Tap ratings may vary from those indicated,

especially in lower kVA ratings.

4. Include bracketed option to display transformer

rating on enclosure when directed by Activity. For

NASA projects only, include 3 inch yellow lettering

bracketed options.

***************************************************************************

a. Less-flammable[ bio-based] liquid-insulated[ or oil-insulated], two

winding, 60 hertz, 65 degrees C rise above a 30 degrees C average

ambient, self-cooled type.

[b. Rated [_____] kVA][With characteristics per the following table:

NAME LOCATION kVA Voltage



NAME LOCATION kVA Voltage

[T1] [AMTC Site 1] [50] [240/120]

[T2] [AMTC Site 2] [75] [240/120]

]c. Voltage ratings: [[_____] V - [240/120][480/240] V][see table].

d. Tap changer: externally operated, manual type for changing tap setting

when the transformer is de-energized. Provide four 2.5 percent full

capacity taps, two above and two below rated primary voltage. Indicate

which tap setting is in use, clearly visible when the compartment is

opened.

e. Minimum tested percent impedance at 85 degrees C:

2.50 for units rated 25 kVA and below

2.87 for units rated 37.5 kVA to 100 kVA

4.03 for 167 kVA rated units

f. Comply with the following audible sound level limits:

kVA DECIBELS

(MAX)

10 48

15 48

25 48

37.5 48

50 48

75 51

100 51

167 55

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Use "lifting lugs" on two-compartment and

"recessed stainless steel lifting provisions" on clam

shell type transformers. Delete the "access

handhole" on clam shell type transformers.

***************************************************************************

g. Include:

(1) [Lifting lugs and provisions for jacking under base][Recessed

stainless steel lifting provisions], with base construction

suitable for using rollers or skidding in any direction.



(2) An insulated low-voltage neutral bushing with NEMA spade terminal,

and with removable ground strap.

[(3) Provide transformer top with an access handhole.

][(4) kVA rating conspicuously displayed [using 75 mm (3 inch) high

yellow letters ]on its enclosure.

]2.2.2.1 Specified Transformer Efficiencies

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Transformer losses and efficiency requirements

have been modified into the table included within the

specification and the previous Navy loss tables have

been deleted.

10 CFR 431, Subpart K is a result of the Energy

Policy and Conservation Act (EPACT) of 2005 and is

the "minimum" industry standard for distribution

transformers manufactured on or after January 1,

2016.

***************************************************************************

Provide transformer efficiency calculations utilizing the actual no-load and

load loss values obtained during the routine tests performed on the actual

transformer(s) prepared for this project. Reference no-load losses (NLL) at

20 degrees C. Reference load losses (LL) at 55 degrees C and at 50 percent

of the nameplate load. The transformer is not acceptable if the calculated

transformer efficiency is less than the efficiency indicated in the "KVA /

Efficiency" table below. The table is based on requirements contained

within 10 CFR 431, Subpart K. Submit certification, including supporting

calculations, from the manufacturer indicating conformance.

kVA EFFICIENCY

(percent)

10 98.70

15 98.82

25 98.95

37.5 99.05

50 99.11

75 99.19

100 99.25

167 99.33

2.3 INSULATING LIQUID

***************************************************************************

NOTE: On Navy projects use of biodegradable less-




***************************************************************************

a. Less-flammable[ bio-based] transformer liquids: NFPA 70 and FM APP


degrees C tested per ASTM D92 and a dielectric strength not less than

33 kV tested per ASTM D877/D877M. Provide identification of

transformer as "non-PCB" and "manufacturer's name and type of fluid" on

the nameplate.

Provide a fluid that is a biodegradable,[ bio-based] electrical

insulating, and cooling liquid classified by UL and approved by FM as

"less flammable" with the following properties:

(1) Pour point: ASTM D97, less than -15 degree C.

(2) Aquatic biodegradation: EPA 712-C-98-075, 100 percent.

(3) Trout toxicity: OECD Test 203, zero mortality of EPA 821-R-02-012,

pass.

[b. Mineral oil: ASTM D3487, Type II, tested in accordance with ASTM

D117. Provide identification of transformer as non-PCB and Type II

mineral oil on the nameplate.

]2.4 LIQUID-FILLED TRANSFORMER NAMEPLATES

Provide nameplate information in accordance with IEEE C57.12.00 and as

modified or supplemented by this section.

2.5 CORROSION PROTECTION

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Use stainless steel bases and cabinets for

most applications. In hostile environments, the

additional cost of totally stainless steel tanks and

metering enclosures may be justified. Manufacturer's

standard construction material is acceptable only in

noncoastal and noncorrosive environments. Choose the

second main bracketed option for hostile

environments.

***************************************************************************

[Provide corrosion resistant bases and cabinets of transformers, fabricated

of stainless steel conforming to ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or 304L. Base

includes any part of pad-mounted transformer that is within 75 mm (3 inches)

of concrete pad.

][Provide entire transformer assembly, including tank and radiator, base,

enclosure, and metering enclosure fabricated of stainless steel conforming

to ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or 304L. Form enclosure of stainless steel

sheets. The optional use of aluminum is permitted for the metering

enclosure.

]Paint entire transformer assembly [Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5 green][Munsell

5BG7.0/0.4 sky gray (ANSI 70)][_____], with paint coating system complying

with IEEE C57.12.28 [and IEEE C57.12.29 ]regardless of base, cabinet, and

tank material. The Munsell color notation is specified in ASTM D1535.



2.6 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

Provide warning signs for the enclosures of pad-mounted transformers having

a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts in accordance with NEMA Z535.4 and NEMA

260.

a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be

in accordance with IEEE C57.12.28, such as for pad-mounted

transformers, provide self-adhesive warning labels (decals, Panduit

No. PPSO710D72 or approved equal) on the outside of the high

voltage compartment door(s) with nominal dimensions of 178 by 255

mm (7 by 10 inches) with the legend "WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE" printed

in two lines of nominal 50 mm (2 inch) high letters. Include the

word "WARNING" in white letters on an orange background and the

words "HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters on a white background.

[b. When such equipment is guarded by a fence, mount signs on the

fence. Provide metal signs having nominal dimensions of 355 by 255

mm (14 by 10 inches) with the legend "WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE KEEP

OUT" printed in three lines of nominal 75 mm (3 inch) high white

letters on an orange and black field.

]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include the Arc Flash Warning Label detail on

the drawings. See the technical notes at the

beginning of section to obtain the AutoCAD drawing

file of the label.

***************************************************************************

Provide arc flash warning label for the enclosure of pad-mounted

transformers. Locate this self-adhesive warning label on the outside of the

high voltage compartment side warning of potential electrical arc flash

hazards and appropriate PPE required. Provide label format as indicated.

2.7 GROUNDING AND BONDING

UL 467. Provide grounding and bonding as specified in Section 33 71 02


[2.8 PADLOCKS

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Designer must assure that Section 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE is included and is edited to include

padlocks.

Do not use this paragraph for Navy and Air Force

projects.

***************************************************************************

Provide padlocks for pad-mounted equipment[ and for each fence gate], keyed

[alike][as directed by the Contracting Officer]. Comply with Section 08 71

00 DOOR HARDWARE.

../Word/33%2071%2002.doc

../Word/08%2071%2000.doc

../Word/08%2071%2000.doc

../Word/08%2071%2000.doc



]2.9 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Use the first bracketed paragraph when project


otherwise, the second bracketed paragraph may be

used. Coordinate requirements with Section 03 30

00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE or Section 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. Use Section 03 30 00 for

Navy projects and Section 03 30 00.00 10 for other

projects.

***************************************************************************

[Provide concrete associated with electrical work for other than encasement

of underground ducts rated for 30 MPa (4000 psi) minimum 28-day compressive

strength unless specified otherwise. Conform to the requirements of


CONCRETE].

]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: If concrete requirements are detailed and no

cast-in-place section is to be included in the

project specification, refer to Section 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE or Section 03 30 00.00 10

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE and select such portions as

needed to provide complete requirements in addition

to the requirements below.

***************************************************************************

[Provide concrete associated with electrical work as follows:

a. Composed of fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, portland cement, and

water so proportioned and mixed as to produce a plastic, workable

mixture.

b. Fine aggregate: hard, dense, durable, clean, and uncoated sand.

c. Coarse aggregate: reasonably well graded from 4.75 mm to 25 mm (3/16

inch to 1 inch).

d. Fine and coarse aggregates: free from injurious amounts of dirt,

vegetable matter, soft fragments or other deleterious substances.

e. Water: fresh, clean, and free from salts, alkali, organic matter, and

other impurities.

f. Concrete associated with electrical work for other than encasement of

underground ducts: 30 MPa (4000 psi) minimum 28-day compressive

strength unless specified otherwise.

g. Slump: Less than 100 mm (4 inches). Retempering of concrete will not

be permitted.

h. Exposed, unformed concrete surfaces: smooth, wood float finish.

i. Concrete must be cured for a period of not less than 7 days, and

concrete made with high early strength portland cement must be repaired

../Word/03%2030%2000.00%2010.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.00%2010.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.00%2010.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.00%2010.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.00%2010.doc



by patching honeycombed or otherwise defective areas with cement mortar

as directed by the Contracting Officer.

j. Air entrain concrete exposed to weather using an air-entraining

admixture conforming to ASTM C260/C260M.

k. Air content: between 4 and 6 percent.

]2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

2.10.1 Transformer Test Schedule

The Government reserves the right to witness tests. Provide transformer

test schedule for tests to be performed at the manufacturer's test facility.

Submit required test schedule and location, and notify the Contracting

Officer 30 calendar days before scheduled test date. Notify Contracting

Officer 15 calendar days in advance of changes to scheduled date.

2.10.2 Test Instrument Calibration

a. Provide a calibration program which assures that all applicable test

instruments are maintained within rated accuracy.

b. Accuracy: Traceable to the National Institute of Standards and

Technology.

c. Instrument calibration frequency schedule: less than or equal to 12

months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty equipment.

d. Dated calibration labels: visible on all test equipment.

e. Calibrating standard: higher accuracy than that of the instrument

tested.

f. Keep up-to-date records that indicate dates and test results of

instruments calibrated or tested. For instruments calibrated by the

manufacturer on a routine basis, in lieu of third party calibration,

include the following:

(1) Maintain up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and


(2) Identify the third party/laboratory calibrated instrument to verify

that calibrating standard is met.

2.10.3 Design Tests

IEEE C57.12.00, and IEEE C57.12.90. Section 5.1.2 in IEEE C57.12.80 states

that "design tests are made only on representative apparatus of basically

the same design." Submit design test reports (complete with test data,

explanations, formulas, and results), in the same submittal package as the

catalog data and drawings for[ each of] the specified transformer(s), with

design tests performed prior to the award of this contract.

a. Tests: certified and signed by a registered professional engineer.




test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same coil construction

(such as wire wound primary and sheet wound secondary), the same kVA,

the same cooling type (ONAN), the same temperature rise rating, and the

same insulating liquid as the transformer specified.


impulse dielectric test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same

BIL, the same coil construction (such as wire wound primary and sheet

wound secondary), and a tap changer, if specified. Design lightning

impulse tests includes the primary windings only of that transformer.

(1) IEEE C57.12.90, paragraph 10.3 entitled "Lightning Impulse Test

Procedures," and IEEE C57.98.

(2) State test voltage levels.

(3) Provide photographs of oscilloscope display waveforms or plots of


d. Lifting and moving devices: "Basically the same design" requirement

for the lifting and moving devices test means a test report confirming

that the lifting device being used is capable of handling the weight of

the specified transformer in accordance with IEEE C57.12.25.


pad-mounted transformer with a tank volume within 30 percent of the


f. Short circuit: "Basically the same design" for the short circuit test

means a pad-mounted transformer with the same kVA as the transformer

specified.

2.10.4 Routine and Other Tests

IEEE C57.12.00. Routine and other tests: performed by the manufacturer on[

each of] the actual transformer(s) prepared for this project to ensure that

the design performance is maintained in production. Submit test reports, by

serial number and receive approval before delivery of equipment to the

project site. Required tests include:

a. Polarity.

b. Ratio.

c. No-load losses (NLL) and excitation current.

d. Load losses (LL) and impedance voltage.

e. Dielectric.

(1) Impulse.

(2) Applied voltage.

(3) Induced voltage.



f. Leak.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to requirements specified herein. Provide

new equipment and materials unless indicated or specified otherwise.

3.2 GROUNDING

NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, except provide grounding systems with a resistance to

solid earth ground not exceeding [25][_____] ohms.



ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Connect ground conductors to the upper end of

ground rods by exothermic weld or compression connector. Provide

compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors.

3.2.2 Pad-Mounted Transformer Grounding

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Ensure plans show the secondary neutral

grounding conductor sized in accordance with NFPA 70

and the primary neutral grounding conductor when

required. Ensure the CADD detail used matches how

this paragraph is edited. Transformer is to have a

ground ring and the normal number of ground rods is

either four or two. The one ground rod option should

only be chosen if required by local installation

requirements.

***************************************************************************

Provide a ground ring around the transformer with [1/0][4/0] AWG bare

copper.[ Provide four ground rods in the ground ring, one per corner.][

Provide two ground rods in the ground ring at opposite corners.][ Provide

one ground rod in the ground ring with the ground rod located in the

transformer cabinet.] Install the ground rods at least 3000 mm (10 feet)

apart from each other. Provide separate copper grounding conductors and

connect them to the ground loop as indicated. When work in addition to that

indicated or specified is required to obtain the specified ground

resistance, the provision of the contract covering "Changes" applies.

3.2.3 Connections


compression connector. Install exothermic welds and compression connectors

as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.




../Word/33%2071%2002.doc

../Word/33%2071%2002.doc



Install and connect pad-mounted transformers furnished under this section as


herein.

[3.3.1 Meters and Current Transformers

***************************************************************************

Note: Delete bracketed paragraph for Navy and Air

Force projects, this information is covered in their

associated metering specifications.

***************************************************************************

ANSI C12.1.

]3.4 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING


manufacturer's factory applied coatings, provide manufacturer's recommended


[3.5 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include the following option when pad-mounted

transformer is guarded by a fence.

***************************************************************************

Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible

side, but space the signs a maximum of 9 meters (30 feet) apart.

]3.6 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

***************************************************************************



seismic zone in which the requirement is located.


only if slab is not detailed in drawings. Do not

provide curbs or raised edges around liquid filled

transformers unless specifically approved by

Technical Proponent (link provided in the technical

note at the beginning of this section).

***************************************************************************

Mount transformer on concrete slab as follows:

a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide the slab with dimensions at least

200 mm (8 inches) thick, reinforced with a 152 by 152 mm MW19 by MW19

(6 by 6 inches - W2.9 by W2.9) mesh placed uniformly 100 mm (4 inches)

from the top of the slab.

b. Place slab on a 150 mm (6 inch) thick, well-compacted gravel base.

c. Install slab such that top of concrete slab is approximately 100 mm (4

inches) above the finished grade with gradual slope for drainage.

d. Provide edges above grade with 15 mm (1/2 inch) chamfer.



e. Provide slab of adequate size to project at least 200 mm (8 inches)

beyond the equipment.

Stub up conduits, with bushings, 50 mm (2 inches) into cable wells in the

concrete pad. Coordinate dimensions of cable wells with transformer cable

training areas.

3.6.1 Cast-In-Place Concrete

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Use the first bracketed option when project


otherwise, the second bracketed option may be used.

***************************************************************************

Provide cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with the requirements of

[Section [03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE][03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE

CONCRETE]][ACI 318M(ACI 318)].

[3.6.2 Sealing

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Require sealing of cable wells (windows) in

the concrete pad if rodent intrusion is a problem.

***************************************************************************

When the installation is complete, seal all entries into the equipment

enclosure with an approved sealing method. Provide seals of sufficient

strength and durability to protect all energized live parts of the equipment

from rodents, insects, or other foreign matter.



Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and include


performed in accordance with NETA ATS. Submit reports, including acceptance

criteria and limits for each test in accordance with NETA ATS "Test Values".

3.7.1.1 Pad-Mounted Transformers

a. Visual and mechanical inspection.

(1) Compare equipment nameplate information with specifications and


(2) Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Check for damaged or


(3) Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

(4) Verify the presence of PCB content labeling.

(5) Verify the bushings and transformer interiors are clean.

../Word/03%2030%2000.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.00%2010.doc







(7) Verify correct liquid level in tanks.

(8) Verify that positive pressure is maintained on gas-blanketed

transformers.

(9) Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as recommended by

manufacturer.

(10) Verify correct equipment grounding.

[(11) Verify the presence of transformer surge arresters.

]b. Electrical tests.



(2) Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral


***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include the bracketed option for additional

field electrical tests for NASA projects only.

***************************************************************************

[(3) Perform insulation-resistance tests, winding-to-winding and each

winding-to-ground. Calculate polarization index.

(4) Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions.

(5) Perform insulation power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on all

windings in accordance with test equipment manufacturer's published

data.

(6) Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on each bushing

equipped with a power-factor/capacitance tap. In the absence of a

power-factor/capacitance tap, perform hot-collar tests.

(7) Measure the resistance of each high-voltage winding in each de-

energized tap-changer position. Measure the resistance of each

low-voltage winding in each de-energized tap-changer position, if

applicable.

(8) Remove and test a sample of insulating liquid for the following:

Dielectric breakdown voltage, Acid neutralization number, Specific

gravity, Interfacial tension, Color, Visual Condition, Water in

insulating liquids (Required on 25 kV or higher voltages and on all

silicone-filled units.), and Power factor or dissipation factor.

(9) Perform dissolved-gas analysis (DGA) on a sample of insulating

liquid.



][3.7.1.2 Current Transformers

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete bracketed optional paragraphs for Navy



***************************************************************************



shop drawings.


(3) Verify correct connection.

(4) Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary

circuit wiring.

(5) Verify the unit is clean.





(7) Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections provide

good contact.

(8) Verify correct operation of transformer withdrawal mechanism and


(9) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and

on moving and sliding surfaces.

b. Electrical tests.



(2) Perform insulation-resistance test.

(3) Perform a polarity test.

(4) Perform a ratio-verification test.

][3.7.1.3 Watthour Meter

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete bracketed optional paragraphs for Navy



***************************************************************************





shop drawings.


(3) Verify tightness of electrical connections.


(1) Calibrate watthour meters according to manufacturer's published

data.

(2) Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of meter,

where applicable.

(3) Verify that current transformer secondary circuits are intact.

]3.7.1.4 Grounding System


(1) Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and

specifications.


(1) Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-





less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground

resistance tester in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to

test each ground or group of grounds. Use an instrument equipped

with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to

indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems

under test.

(2) Submit the measured ground resistance of each ground rod and

grounding system, indicating the location of the rod and grounding

system. Include the test method and test setup (i.e., pin

location) used to determine ground resistance and soil conditions

at the time the measurements were made.

[3.7.1.5 Surge Arresters, Medium- and High-Voltage



shop drawings.


(3) Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.

(4) Verify the arresters are clean.







(6) Verify that the ground lead on each device is individually attached

to a ground bus or ground electrode.




(2) Perform an insulation-resistance test on each arrester, phase

terminal-to-ground.

(3) Test grounding connection.


Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, show by demonstration in

service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and

properly performing the intended function. As an exception to requirements

stated elsewhere in the contract, notify the Contracting Officer 5 working

days in advance of the dates and times of checking and testing.



Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 1

***************************************************************************

USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS-26 27 13.10 30 (October 2007)

Change 1 - 11/14

----------------------------------

Preparing Activity: AFCEC



***************************************************************************

SECTION 26 27 13.10 30

ELECTRIC METERS

10/07

***************************************************************************


requirements for the installation of poly-phase

electricity meters suitable for billing, allocation

of costs, and recording of data for energy management

and control applications and is intended to comply

with the metering requirements of EPACT05.











present.




***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Since metering for energy management and costs

allocation varies widely, it is expected that the

designer will make significant adjustments and

additions to this guide specification.



- - Section 26 12 19.10 THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED

TRANSFORMERS

- - Section 26 11 14.00 10 MAIN ELECTRIC SUPPLY

STATION AND SUBSTATION



../Word/26%2012%2019.10.doc

../Word/26%2011%2014.00%2010.doc


Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 2

- - Section 26 22 00.00 10 480-VOLT STATION SERVICE

SWITCHBOARD AND TRANSFORMERS

- - Section 26 23 00 SWITCHBOARDS AND SWITCHGEAR

NOTE: This specification provides guidance for the

facility energy manager or design engineer after

determining what data will be gathered and what

analysis procedures will be used.

***************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

***************************************************************************






title.











***************************************************************************





IEEE 100 (2000; Archived) The Authoritative Dictionary

of IEEE Standards Terms



IEEE C37.90.1 (2013) Standard for Surge Withstand

Capability (SWC) Tests for Relays and Relay

Systems Associated with Electric Power

Apparatus


Transformers

../Word/26%2022%2000.00%2010.doc

../Word/26%2023%2000.doc


Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 3

INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC)

IEC 61000-4-5 (2017) Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) -

Part 4-5: Testing and Measurement Techniques

- Surge Immunity Test

IEC 62053-22 (2003; ED 1.0) Electricity Metering Equipment

(a.c.) - Particular Requirements - Part 22:

Static Meters for Active Energy (Classes 0,2

S and 0,5 S)


ANSI C12.18 (2006; R 2016) Protocol Specification for

ANSI Type 2 Optical Port

ANSI C12.20 (2015) Electricity Meters - 0.1, 0.2, and 0.5

Accuracy Classes

ANSI C62.61 (1993) American National Standard for Gas

Tube Surge Arresters on Wire Line Telephone

Circuits




1.2 DEFINITIONS


used in this specification and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE

100.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Review submittal description (SD) definitions











project.







../Word/01%2033%2000.doc


Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 4















***************************************************************************


submittals not having a "G" designation are for [Contractor Quality Control

approval.] [information only. When used, a designation following the "G"





PROCEDURES:

a. Maintenance manual shall provide:

1. Condensed description of how the equipment operates.

2. Block diagram indicating major assemblies.

3. Troubleshooting information

4. Preventive maintenance.

5. Spare parts information.

b. Provide operation and maintenance manuals required by submittal item "SD-

10 Operation and Maintenance Data."

SD-02 Shop Drawings

SD-03 Product Data

Power Meters; G[, [_____]]

Current Transformers; G[, [_____]]

Potential Transformer; G[, [_____]]

Communications Module; G[, [_____]]

Protocol Modules; G[, [_____]]

Data Recorder; G[, [_____]]

Modem; G[, [_____]]

../Word/01%2033%2029.doc

../Word/01%2033%2029.doc

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc


Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 5

Submittals shall include manufacturer's information for each component,

device, and accessory provided with the meter, protocol module or

communications module.

SD-06 Test Reports



Power Meters; G[, [_____]]

Communications Module; G[, [_____]]

Protocol Modules; G[, [_____]]

Data Recorder; G[, [_____]]

Modem; G[, [_____]]


System Function Verification; G[, [_____]]


1.4.1 Installation Drawings

Drawings shall indicate but not be limited to the following:

a. Elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams with terminals identified of[

kilowatt][ advanced] meter,[ current transformers,][ potential

transformers,][ protocol modules,][ communications modules,][ Ethernet

connections,][ telephone lines]. [For each meter installation, provide a

diagram identified by the building number.]

b. One-line diagram, including meters,[ switch(es),][ current

transformers,][ potential transformers,][ protocol modules,][ communications

modules,][ Ethernet connections,][ telephone outlets,][ and fuses]. [For

each meter installation, provide a diagram identified by the building

number.]




design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial

or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall

include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances

and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial

market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during

the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment

are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer;

however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the

same manufacturer unless stated in this section.


Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 6

1.4.3 Alternative Qualifications




furnished.

1.4.4 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Data


shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.5 WARRANTY

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are

reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render

satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis

during the warranty period of the contract.

1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.6.1 System Requirements

The metering and reading system, consisting of commercial, off-the-shelf

meters, protocol modules, communications modules, and communication

channels, will be used to record the electricity consumption and other

values as described in the sections that follow and as shown on the

drawings.

1.6.2 Selection Criteria

Metering components are part of a system that includes the physical meter,

data recorder function and communications (modem) method. Every building

site identified shall include sufficient metering components to measure the

electrical parameters identified and to store and communicate the values as

required in the following sections. Contractor shall verify that the

metering system installed on any building site is compatible with the

facility-wide communication and meter-reading protocol system.[ Contractor

must connect the metering system to the facility-wide energy and utility

monitoring and control system.]

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER METERS

***************************************************************************

NOTE: This specification is designed for projects

where multiple metering systems will be installed on

the same project. It is expected that different

buildings may have different metering systems

depending on the metering system that can be

installed economically for any specific building and

that meets the needs of the facility analysis and

billing system.


Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 7

Metering features that are unique to a building

should be listed in a schedule either in this

specification or on accompanying drawings.

***************************************************************************

2.1.1 Physical and Common Requirements

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Meters will generally be installed outside the

building in a readily accessible location. In that

case, use the socket-mount design. In the situations

where panel-mounting is required, add the panel-

mounting section.

***************************************************************************

a. Metering system components shall be installed according to the Metering

System Schedule shown[ in this specification][ on the drawings].

[b. Power meter shall be socket-mount design.]

[c. Power meter shall be panel-mounted design. Meters shall be semi-flush,

back-connected, dustproof, draw-out switchboard type. Cases shall have

window removable covers capable of being sealed against tampering.

Meters shall be of a type that can be withdrawn through approved

sliding contacts from fronts of panels or doors without opening

current-transformer secondary circuits, disturbing external circuits,

or requiring disconnection of any meter leads. Necessary test devices

shall be incorporated within each meter and shall provide means for

testing either from an external source of electric power or from

associated instrument transformers or bus voltage.]

d. If existing meter base is usable, the meter base determines meter form

factor. If a new meter is being installed, use meter and base form

factor of 9S.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: If the measured load is less than 220 amps,

use Class 200 meters for direct current reading

without current transformers.

***************************************************************************

[e. Use Class 200 meters for direct current reading without current

transformers.]

f. Meter shall be a Class 20, transformer rated design.

g. Meter shall be rated for use at temperature from -40 [_____] degrees

Centigrade to +70 [_____] degrees Centigrade.

h. Meter shall have NEMA 3R enclosure for surface mounting.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Select if the recorded data will be in a

module inside the meter or external in a data logger.

The preferred method is to install the recording

module inside the meter case. Some retrofit

applications may require an external data logger.


Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 8

***************************************************************************

i. Surge withstand shall conform to IEEE C37.90.1.

j. Meter shall have a standard[ 4] [_____]-year warranty.

k. Meter shall comply with IEC 62053-22 (Part 21: Static Meter for Active

Energy, classes 0.2S and 0.5S), certified by a qualified third party

test laboratory.

2.1.2 Voltage Requirements

a. Meter shall be capable of connection to the service voltage phases and

magnitude being monitored. If the meter is not rated for the service

voltage, provide suitable potential transformers to send an acceptable

voltage to the meter.

b. Meter shall be capable of connection to the service voltage indicated in

the Metering System Schedule:

c. Meter shall accept independent voltage inputs from each phase. Meter

shall be auto-ranging over the full range of input voltages.

d. Voltage input shall be optically isolated to 2500 volts DC from signal

and communications outputs. Components shall meet or exceed IEEE

C37.90.1 (Surge Withstand Capability).

e. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the actual voltage

ratio of each potential transformer. Transformer shall conform to IEEE

C57.13 and the following requirements.

1. Type: Dry type, of two-winding construction.

2. Weather: Outdoor or Indoor rated for the application.

3. Frequency: Nominal 60Hz, 50Hz for those bases that operate on

50Hz.

4. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.3% at 60Hz or 0.3% for those systems

that operate at 50Hz.

2.1.3 Current Requirements

a. Meter shall accept independent current inputs from each phase. Current

transformer shall be installed with a full load rating as shown in the

schedule.

b. Single ratio current transformer shall have an Accuracy Class of [ 0.3][

0.6] [ 1.2] with a maximum error of +/- [ 0.3%][ 0.6%][ 1.2%] at 5.0

amps.

c. Current transformer shall have:

1. Insulation Class: All 600 volt and below current transformers

shall be rated 10 KV BIL. Current transformers for 2400 and 4160

volt service shall be rated 25 KV BIL.


Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 9

2. Frequency: Nominal 60Hz, 50Hz for bases that operate on 50Hz.

3. Burden: Burden class shall be selected for the load.

4. Phase Angle Range: 0 to 60 degrees.

d. Meter shall accept current input from standard instrument transformers

(5A secondary current transformers.)

e. Current inputs shall have a continuous rating in accordance with IEEE

C57.13.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Since loads in building can vary over time,

multi-ratio current transformers allow the

flexibility to change the ratio of the current

transformer to match the load. The accuracy of

current transformer performance decreases when the

actual current is in the lower band of its measuring

range.

***************************************************************************

f. Multi-ratio current transformer where indicated shall have a top range

equal to or greater than the actual load. The Contractor shall be

responsible for determining the actual ratio of each transformer.

Current transformer shall conform to IEEE C57.13.

2.1.4 Electrical Measurements

Power meter shall measure and report the following quantities:

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Select each of the following measuring

capabilities that are required and include the

abbreviation in the Metering System Schedule for each

building. Since power meters have a service life

greater that 10 years, include optional features that

are expected to be used and analyzed over the life of

the meter.

***************************************************************************

a. Kilowatt-hours ("kWh" in Metering Systems Schedule) of consumption.

Cumulative.

b. Kilowatts of demand ("kW" in Metering Systems Schedule). Peak average

over a selectable demand interval between 5 and 60 minutes (typically

15 minutes).

c. Reactive power ("kVAR" in Metering Systems Schedule). Measured over the

same interval as the peak kW reading.

d. Power factor ("PF" in Metering Systems Schedule). Measured over the same

interval as the peak kW reading.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: At locations where time of use (TOU) billing

is required by the electric company, this


Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 10

specification provides that all TOD meters cover the

same periods as defined in the next section.

***************************************************************************

e. Time of use consumption ("TOU" in Metering Systems Schedule). Kilowatt-

hours recorded separately for each period set by programming into the

meter. Time periods shall be capable of being changed without removal

from service. The meter shall internally record and store Time of Use

data.

1. [Four (4)] minimum [_____] TOU Rates (Registers)

2. [Twenty (20)][_____] Year Calendar

3. [Two (2)] minimum [_____] seasons per year

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Interval recording is an important tool for

analyzing energy consumption within a building. For

billing purposes, real-time reporting is not

required. For non EPACT05 meters, the meter can be

read nominally once per month with all recorded

interval data captured at that time. Where real-time

data is needed by an energy management control system

(EMCS) or other system, the systems may have their

own connection to the meter or its own current and

potential transformers.

***************************************************************************

f. Interval recording ("IR" in Metering Systems Schedule). Kilowatt-hours

shall be recorded for each[ 15][_____] minute interval and shall

accumulate for[ 30][_____] days. Memory for recording the interval

readings shall be internal to the meter and ANSI C12.19 compliant.

Meter shall provide time-stamped readings for every measured parameter.

g. Meter readings shall be true RMS.

2.1.5 Meter Accuracy

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Meters used for billing purposes should

generally be held to the same metering accuracies as

established standards by utility companies.

***************************************************************************

Power meter shall provide the following accuracies. Accuracies shall be

measured as percent of reading at standard meter test points.

a. Power meter shall meet ANSI C12.20 for Class 0.2 and IEC 62053-22

accuracy requirements.

2.1.6 An on the Meter Display, Output and Reading Capabilities

Meter shall include the following output signals.

a. The meter will have a face display plate and shall display every

electrical parameter indicated to be recorded. Meters shall not be


Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 11

required to indicate interval data collected in a data logger with a

communications output feature. Peak values, instantaneous and

cumulative values shall be displayed.

[b. Meter shall include optical output port capable of 9600 bps

communication with a hand-held reading device. Optical device shall be

compatible with ANSI C12.18]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The following optional features will usually

be deleted. These features could be used for

connection to an Energy Management and Control

System.

***************************************************************************

[c. Meter shall include output options for analog milliamp signals.]

[d. Meter shall have two channels of analog output, 0-1mA or 4-20mA, for

positive[ and negative] watt/hour readings.]

[e. Meter shall include output option for pulse output. KYZ pulse output

related to kWatts/HR.]

[f. Meter shall have two form C, dry contact relay outputs for alarm or

control.]

2.1.7 Installation Methods

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Pad-mounted transformers have proven to be

very reliable over a long life span. Installing the

meters on the outside of the secondary wiring

compartment has become somewhat a standard

installation for military facilities, resulting in

minimal maintenance. However, meters may be installed

on the sides of buildings or within buildings.

***************************************************************************

a. Transformer mounted (XFMR)

1. Meter base shall be located outside on the secondary side of the

pad-mounted transformer.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Do not use the stand-mounted method unless the

transformer pad is being poured and the

instrumentation conduit can be installed before the

pour. Provide a drawing to show details for mounting

and routing conduit and wires.

***************************************************************************

b. Stand-mounted adjacent to transformer ("STAND" in Metering Systems

Schedule)

1. Meter base shall be mounted on a structural steel pole

approximately 4 feet from the transformer pad. See detail on the

drawings.


Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 12

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Provide a drawing to show details for building

mounting and routing conduit and wires.

***************************************************************************

c. Building mounted ("BLDG" in Metering Systems Schedule)

1. Meter base shall be mounted on the side of the existing building

near the service entrance. See detail on the drawings.

d. Panel mounted. ("PNL" in Metering Systems Schedule)

1. Meter shall be mounted where directed. See detail on the

drawings.

e. Common features.

1. PTs (if required for proper voltage range) and CTs shall be

physically connected to the service entrance cables inside the

service entrance disconnect enclosure.

2.1.8 Disconnecting Switches

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Shorting-type wiring blocks are recommended to

allow connections to be corrected and changed without

the necessity of disconnecting power to the

transformer, resulting in another power outage to the

building being served.

***************************************************************************

a. Disconnecting wiring blocks shall be provided between the current

transformer and the meter. A shorting mechanism shall be built into the

wiring block to allow the current transformer wiring to be changed

without removing power to the transformer. The wiring blocks shall be

located where they are accessible without the necessity of

disconnecting power to the transformer. For multi-ratio current

transformers, provide a shorting block from each tap to the common

lead.

b. Voltage-monitoring circuits shall be equipped with disconnect switches

to isolate the meter base or socket from the voltage source.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: If programming capability is not required,

omit the following section.

***************************************************************************

2.1.9 Meter Programming

a. Power meter shall be programmable by software supplied by the meter

manufacturer.

b. Software shall have a user-friendly, Windows-compatible interface.

c. Software shall operate on [Windows][_____] operating systems.


Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 13

d. Software shall allow the user to configure the meter, troubleshoot

meter, query and display meter parameters and configuration data and

stored values.

e. Meter firmware shall be upgradeable through one of the communications

ports without removing the unit from service.

2.2 COMMUNICATIONS

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Communications features may not be needed.

Data logging of one month of data may be recorded

inside the meter. Recorded data may be read simply by

a handheld instrument, if read daily.

***************************************************************************

2.2.1 Communications Methods

2.2.1.1 Optical Port

The optical port shall communicate with a hand-held reading device according

to the following requirements.

a. Communications standards

1. ANSI C12.18

2. MV90 protocol

3. ANSI C12.20

b. Read operations

1. Current kWh values

2. Demand (kW) values since last reset

3. Last reset value

4. Meter status

[5. Load profile]

c. Write operations

1. Meter setup

2.2.1.2 Serial Port

Provide serial port for connection to modem module where required in this

specification.

[a. On-Board serial port types]

[1. RS232]


Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 14

[2. \[RS485]]

2.2.1.3 Ethernet

For those meters using the Ethernet, logged information shall be sent using

open standard Internet Protocols.

a. On-board Ethernet port support

1. HTTP

2. SMTP

(a) Modbus

b. Distribute stored data by

1. FTP

[2. E-Mail]

[(a) On-board web server]

2.2.2 Communications Protocols and Methods

Communications protocols and methods shall be native to the meter. Provide

communications module(s) as required to accomplish the following.

a. Meter shall include an IR port ("IR" in Metering Systems Schedule) for

communication to external devices such as handheld readers that support

a minimum speed of 9600 baud.

b. [Meter shall include[ one][ RS-232 ("RS232" in Metering Systems

Schedule)] or[ one][ RS-485 ("RS485" in Metering Systems Schedule)]

digital communication port. Each port shall be user configurable with

regard to speed, protocol, address, and other communications

parameters. Ports shall support a minimum communication speed of 9600

baud for the RS232 port.]

[c. Meter shall have a port that can be configured as a[ 10/100 Base-T

Ethernet port ("BaseT" in Metering Systems Schedule)]]

[1. A communication module that converts serial RS232 or RS485 to

Ethernet will be acceptable.]

[d. Auto Answer minimum 1200 baud internal modem ("A56K" in Metering

Systems Schedule). Internal modem shall include automatic data

buffering to provide faster, more reliable communications and the

ability to automatically answer on a connected line.]

[e. Meter shall be equipped with one pulse output channel ("Pulse" in

Metering Systems Schedule) that can be configured for operation as KYZ

pulse output.]

2.2.3 Communications Channels Surge Protection


Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 15

Communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on its

communications channels. Communication interfaces to all field equipment

shall be protected to meet the requirements of IEEE C37.90.1 or the

requirements of IEC 61000-4-5, test level 4, while the equipment is

operating. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. Metallic cables

and conductors which serve as communications channels between buildings

shall have surge protection installed at equipment rated for the application

installed at each end, within( 3 feet) (0.9 meters) of the building cable

entrance. Surge protectors shall meet the requirements of the applicable

extension of ANSI C62 (for example, ANSI C62.61).

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Communication methods, modules and software

can be used for automatic meter reading (AMR). AMR

may not be needed. If automatic meter reading (AMR)

is to be implemented, considerable coordination of

the communications sending, receiving and protocols

will be required.

***************************************************************************

2.3 METER DATA PROTOCOL

Power meters shall have communicating data protocols native or provided in

supplemental modules to communicate with the communications methods that

follow.

2.3.1 Open Protocol

***************************************************************************

NOTE: This section should be modified to be facility

specific.

***************************************************************************

Power meter shall support the following open protocols. Contractor shall

verify that the meter native protocol is consistent with the facility data

recording and communication and data storage system. Contractor shall

provide additional converters and modules as required for a complete

measurement, recording, communicating and data storage system.

a. Meter shall be fully supported by MV-90 software system or existing AMR

software that is MV-90 compatible.

b. For systems that use proprietary software, an alternative, competitive

software system must be available.

Systems capable of using more than one brand of commercially available

meters are expected. In addition, if proprietary meter reading software is

used, meters are to be capable of being read by more than one manufacturer's

software.

2.4 SPARE PARTS

2.4.1 Parts List

Provide spare parts as follows:

a. Power meter - two for each type used.


Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 16

b. Current transformer - three for each type used.

c. Potential transformer - three for each type used.

d. Communications module - one for each type used.

e. Protocol module - one for each type used.

f. Other electronic and power components - one for each type used.

2.5 METERING SYSTEM SCHEDULE

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Each building should be listed on a separate

row. Identify the characteristics for the specific

meter and communications method for each building.

The following completed data is an example only.

Delete existing values.

***************************************************************************

Metering System Schedule is available at


***************************************************************************

NOTE: Provide a drawing to show locations and

details for mounting and routing conduit and wires.

Identify CT ratio and multi-tap ratios if known.

***************************************************************************

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


requirements specified herein. Provide new equipment and materials unless

indicated or specified otherwise.

[3.1.1 Existing Condition Survey

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Remove the following section if existing

condition surveys are not required.

***************************************************************************

The Contractor shall perform a field survey, including inspection of all

existing equipment, resulting clearances, and new equipment locations

intended to be incorporated into the system, and furnish an existing

conditions report to the Government. The report shall identify those items

that are non-workable as defined in the contract documents. The Contractor

shall be held responsible for repairs of modifications necessary to make the

system perform as required.

]3.1.2 Scheduling of Work and Outages

***************************************************************************



Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 17

NOTE: Installation of current transformers and

potential transformers will require that power be

disconnected from the transformer and/or building.

Provide coordination steps for the work and require

Contractor to perform the work after normal hours.

***************************************************************************

The Contract Clauses shall govern regarding permission for power outages,

scheduling of work, coordination with Government personnel, and special

working conditions.

[3.2 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING


manufacturer's factory-applied coatings, provide manufacturer's recommended




3.3.1.1 Meter Assembly


1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specification and approved

shop drawings.


3. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance

using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible

bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method.

4. Verify grounding of metering enclosure.

5. Verify the presence of surge arresters.

6. Verify that the CT ratio and the PT ratio are properly included

in the meter multiplier or the programming of the meter.

b. Electrical tests

[1. Calibrate watthour meters according to manufacturer's published

data.]

2. Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face or meter

where applicable.

3. Prior to system acceptance, the Contractor will demonstrate and

confirm the meter is properly wired and is displaying correct and

accurate electrical information.

3.3.1.2 Current Transformers



Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 18

1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specification and approved

shop drawings.


3. Verify correct connection.

4. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance

using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible

bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method.

5. Verify that required grounding and shorting connections provide

good contact.

b. Electrical tests

1. Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections

with low-resistance ohmmeter, if applicable.

2. Perform insulation-resistance test.

3. Perform a polarity test.

4. Perform a ratio-verification test.

3.3.1.3 Potential Transformers


1. PT's are rigidly mounted.

2. PT's are correct voltage.

3. Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and

secondary circuit.

b. Electrical tests

1. Perform a ratio-verification test.

3.3.2 Follow-Up System Function Verification

Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show by

demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating

condition and properly performing the intended function. As an exception to

requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, the Contracting Officer shall

be given 5 working days' advance notice of the dates and times of checking

and testing.

3.3.3 Training

The Contractor shall conduct a training course for meter configuration,

operation, and maintenance of the system as specified. The training shall be

oriented for all components and systems installed under this contract.

Training manuals shall be delivered for [_____] trainees with two additional

copies delivered for archiving at the project site. The Contractor shall

furnish all audiovisual equipment and all other training materials and


Section 26 27 13.10 30 Page 19

supplies. A training day is defined as eight hours of classroom instruction,

including two 15-minute breaks and excluding lunchtime, Monday through

Friday, during the daytime shift in effect at the training facility. For

guidance in planning the required instruction, the Contractor shall assume

that attendees have a high school education or equivalent, and are familiar

with utility systems. Approval of the planned training schedule shall be

obtained from the Government at least 30 days prior to the training.

a. Training: The course shall be taught at the project site within thirty

days after completion of the installation for a period of one [_____]

day(s). A maximum of [6][_____] personnel will attend the course. The

training shall include:

1. Physical layout of each piece of hardware.

2. Meter configuration, troubleshooting and diagnostics procedures.

3. Repair instructions.

4. Preventive maintenance procedures and schedules.

5. Testing and calibration procedures.



Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 1

***************************************************************************

USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS-26 27 14.00 20 (February 2011)

-----------------------------------

Preparing Activity: NAVFAC New


References are in agreement with UMRL dated October 2017.

***************************************************************************

SECTION 26 27 14.00 20

ELECTRICITY METERING

02/11

***************************************************************************


of, converting to basewide metering systems.

This Navy guide specification covers the requirements

for the installation of electricity meters suitable

for billing, allocation of costs, and recording of

data for energy management and control applications

for Navy projects. This specification is intended to

comply with the metering requirements of EPACT05.

Although a unified metering specification is under

development, some Air Force projects may require use

of Section 26 27 13.10 30 ELECTRIC METERS.








as adding the following lines above the section

number and title at the top of the first page of this

section of the specifications:

"***********************************************

This specification section contains proprietary

products.

***********************************************"





1 and this specification section appropriately.

The following related guide specifications for power

distribution equipment may contain outdated meter

information. Avoid duplication and ensure conflicting

information has been removed from project documents.

../Word/26%2027%2013.10%2030.doc


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 2

These specifications are slated for update in

FY11/FY12.

- Section 26 12 19.10 THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED

TRANSFORMERS

- Section 26 12 21 SINGLE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED

TRANSFORMERS

- Section 26 11 13.00 20 PRIMARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS

- Section 26 11 16 SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS

- Section 26 23 00 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR





Use of electronic communication is encouraged.








appropriate information. Brackets are used in the

text to indicate designer choices or locations where

text must be supplied by the designer.



NOTE: This section utilizes the following sketches,

details, and forms (Graphics), and are available in

metric (SI) and U.S. Customary (IP) system

dimensions. Sketch titles and style numbers are

unchanged for both types. The metric values

indicated are a conversion of the IP system

dimensions.

Do not include this list of sketches, or the

sketches themselves, in project specifications. Use

sketches as details on drawings whenever possible.

SKETCH NUMBER TITLE

E-M101 Form 9S - Typical Wye Configuration With Single-Ratio CT's

and Without PT's

E-M102 Form 9S - Typical Wye Configuration With Dual-Ratio CT's and

Without PT's

../Word/26%2012%2019.10.doc

../Word/26%2012%2021.doc

../Word/26%2011%2013.00%2020.doc

../Word/26%2011%2016.doc

../Word/26%2023%2000.doc

../Word/26%2024%2013.doc





Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 3

SKETCH NUMBER TITLE

E-M103 Form 9S - Typical Wye Configuration With Multi-Ratio CT's and

Without PT's

E-M104 Form 9S - Typical Wye Configuration With 10 Pole Test Switch

E-M105 Form 9S - Typical Delta Configuration Without PT's

E-M106 Form 2S - Typical



E-M110 Form 9S - Typical Wye Configuration With Single-Ratio CT's

and With PT's

E-M111 Form 9S - Typical Wye Configuration With Dual-Ratio CT's and

With PT's

E-M112 Form 9S - Typical Wye Configuration With Multi-Ratio CT's and

With PT's

E-M113 Form 9S - Typical Delta Configuration With PT's

E-M201 Inside Meter Installation - Typical

E-M202 Outside Meter Installation on Wall - Preferred Distance to

Gas Meter

E-M203 Outside Meter Installation on Wall - Acceptable Distance to

Gas Meter

E-M204 Single Phase Self Contained Meters Residential Service: 0-600

Volts, Enclosed Installation

E-M205 Single Phase Self Contained Meters Residential Service: 0-600

Volts, Semi-Flush Installation

E-M206 Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearances: 0-600 Volts

DETAILS TITLE

PADMDE1 Pad-Mounted Transformer Detail




Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 4

DETAILS TITLE




FORMS TITLE

E-S1 Building Meter Installation Sheet Per Building

E-S2 Electricity Meter Installation Schedule - Large Project

E-S3 Electricity Meter Data Schedule - Large Project

E-S4 Sample Contract Data Requirements List (CDRL)- Blank

E-S5 Sample Contract Data Requirements List (CDRL)- Example

The Contract Data Requirements List (CDRL) can also be downloaded at

http://www.dtic.mil/dtic/pdf/customer/STINFOdata/DD14231.pdf.

***************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

***************************************************************************






title.











***************************************************************************

http://www.dtic.mil/dtic/pdf/customer/STINFOdata/DD14231.pdf


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 5






Metering




IEEE C37.90.1 (2013) Standard for Surge Withstand

Capability (SWC) Tests for Relays and Relay

Systems Associated with Electric Power

Apparatus


Transformers


Terms & Definitions




and Systems

INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC)

IEC 60687 (1992) Alternating Current Static Watt-Hour

Meters for Active Energy (Classes 0,2 S and

0,5 S)

IEC 62053-22 (2003; ED 1.0) Electricity Metering Equipment

(a.c.) - Particular Requirements - Part 22:

Static Meters for Active Energy (Classes 0,2

S and 0,5 S)


ANSI C12.18 (2006; R 2016) Protocol Specification for

ANSI Type 2 Optical Port

ANSI C12.20 (2015) Electricity Meters - 0.1, 0.2, and 0.5

Accuracy Classes


Sockets

NEMA C12.19 (2012) Utility Industry End Device Data

Tables



Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 6



1.2 DEFINITIONS


used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in

IEEE Stds Dictionary.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

***************************************************************************












project.





















***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: In this specification, special submittals are

required for Contract Data Requirements List (CDRL).

The CDRL submittals are indicated as bracketed

options.

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc

../Word/01%2033%2029.doc


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 7

When used, include a completed DD Form 1423, Contract

Data Requirements List with the project

specifications. This form is essential to obtain

delivery of all documentation. Each deliverable must

be clearly specified, with both description and

quantity required. A sample CDRL and an editable

blank CDRL are included in the graphics list at the

front of this specification, as Graphics ES-4 and ES-

5.

The acquisition of all technical data, data bases and

computer software items that are identified herein

will be accomplished strictly in accordance with the

Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) and the

Department of Defense Acquisition Regulation

Supplement (DOD FARS).

Those regulations as well as the Services

implementation thereof should also be consulted to

ensure that a delivery of critical items of technical

data is not inadvertently lost. Specifically, the

Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software

Clause, DOD FARS 52.227-7013, and the Data

Requirements Clause, DOD FAR 52.227-7031, as well as

any requisite software licensing agreements will be

made a part of the CONTRACT CLAUSES or SPECIAL

CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS. In addition, the appropriate

DD Form 1423 Contract Data Requirements List (CDRL),

will be filled out for each distinct deliverable data

item and made a part of the contract. Where

necessary, a DD Form 1664, Data Item Description,

will be used to explain and more fully identify the

data items listed on the DD Form 1423. It is to be

noted that all of these clauses and forms are

required to ensure the delivery of the data in

question and that such data is obtained with the

requisite rights to use by the Government.

***************************************************************************


submittals not having a "G" designation are for [Contractor Quality Control

approval.] [information only. When used, a designation following the "G"


Government.]

[Technical data packages consisting of technical data and computer software

(meaning technical data which relates to computer software) which are

specifically identified in this project and which may be defined/required in

other specifications shall be delivered strictly in accordance with the

CONTRACT CLAUSES and in accordance with the Contract Data Requirements List,

DD Form 1423. Data delivered shall be identified by reference to the

particular specification paragraph against which it is furnished. All

submittals not specified as technical data packages are considered 'shop

drawings' under the Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement (FARS) and

shall contain no proprietary information and be delivered with unrestricted

rights.]


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 8

Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in

conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the

following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES[, the

CONTRACT CLAUSES and DD Form 1423]:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Installation Drawings; G[, [_____]]

SD-03 Product Data

Electricity meters; G[, [_____]]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Determine if a Technical Data Package will be

required for electrical meters as described in the

above note. If a Technical Data Package is required,

include the bracketed option below.

***************************************************************************

[The most recent meter product data shall be submitted as a

Technical Data Package and shall be licensed to the project site.

Any software shall be submitted on CD-ROM and [_____] hard copies

of the software user manual shall be submitted for each piece of

software provided.]

Current transformer; G[, [_____]]

Potential transformer; G[, [_____]]

External communications devices; G[, [_____]]

[Configuration Software; G[, [_____]]

The most recent version of the configuration software for each type

(manufacturer and model) shall be submitted as a Technical Data

Package and shall be licensed to the project site. Software shall

be submitted on CD-ROM and [_____] hard copies of the software user

manual shall be submitted for each piece of software provided.

]SD-06 Test Reports

Acceptance checks and tests; G[, [_____]]

System functional verification; G[, [_____]]

Building meter installation sheet, per building; G[, [_____]]

Completed meter installation schedule; G[, [_____]]

Completed meter data schedule; G[, [_____]]

Meter configuration template; G[, [_____]]

Contractor shall fill in the meter configuration template and

submit to the Activity for concurrence.

../Word/01%2033%2029.doc

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 9

Meter configuration report; G[, [_____]]

The meter configuration report shall be submitted as a Technical

Data Package.


Electricity Meters and Accessories, Data Package 5; G[, [_____]]


OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein.


System functional verification; G[, [_____]]


***************************************************************************

NOTE: Select from the identified bracketed options

the information that is to be provided on the

drawings. Delete the items not needed for the

project. Determine if communications information

will be addressed in the drawings for the metering

project or as a separate documentation package. The

level of detail required might vary with the project.

Identify the required electronic drawing format in

the selection below.

***************************************************************************


Drawings shall be provided in hard-copy and [_____] electronic format, and

shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Wiring diagrams with terminals identified of [kilowatt] [advanced]

meter, [current transformers, ] [potential transformers, ][protocol

modules, ][communications interfaces, ][Ethernet connections,

][telephone lines]. [For each typical meter installation, provide a

diagram.]

b. One-line diagram, including meters, [switch(es), ][current

transformers, ][potential transformers, ] [protocol modules,

][communications interfaces, ][Ethernet connections, ][telephone

outlets, ][ and fuses]. [For each typical meter installation, provide

a diagram.]





or industrial use for 1 year prior to bid opening. The 1-year period shall


and of similar size. The product, or an earlier release of the product,

shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements,

../Word/01%2078%2023.doc


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 10

manufacturers catalogs, or brochures during the prior 1-year period. Where

two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items

shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of

the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in

this section.

1.4.3 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Data

Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site


1.5 MAINTENANCE


In addition to requirements of Data Package 5, include the following on the

actual electricity meters and accessories provided:

a. A condensed description of how the system operates

b. Block diagram indicating major assemblies

c. Troubleshooting information

d. Preventive maintenance

e. Prices for spare parts and supply list

1.6 WARRANTY

The equipment items and software shall be supported by service organizations

which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to

render satisfactory service to the equipment and software on a regular and

emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.


1.7.1 System Requirements

Electricity metering, consisting of meters and associated equipment, will be

used to record the electricity consumption and other values as described in

the requirements that follow and as shown on the drawings. Communication

system requirements are contained in a separate specification section as

identified in paragraph entitled "Communications Interfaces".

1.7.2 Selection Criteria

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Select a bracketed option below if it is

intended that the new meter system be compatible with

the existing system components.

***************************************************************************

Metering components and software are part of a system that includes the

physical meter, data recorder function and communications method. Every


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 11

building site identified shall include sufficient metering components to

measure the electrical parameters identified and to store and communicate

the values as required.

[Contractor shall verify that the electricity meter installed on any

building site is compatible with the base-wide metering system with respect

to the types of meters selected and the method used to program the meters

for initial use. Software and meter programming tools are necessary to set

up the meters described by this specification. New software tools different

from the meter programming methods currently used by base personnel will

require separate approval for use.]

[Contractor shall verify that the metering system installed on any building

site is compatible with the facility-wide or base-wide communication and

meter reading protocol system.]

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRICITY METERS AND ACCESSORIES

***************************************************************************

NOTE: When an activity has a metering system

installed, provide meters to match. Coordinate with

the project manager and include proprietary

specification information.

Metering features that are unique to a building

should be listed in a schedule either in this

specification or on accompanying drawings. See

Graphic ES-2 for a sample "Metering System Schedule".

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

ACTIVITY CURRENT AMI

CONTRACTOR

EXISTING

METER

TYPE

COMM

METHOD

COMMENTS

Naval Base

Ventura

County

Square D ION 8600 Note 1 Ion Enterprise Data

Acquisition System (DAS)

Software

NAVFAC SW American

Systems

ION 8600 Note 2 WinPM

NAVFAC SE Square D ION 8600 Note 1 Ion Enterprise DAS

Software

NAVFAC NW Square D ION 8600 Note 3 Ion Enterprise DAS

Software


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 12

ACTIVITY CURRENT AMI

CONTRACTOR

EXISTING

METER

TYPE

COMM

METHOD

COMMENTS

Naval

District

Washington

Weston NEXUS

1272

Note 1 Energy ICT, EI Server

Software

NAVFAC HI TBD Abandoning TWACS; system

will include Hickam AFB

with existing Square D

system; Pacific Missile

Test Range is also

Square D with all fiber

NAVFAC LANT TWACS LANT in process to get a

new metering system for

selected meters. TWACS

system to remain for

remaining meters with

appropriate interface.

Note 1: Combination radio mesh with fiber optic links.

Note 2: Radio mesh. WinPM, similar to Ion enterprise with a wrap

interface.

Note 3: Combination radio mesh with fiber optic links. Includes

some existing copper infrastructure.

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: One example of a specification paragraph is

provided below for the case in which the meter is

programmed using government-owned equipment. If this

type of paragraph is used, develop wording applicable

to the specific project.

***************************************************************************

[Provide meter(s) and connect the meter(s) to the existing AMI DAS. The

contractor shall use the existing government laptop computers to configure

the meter using existing software loaded on the computer. The contractor

will not be allowed to modify any software or add any additional software to

the computer. Alternatively, the government will configure the meter(s),

which must be compatible with the existing system, using existing software.

Contract shall insure that the meter(s) will transmit the specified data to


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 13

the DAS. The current meters being used by [_____] are: [ION 8600A meters

with X MB of memory] [_____].]

2.1.1 Physical and Common Requirements

***************************************************************************

NOTE: This specification is designed for projects

where multiple metering systems will be installed as

part of the same project. It is expected that

different buildings may have different metering

systems depending on the metering system that can be

installed economically for any specific building and

that meets the needs of the facility analysis and

billing system.

This specification has been developed for 60-Hz

applications. Designer must review and provide

additional modifications necessary for 50-Hz use.

Sub-metering (versus single-metering at a facility)

is not specifically addressed and the specification

will require modification to address unique sub-

metering requirements.

If the "Two-Way Automatic Communications System

(TWACS)" is used for communications, this system has

additional wire size and fuse requirements. The use

of TWACS might limit the maximum voltage provided at

each meter. Edit this specification to address these

unique needs.

Class 320 meters are not allowed by this

specification.

Define the configuration that is required to be

initially programmed into each meter. If possible,

define a standard programming profile and identify

any exceptions to that profile.

***************************************************************************

a. Provide metering system components in accordance with the Metering

System Schedule shown [in this specification][on the drawings].

Provide Meter configuration template.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The bracketed option below allows the

selection of whether to use or replace existing meter

bases.

Meter bases should be inspected if they are to be re-

used. The second bracketed option requires an

assessment of their physical condition before use.

For existing panelboard, switchboard, and switchgear

installations, provide the same style meter. A

direct replacement with a similar configuration can


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 14

minimize the need for a design change and avoid

clearance issues inside the enclosure.

The designer must have concurrence from the Activity

and should exercise caution if changing an existing

installation to a socket arrangement using a Form 9S

adaptor kit. This can reduce the number of unique

meters styles to maintain for spares, but can also

cost more during the initial installation and can

result in inadequate clearances within the equipment

and the exterior.

***************************************************************************

b. [Replace all existing meter bases. For socket arrangements, use meter

and base form of 9S unless installation-specific limitations require

the use of a different form type. For panelboards, switchboards, and

switchgear, match the existing installation with the new meter base.]

[Existing meter bases can be re-used if they are electrically

functional, in physically good condition, and show no signs of

corrosion on the electrical contacts. If the existing meter base is

usable, the meter base determines meter form factor. If a new meter is

being installed, use meter and base form factor of 9S unless

installation-specific limitations require the use of a different form

type.] [If use of a socket adaptor arrangement has been approved by

the activity, contractor shall verify that all clearances are met and

doors are able to be properly closed.]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Select the bracketed option below if the meter

will be installed in an enclosure. A stainless steel

enclosure might be necessary for coastal or high

humidity areas.

***************************************************************************

c. [Meter shall have NEMA [3R] [3R stainless steel] enclosure for surface

mounting with bottom or rear penetrations.]

d. Surge withstand capability shall conform to IEEE C37.90.1.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Modify the color scheme below if the activity

uses a different identification system. This color

scheme is for metering wiring only and does not match

the color coding requirements for power conductors.

Wire labeling is also an acceptable approach to

identification. If wire labeling is selected, modify

the color scheme listed below to identify the label

information for each wire.

***************************************************************************

e. Use #12 SIS (XHHW, or equivalent) wiring with ring lugs for all meter

connections. Color code and mark the conductors [as follows:

(1) Red - Phase A CT - C1

(2) Orange - Phase B CT - C2

(3) Brown - Phase C CT - C3


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 15

(4) Gray with white stripe - neutral current return - C0

(5) Black - Phase A voltage - V1

(6) Yellow - Phase B voltage - V2

(7) Blue - Phase C voltage - V3

(8) White - Neutral voltage]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The electricity meters covered by this section

are intended for low voltage applications and should

be capable of receiving input nominal voltages of 120

to 480 volts. This section assumes that the

available low voltage will be used as the meter

supply. Potential transformers are not required.

If new medium voltage applications are planned, then

include potential transformer requirements as part of

the associated switchgear specification. If this

section is applied to an existing installation, then

use the bracketed options below to establish the

potential transformer requirements.

***************************************************************************

2.1.2 Potential Transformer Requirements

a. Meter shall be capable of connection to the service voltage phases and

magnitude being monitored. If the meter is not rated for the service

voltage, provide suitable potential transformers to send an acceptable

voltage to the meter.

b. Voltage input shall be optically isolated to 2500 volts DC from signal

and communications outputs. Components shall meet or exceed IEEE

C37.90.1.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Fusing is required to provide circuit

protection and to minimize arc flash levels. Include

bracketed option if pull-out type arrangement is

required.

***************************************************************************

c. Provide [a pull-out type fuse block containing] one fuse per phase,

Class RK type, to protect the voltage input to the meter. Size fuses

as recommended by the meter manufacturer. Fusing shall either be

inside the secondary compartment of the transformer or inside the same

enclosure as the CT shorting device.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Select the following bracketed option if

potential transformers will be used to transform 480

volt inputs to 120 volts.

***************************************************************************

[d. Potential transformers will be used to convert 480 volt inputs to 120

volts for the locations shown on the metering schedule. Potential

transformers shall be rated indoor or outdoor, as required for the

specific application. Voltage rating shall provide 120 volts, wye-

connected, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz, insulation class, 600 volts.


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 16

Potential transformers BIL shall be 10 kV and shall have an accuracy

class of 0.3 at burdens w, x, and y. Thermal rating shall be 500 VA.]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The following paragraphs are necessary only

for medium voltage applications.

***************************************************************************

[e. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the actual voltage

ratio of each potential transformer for medium voltage applications.

Transformer shall conform to IEEE C57.13 and the following

requirements.

(1) Type: Dry type, of two-winding construction.

(2) Weather: Outdoor or indoor rated for the application.

(3) Frequency: Nominal 60 Hz.

(4) Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.3 percent at 60 Hz.

f. Potential transformers installed inside switchgear and panels shall be

rated for interior use. Voltage rating shall provide 120 volts, wye-

connected, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz, insulation class, 600 volts.

Potential transformers BIL shall be a minimum of 10 kV, and have an

insulation class and BIL rating that equals or exceeds the ratings of

the associated switchgear. Potential transformers shall have an

accuracy class of 0.3 at burdens w, x, and y. Thermal rating shall be

500 VA. Potential transformers shall be accessed from the front and

mounted in a metering section.]

2.1.3 Current Transformer Requirements

a. Current transformer shall be installed with a rating as shown in the

schedule.

b. Current transformers shall have an Accuracy Class of 0.3 (with a

maximum error of plus/minus 0.3 percent at 5.0 amperes) when operating

within the specified rating factor.

c. Current transformers shall be solid-core, bracket-mounted for new

installations using ring-tongue lugs for electrical connections.

Current transformers shall be accessible and the associated wiring

shall be installed in an organized and neat workmanship arrangement.

Current transformers that are retrofitted onto existing switchgear

busbar can be a busbar split-core design.

d. Current transformers shall have:

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include the bracketed option below only if

medium voltage current transformers are used for the

electricity metering covered by this specification.

***************************************************************************


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 17

(1) Insulation Class: All 600 volt and below current transformers

shall be rated 10 KV BIL. [Current transformers for 2400 and 4160

volt service shall be rated 25 KV BIL.]

(2) Frequency: Nominal 60 Hz.

(3) Burden: Burden class shall be selected for the load.

(4) Phase Angle Range: 0 to 60 degrees.

e. Meter shall accept current input from standard instrument transformers

(5A secondary current transformers).

f. Current inputs shall have a continuous rating in accordance with IEEE

C57.13.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Single-ratio current transformers (CTs) are

specified below and are based on a per-meter

application. Dual-ratio or multi-ratio CTs are only

allowed if future requirements are expected to change

the load demand.

This specification will require additional editing if

dual-ratio or multi-ratio CTs are used.

***************************************************************************

g. Provide one single-ratio current transformer for each phase per power


***************************************************************************

NOTE: This specification uses the CT rating factor

and requires 55 degrees C as the basis for selection.

Many CTs are installed outdoors; relying on the CT 30

degrees C rating is not appropriate for these

installations.

Select the appropriate CT ratio, continuous-thermal-

current rating factor (RF) at 55 degrees C (versus 30

degrees C which was used for previous guidance) and

ANSI Metering Accuracy Class values based on

transformer kVA size and secondary voltage. The

basis for the 55 degrees C value is to allow for CT

heating effects and higher ambient temperatures

during operation.

The rating factor establishes the minimum electrical

current range that will meet the CT accuracy rating.

The CT should meet its accuracy requirement for

measured current between 10 percent of the CT ratio

and the rating factor multiplier applied to the CT

ratio.

Example #1: for a 500 kVA transformer at 208 volts -

select 1200/5, 1.33, 0.3 - B-0.5. For this selection,

the CT should be accurate within its specifications

for an input current between 10 percent to 133


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 18

percent of the rating, or 120 to 1,600 amperes. The

transformer full-load current rating is 1,388

amperes.

Example #2: for a 150 kVA transformer at 480 volts -

select 200/5, 2.0, 0.3 - B-0.1. For this selection,

the CT should be accurate within its specifications

for an input current between 10 percent to 200

percent of the rating, or 20 to 400 amperes. The

transformer full-load current rating is 180 amperes.

The table below lists the minimum allowed rating

factor. Some manufacturers might be capable of higher

rating factors.

VOLTS

208 240


75 200/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.1 200/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.1

112.5 200/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.2 300/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.2

150 300/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.2 400/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.2

225 400/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.2 600/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.5

300 500/5 1.5 0.3 thru B-0.5 1200/5 1.5 0.3 thru B-0.5

500 1200/5 1.33 0.3 thru B-0.5 2000/5 1.33 0.3 thru B-0.9

750 2000/5 1.0 0.3 thru B-0.9 3000/5 1.0 0.3 thru B-1.8

VOLTS

480 600

kVA CT Ratio RF 55

C

Meter Class CT Ratio RF 55

C

Meter Class

75 100/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.1 100/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.1

112.5 200/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.1 100/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.1


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 19

VOLTS

480 600

kVA CT Ratio RF 55

C

Meter Class CT Ratio RF 55

C

Meter Class

150 200/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.1 200/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.1

225 200/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.1 200/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.1

300 300/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.2 300/5 2.0 0.3 thru B-0.2

500 600/5 1.5 0.3 thru B-0.5 600/5 1.5 0.3 thru B-0.5

750 800/5 1.33 0.3 thru B-0.5 800/5 1.33 0.3 thru B-0.5

1000 1200/5 1.33 0.3 thru B-0.5 1200/5 1.33 0.3 thru B-0.5

1500 1500/5 1.33 0.3 thru B-0.9 1500/5 1.33 0.3 thru B-0.9

2000 2000/5 1.0 0.3 thru B-0.9 2000/5 1.0 0.3 thru B-0.9

2500 3000/5 1.0 0.3 thru B-1.8 3000/5 1.0 0.3 thru B-1.8

NOTE: 2. Incorporate the appropriate values in a

table similar to the one shown below.

***************************************************************************

Single-Ratio Current Transformer Characteristics

kVA Sec. Volt CT Ratio RF Meter Acc. Class

[500] [208Y/120] [1200/5] [1.33] [0.3 thru B0.05]

[750] [480Y/277] [800/5] [1.33] [0.3 thru B0.05]

2.1.4 Meter Requirements

***************************************************************************

NOTE: If J&A documentation has been obtained, use

the first bracketed option below and fill in the

manufacturer and complete model number that defines

the intended meter characteristics. Otherwise select

the second bracketed option below and edit the

general list of meter characteristics.

***************************************************************************

[Notwithstanding any other provision of this contract, meters shall be

[_____]; no other product will be acceptable.]


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 20

[Electricity meters shall include the following features:

a. Meter shall comply with ANSI C12.1, NEMA C12.19, and ANSI C12.20.

b. Meter sockets shall comply with ANSI C12.7.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Select the following bracketed industry

standards if applicable for an OCONUS application.

***************************************************************************

[c. Meter shall comply with IEC 62053-22, certified by a qualified third

party test laboratory.

d. Meter shall comply with IEC 60687 certified by a qualified 3rd party

test laboratory.]

e. Provide socket-mounted or panel mounted meters as indicated on the

meter schedule.

[(1) Panel-mounted meters shall be semi-flush, back-connected,

dustproof, draw-out switchboard type. Cases shall have window

removable covers capable of being sealed against tampering. Meters

shall be of a type that can be withdrawn through approved sliding

contacts from fronts of panels or doors without opening current-

transformer secondary circuits, disturbing external circuits, or

requiring disconnection of any meter leads. Necessary test devices

shall be incorporated within each meter and shall provide means for

testing either from an external source of electric power or from

associated instrument transformers or bus voltage.]

[(2) For meter replacement projects, meter shall match the existing

installation.]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The default design is a Class 20, transformer

rated meter. If the measured or expected load is

less than 200 amperes, Class 200 meters can be used

for direct current reading without current

transformers. Specify the location of these meters.

***************************************************************************

f. Meter shall be a Class 20, transformer rated design.

g. [Use Class 200 meters for direct current reading without current

transformers for applications with an expected load less than 200

amperes, where indicated.]

h. Meter shall be rated for use at temperature from minus 40 [_____]

degrees Centigrade to plus 70 [_____] degrees Centigrade.

i. The meters shall have an electronic demand recording register and shall

be secondary reading as indicated. The register shall be used to

indicate maximum kilowatt demand as well as cumulative or continuously

cumulative demand. Demand shall be measured on a block-interval basis

and shall be capable of a 5 to 60 minute interval and initially set to


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 21

a 15-minute interval. It shall have provisions to be programmed to

calculate demand on a rolling interval basis. Meter readings shall be

true RMS.

j. The meter electronic register shall be of modular design with non-

volatile data storage. Downloading meter stored data shall be capable

via an optical port. Recording capability of data storage with a

minimum capability of 89 days of 15 minute, 2 channel interval data.

The meter shall be capable of providing at least 2 KYZ pulse outputs

(dry contacts). Default initial configuration (unless identified

otherwise by base personnel) shall be:

(1) First channel - kWh

(2) Second channel - kVARh

(3) KYZ output #1 - kWh

(4) KYZ output #2 - kVARh

k. All meters shall have identical features available in accordance with

this specification. The meter schedule identifies which features shall

be activated at each meter location.

l. Enable switches for Time of Use (TOU), pulse and load profile

measurement module at the factory.

m. Meter shall have an optical port on front of meter capable of speeds

from 9600 to a minimum of 19.2k baud, and shall be initially set at

9600 baud. Optical device shall be compatible with ANSI C12.18.

n. Meters shall be 120-480 volts auto ranging.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include the bracketed option below only if

potential transformers are used.

***************************************************************************

o. Provide blank tag fixed to the meter faceplate for the addition of the

meter multiplier, which will be the product of the current transformer

[and potential transformer] ratio and will be filled in by base

personnel on the job site. The meter's nameplate shall include:

(1) Meter ID number.

(2) Rated voltage.

(3) Current class.

(4) Metering form.

(5) Test amperes.

(6) Frequency.

(7) Catalog number.

(8) Manufacturing date.

p. On switchboard style installations, provide switchboard case with

disconnect means for meter removal incorporating short-circuiting of

current transformer circuits.

q. Meter covers shall be polycarbonate resins with an optical port and

reset. Backup battery shall be easily accessible for change-out after

removing the meter cover.


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 22

r. The normal billing data scroll shall be fully programmable. Data

scroll display shall include the following.

(1) Number of demand resets.

(2) End-of-interval indication.

(3) Maximum demand.

(4) New maximum demand indication.

(5) Cumulative or continuously cumulative.

(6) Time remaining in interval.

(7) Kilowatt hours.

s. The register shall incorporate a built-in test mode that allows it to

be tested without the loss of any data or parameters. The following

quantities shall be available for display in the test mode:

(1) Present interval's accumulating demand.

(2) Maximum demand.

(3) Number of impulses being received by the register.

t. Pulse module simple I/O board with programmable ratio selection.

u. Meters shall be programmed after installation via an optical port.

Optical display shall show TOU data, peak kWh, semi-peak kWh, off peak

kWh, and phase angles.

v. Self-monitoring to provide for:

(1) Unprogrammed register.

(2) RAM checksum error.

(3) ROM checksum error.

(4) Hardware failure.

(5) Memory failure.

(6) EPROM error.

(7) Battery status (fault, condition, or time in service).

w. Liquid crystal alphanumeric displays, 9 digits, blinking squares

confirm register operation. 6 Large digits for data and smaller digits

for display identifier.

x. Display operations, programmable sequence with display identifiers.

Display identifiers shall be selectable for each item. Continually

sequence with time selectable for each item.

y. The meters shall support three modes of registers: Normal Mode,

Alternate Mode, and Test Mode. The meter also shall support a

"Toolbox" or "Service Information" (accessible in the field) through an

optocom port to a separate computer using the supplied software to

allow access to instantaneous service information such as voltage,

current, power factor, load demand, and the phase angle for individual

phases.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Determine the desired warranty period and

update the bracketed option below.

***************************************************************************

z. Meter shall have a standard [4] [_____]-year warranty.]


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 23

2.1.5 Disconnect Method

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The standard design shall include a 10-pole

safety disconnect. This permits meter removal

without service interruption and includes shorting

type wiring blocks so that CTs are not inadvertently

open circuited.

The options for the disconnecting wiring blocks

requires approval by the authority having

jurisdiction and would only be used when installing a

meter system using individual components rather than

an integrated switch.

***************************************************************************

a. Provide a 10-pole safety disconnect complete with isolation devices for

the voltage and current transformer inputs, including a shorting means

for the current transformers.

[b. Disconnecting wiring blocks shall be provided between the current

transformer and the meter. A shorting mechanism shall be built into

the wiring block to allow the current transformer wiring to be changed

without removing power to the transformer. The wiring blocks shall be

located where they are accessible without the necessity of

disconnecting power to the transformer.

c. Voltage monitoring circuits shall be equipped with disconnect switches

to isolate the meter base or socket from the voltage source. [Provide

fuse protection in accordance with paragraph entitled "Voltage

Requirements"]]

2.1.6 Installation Methods

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Pad-mounted transformers have proven to be

very reliable over a long life span. Installing one

meter on the outside of the secondary wiring

compartment has become the standard installation for

military facilities resulting in minimal maintenance.

However, to prevent additional compromise of the

transformer enclosure integrity, if more than one

meter is required for a location or service, add a

separate free-standing unistrut frame with each meter

in its own enclosure or use commercial meter

pedestals for each meter.

Meters may be installed on the sides of buildings.

Installing meters inside of a building and behind

locked doors has proven to be a burden for meter

readers in some instances and is not recommended.

***************************************************************************

a. Transformer Mounted ("XFMR" in Metering Systems Schedule). Meter base

shall be located outside on the secondary side of the pad-mounted

transformer.


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 24

b. Stand Mounted Adjacent to Transformer ("STAND" in Metering Systems

Schedule). Meter base shall be mounted on a structural steel pole

approximately 1.2 meters (4 feet) from the transformer pad. This can

be used for multiple meters associated with a single transformers.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Provide a drawing to show details for building

mounting and routing conduit and wires. Typical

detail drawings are referenced at the beginning of

this specification.

***************************************************************************

c. Building Mounted ("BLDG" in Metering Systems Schedule). Meter base

shall be mounted on the side of the existing building near the service

entrance.

d. Panel Mounted. ("PNL" in Metering Systems Schedule). Meter shall be

mounted where directed.

e. Commercial meter pedestal ("PED" in Metering Systems Schedule).

2.2 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The default metering condition is to provide

two-way communication with an existing DAS, if

installed at the Activity already. If a DAS is not

installed or is outdated (inadequate), then

coordinate with the activity to determine if a new

DAS should be provided as part of the contract. If a

new DAS is determined to be necessary, edit the

requirements below as needed to identify the DAS

requirements.

The communications requirements must be determined

for each location and are not addressed by this

specification. Possible communications options

include:

RS-232

RS-485

Optical port

Ethernet (RJ-45)

Fiber-optic ST connection

RF (Wireless) Module and

Power line carrier

Determine the communications requirements for the

metering system and modify the paragraph below as

necessary to define the selected communication

system.

***************************************************************************

Meter shall have two-way communication with the existing data acquisition

system (DAS). Provide a communications interface utilizing [_____]. [Refer


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 25

to Section [_____] for the communication interface requirements for these

meters.]

Provide interfacing software if a meter is used that is different than the

existing meters at the Activity to ensure compatibility within the metering

system.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Determine the connections requirements for the

AMI network and modify the paragraph below as

necessary to provide equipment for the system. This

could be as simple as providing a fiber optic link to

the closest connection point or could be more

extensive and requires close coordination with the

Activity.

***************************************************************************

Connect to the AMI network utilizing [_____].

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Determine what modifications need to be done

to the existing DoD Information Assurance

Certification and Accreditation Process (DIACAP) to

maintain accreditation. Check with the local Command

Information Officer (CIO) for the latest

requirements.

***************************************************************************

[Provide [_____].]

2.3 SPARE PARTS

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Spare parts are not normally included as part

of the construction contract or on contracts

involving a small number of meters. On large

projects, involving ten or more meters, the following

may be an example of spare parts requirements.

***************************************************************************

[Provide the following spare parts:

a. Power Meter - two for each type used with batteries.

b. Communications interface - one for each type used.]

2.4 METERING SYSTEM SCHEDULE

***************************************************************************

NOTE: A schedule of meters and their associated

requirements are preferentially included on a

separate drawing. As an alternate, the required

tabular information can be provided below. In each

case, identify the characteristics for the specific

meter and communications method for each building.

***************************************************************************


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 26

[_____]

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70 (National

Electrical Code), and to the requirements specified herein. Provide new

equipment and materials unless indicated or specified otherwise.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Remove the following section if existing

condition surveys are not required. If an existing

condition survey is not required as part of the

installation, the metering system schedule should

address any unique requirements for each

installation.

***************************************************************************

[3.1.1 Existing Condition Survey

The Contractor shall perform a field survey, including inspection of all

existing equipment, resulting clearances, and new equipment locations

intended to be incorporated into the system and furnish an existing

conditions report to the Government. The report shall identify those items

that are non-workable as defined in the contract documents. The Contractor

shall be held responsible for repairs and modifications necessary to make

the system perform as required.

3.1.1.1 Existing Meter Sockets

In some cases, the existing meter sockets will have to be replaced to

accommodate the new electrical meters. An existing socket is considered

unacceptable for any of the following conditions:

a. It is a non-ANSI form factor meter socket.

b. It is weathered beyond the point of being safe to reuse.

c. It is installed incorrectly, such as a non-weather resistant enclosure

installed outdoors.

d. It is not the correct form factor for the existing electrical service.

3.1.1.2 Existing Installations

As part of the existing condition survey, the following applies for

installations with existing meters:

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Coordinate with the activity for the desired

re-use or disposition of existing PTs.

***************************************************************************

a. Replace any meters that do not comply with this section.


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 27

b. If CTs are installed, verify that they comply with this section. If

they do not comply, replace them with CTs that comply with this

section. One CT per phase is required for wye-connected systems.

[c. If potential transformers are installed on low-voltage systems, remove

the PTs as part of the installation.]

d. Install disconnect switches as specified in this section.

][3.1.2 Scheduling of Work and Outages

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Installation of current transformers and

potential transformers will require that power be

disconnected from the transformer and building.

Provide coordination steps for the work and require

the Contractor to perform the work after normal

hours. Coordinate with Division 1 Sections.

***************************************************************************

The Contract Clauses shall govern regarding permission for power outages,

scheduling of work, coordination with Government personnel, and special

working conditions.[_____]

]3.1.3 Configuration Software

The standard meter shall include the latest available version of firmware

and software. Meter shall either be programmed at the factory or shall be

programmed in the field. Meters shall have a password that shall be

provided to the contracting officer upon project completion. When field

programming is performed, turn field programming device over to the

Contracting Officer at completion of project. When interfacing software is

used for a meter that is different than the existing meters in use at the

Activity, turn the software over to the Contracting Officer at completion of

the project.


***************************************************************************

NOTE: Apply 100 percent checks for smaller projects.

Use random sampling of acceptance checks and tests

for large projects. If no problems are identified in

the acceptance checks and tests of the random sample,

then the results would be accepted. If problems are

identified in the acceptance checks and tests of the

random sample, then an additional random sample would

be selected for verification.

***************************************************************************

Perform the following acceptance checks and tests on [a random sample of 10

percent of the installed meters as designated by the Contracting Officer]

[all installed meters].



Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 28



performed in accordance with NETA ATS.

a. Meter Assembly

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The following requirements are derived from

NETA ATS and have been modified for this

specification.

***************************************************************************

(1) Visual and mechanical inspection.

(a) Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and


(b) Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Confirm the meter

is firmly seated in the socket, the socket is not abnormally

heated, the display is visible, and the ring and seal on the cover

are intact.

(c) Inspect all electrical connections to ensure they are tight.

For Class 200 services, verify tightness of the service conductor

terminations for high resistance using low-resistance ohmmeter, or

by verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections

by calibrated torque-wrench method.

(d) Record model number, serial number, firmware revision,

software revision, and rated control voltage.

(e) Verify operation of display and indicating devices.

(f) Record password and user log-in for each meter.

(g) Verify grounding of metering enclosure.

(h) Set all required parameters including instrument transformer

ratios, system type, frequency, power demand methods/intervals, and

communications requirements. Verify that the CT ratio and the PT

ratio are properly included in the meter multiplier or the

programming of the meter. Confirm that the multiplier is provided

on the meter face or on the meter.

(i) Provide building meter installation sheet, per building for

each facility. See example Graphic E-S1.

(j) Provide the completed meter installation schedule for the

installation. See example Graphic E-S2

(k) Provide the completed meter data schedule for the installation.

See example Graphic E-S3.

(2) Electrical tests.


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 29

(a) Apply voltage or current as appropriate to each analog input

and verify correct measurement and indication.

(b) Confirm correct operation and setting of each auxiliary

input/output feature including mechanical relay, digital, and

analog.

(c) After initial system energization, confirm measurements and

indications are consistent with loads present.

(d) Make note of, and report, any "Error-Code" or "Caution-Code"

on the meter's display.

(3) Provide meter configuration report.

b. Current Transformers


(a) Compare equipment nameplate data with specification and


(b) Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

(c) Verify correct connection, including polarity.

(d) Inspect all electrical connections to ensure they are tight.

(e) Verify that required grounding and shorting connections provide

good contact.

(2) Electrical Tests.

Verify proper operation by reviewing the meter configuration

report.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include the following inspections and tests if

potential transformers are included within the scope

of the project.

***************************************************************************

[c. Potential Transformers


(a) Verify potential transformers are rigidly mounted.

(b) Verify potential transformers are the correct voltage.

(c) Verify that adequate clearances exist between the primary and

secondary circuit.

(2) Electrical Tests.

(a) Verify by the meter configuration report that the polarity and

phasing are correct.]


Section 26 27 14.00 20 Page 30

3.2.2 System Functional Verification

Verify that the installed meters are working correctly in accordance with

the meter configuration report:

a. The correct meter form is installed.

b. All voltage phases are present.

c. Phase rotation is correct.

d. Phase angles are correct.

e. The new meter accurately measures power magnitude and direction, and

can communicate as required by paragraph entitled "Communications

Interfaces".




***************************************************************************

USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS-26 29 23 (April 2006)

--------------------------

Preparing Activity: NAVFAC Replacing without change

UFGS-16261 (August 2004)



***************************************************************************

SECTION 26 29 23

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS

04/06

***************************************************************************


requirements for variable frequency drive for motors

rated up to 575 volts, for use on electric power

systems of 600 volts or less, 50/60 hertz.











present.




***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Pulse width modulated (PWM) is the predominant

type of variable frequency drive (VFD). Other VFD

types include current source inverter (CSI), voltage

source inverter (VSI), and flux vector drive (FVD).

For a description of each type of VFD, basic

information on the principles of operation of VFD's,

guidance of the proper application of VFD's, and

installation guidelines, refer to Appendix D of MIL-

HDBK-1003/3, which is part of UFC 3-410-02N,

"Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning and

Dehumidifying Systems".

***************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL





1.1 REFERENCES

***************************************************************************






title.











***************************************************************************





IEEE 519 (2014) Recommended Practices and Requirements

for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power

Systems

IEEE C62.41.1 (2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges

Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less)

AC Power Circuits

IEEE C62.41.2 (2002) Recommended Practice on

Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage

(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits


NEMA 250 (2014) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

(1000 Volts Maximum)

NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2015) Standard for Industrial

Control and Systems: General Requirements

NEMA ICS 3.1 (2009; R 2014) Guide for the Application,

Handling, Storage, Installation and

Maintenance of Medium-Voltage AC Contactors,

Controllers and Control Centers

NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2016) Industrial Control and

Systems: Enclosures



NEMA ICS 7 (2014) Adjustable-Speed Drives




U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

MIL-STD-461 (2015; Rev G) Requirements for the Control of

Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics

of Subsystems and Equipment


47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices


UL 489 (2016) UL Standard for Safety Molded-Case

Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and

Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

UL 508C (2002; Reprint Nov 2010) Power Conversion

Equipment


Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, and Section

26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM apply to this section with additions

and modifications specified herein.


1.3.1 Performance Requirements

1.3.1.1 Electromagnetic Interference Suppression

Computing devices, as defined by 47 CFR 15, MIL-STD-461 rules and

regulations, shall be certified to comply with the requirements for class A

computing devices and labeled as set forth in part 15.

1.3.1.2 Electromechanical and Electrical Components

Electrical and electromechanical components of the Variable Frequency Drive

(VFD) shall not cause electromagnetic interference to adjacent electrical

or electromechanical equipment while in operation.

1.3.2 Electrical Requirements

1.3.2.1 Power Line Surge Protection

IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE 519 Control panel shall have surge

protection, included within the panel to protect the unit from damaging

transient voltage surges. Surge arrestor shall be mounted near the incoming

power source and properly wired to all three phases and ground. Fuses shall

not be used for surge protection.

../Word/26%2000%2000.00%2020.doc

../Word/26%2020%2000.doc



1.3.2.2 Sensor and Control Wiring Surge Protection

I/O functions as specified shall be protected against surges induced on

control and sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown. The inputs and

outputs shall be tested in both normal mode and common mode using the

following two waveforms:

a. A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of

1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.

b. An 8 microsecond by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000

volts and a peak current of 500 amperes.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

***************************************************************************












project.





















***************************************************************************



../Word/01%2033%2000.doc

../Word/01%2033%2029.doc








PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Schematic diagrams; G[, [_____]]

Interconnecting diagrams; G[, [_____]]

Installation drawings; G[, [_____]]

Submit drawings for government approval prior to equipment

construction or integration. Modifications to original drawings

made during installation shall be immediately recorded for

inclusion into the as-built drawings.

SD-03 Product Data

Variable frequency drives; G[, [_____]]

Wires and cables

Equipment schedule

Include data indicating compatibility with motors being driven.

SD-06 Test Reports

VFD Test

Performance Verification Tests

Endurance Test

SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

Installation instructions


VFD Factory Test Plan; G[, [_____]]

Factory test results


Variable frequency drives, Data Package 4

Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE DATA. Provide service and maintenance information

including preventive maintenance, assembly, and disassembly

procedures. Include electrical drawings from electrical general

sections. Submit additional information necessary to provide

../Word/01%2033%2029.doc

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc

../Word/01%2078%2023.doc



complete operation, repair, and maintenance information, detailed

to the smallest replaceable unit. Include copies of as-built

submittals. Provide routine preventative maintenance instructions,

and equipment required. Provide instructions on how to modify

program settings, and modify the control program. Provide

instructions on drive adjustment, trouble-shooting, and

configuration. Provide instructions on process tuning and system

calibration.


1.5.1 Schematic Diagrams

Show circuits and device elements for each replaceable module. Schematic

diagrams of printed circuit boards are permitted to group functional

assemblies as devices, provided that sufficient information is provided for

government maintenance personnel to verify proper operation of the

functional assemblies.

1.5.2 Interconnecting Diagrams

Show interconnections between equipment assemblies, and external interfaces,

including power and signal conductors. Include for enclosures and external

devices.


Show floor plan of each site, with V.F.D.'s and motors indicated. Indicate

ventilation requirements, adequate clearances, and cable routes.

1.5.4 Equipment Schedule

Provide schedule of equipment supplied. Schedule shall provide a cross

reference between manufacturer data and identifiers indicated in shop

drawings. Schedule shall include the total quantity of each item of

equipment supplied. For complete assemblies, such as VFD's, provide the

serial numbers of each assembly, and a sub-schedule of components within the

assembly. Provide recommended spare parts listing for each assembly or

component.

1.5.5 Installation instructions

Provide installation instructions issued by the manufacturer of the

equipment, including notes and recommendations, prior to shipment to the

site. Provide operation instructions prior to acceptance testing.

1.5.6 Factory Test Results

Document test results and submit to government within 7 working days after

completion of test.

1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection

from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or

other contaminants.



1.7 WARRANTY

The complete system shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of

one year, or the contracted period of any extended warrantee agreed upon by

the contractor and the Government, after successful completion of the

acceptance test. Any component failing to perform its function as specified

and documented shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor at no

additional cost to the Government. Items repaired or replaced shall be

warranted for an additional period of at least one year from the date that

it becomes functional again, as specified in the FAR CLAUSE 52.246-21.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

1.8.1 Spare Parts

Manufacturers provide spare parts in accordance with recommended spare parts

list.

1.8.2 Maintenance Support

During the warranty period, the Contractor shall provide on-site, on-call

maintenance services by Contractor's personnel on the following basis: The

service shall be on a per-call basis with 36 hour response. Contractor

shall support the maintenance of all hardware and software of the system.

Various personnel of different expertise shall be sent on-site depending on

the nature of the maintenance service required. Costs shall include travel,

local transportation, living expenses, and labor rates of the service

personnel while responding to the service request. The provisions of this

Section are not in lieu of, nor relieve the Contractor of, warranty

responsibilities covered in this specification. Should the result of the

service request be the uncovering of a system defect covered under the

warranty provisions, all costs for the call, including the labor necessary

to identify the defect, shall be borne by the Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD)

Provide frequency drive to control the speed of induction motor(s). The VFD

shall include the following minimum functions, features and ratings.

a. Input circuit breaker per UL 489 with a minimum of 10,000 amps

symmetrical interrupting capacity and door interlocked external

operator.

b. A converter stage per UL 508C shall change fixed voltage, fixed

frequency, ac line power to a fixed dc voltage. The converter shall

utilize a full wave bridge design incorporating diode rectifiers.

Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCR) are not acceptable. The converter

shall be insensitive to three phase rotation of the ac line and shall

not cause displacement power factor of less than .95 lagging under any

speed and load condition.

c. An inverter stage shall change fixed dc voltage to variable frequency,

variable voltage, ac for application to a standard NEMA design B

squirrel cage motor. The inverter shall be switched in a manner to

produce a sine coded pulse width modulated (PWM) output waveform.



***************************************************************************

NOTE: If constant torque required modify to 150

percent of rated full load.

***************************************************************************

d. The VFD shall be capable of supplying 120 percent of rated full load

current for one minute at maximum ambient temperature.

e. The VFD shall be designed to operate from a [_____] volt, plus or minus

10 percent, three phase, 60 Hz supply, and control motors with a

corresponding voltage rating.

f. Acceleration and deceleration time shall be independently adjustable

from one second to 60 seconds.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Modify this paragraph if constant torque

required.

***************************************************************************

g. Adjustable full-time current limiting shall limit the current to a

preset value which shall not exceed 120 percent of the controller rated

current. The current limiting action shall maintain the V/Hz ratio

constant so that variable torque can be maintained. Short time

starting override shall allow starting current to reach 175 percent of

controller rated current to maximum starting torque.

h. The controllers shall be capable of producing an output frequency over

the range of 3 Hz to 60 Hz (20 to one speed range), without low speed

cogging. Over frequency protection shall be included such that a

failure in the controller electronic circuitry shall not cause

frequency to exceed 110 percent of the maximum controller output

frequency selected.

i. Minimum and maximum output frequency shall be adjustable over the

following ranges: 1) Minimum frequency 3 Hz to 50 percent of maximum

selected frequency; 2) Maximum frequency 40 Hz to 60 Hz.

j. The controller efficiency at any speed shall not be less than 96

percent.

k. The controllers shall be capable of being restarted into a motor

coasting in the forward direction without tripping.

l. Protection of power semiconductor components shall be accomplished

without the use of fast acting semiconductor output fuses. Subjecting

the controllers to any of the following conditions shall not result in

component failure or the need for fuse replacement:

1. Short circuit at controller output

2. Ground fault at controller output

3. Open circuit at controller output

4. Input undervoltage



5. Input overvoltage

6. Loss of input phase

7. AC line switching transients

8. Instantaneous overload

9. Sustained overload exceeding 115 percent of controller rated

current

10. Over temperature

11. Phase reversal

m. Solid state motor overload protection shall be included such that

current exceeding an adjustable threshold shall activate a 60 second

timing circuit. Should current remain above the threshold continuously

for the timing period, the controller will automatically shut down.

n. A slip compensation circuit shall be included which will sense changing

motor load conditions and adjust output frequency to provide speed

regulation of NEMA B motors to within plus or minus 0.5 percent of

maximum speed without the necessity of a tachometer generator.

o. The VFD shall be factory set for manual restart after the first

protective circuit trip for malfunction (overcurrent, undervoltage,

overvoltage or overtemperature) or an interruption of power. The VFD

shall be capable of being set for automatic restart after a selected

time delay. If the drive faults again within a specified time period

(adjustable 0-60 seconds), a manual restart will be required.

p. The VFD shall include external fault reset capability. All the

necessary logic to accept an external fault reset contact shall be

included.

q. Provide critical speed lockout circuitry to prevent operating at

frequencies with critical harmonics that cause resonant vibrations. The

VFD shall have a minimum of three user selectable bandwidths.

r. Provide the following operator control and monitoring devices mounted

on the front panel of the VFD:

1. Manual speed potentiometer.

2. Hand-Off-Auto ( HOA ) switch.

3. Power on light.

4. Drive run power light.

5. Local display.

s. Provide properly sized NEMA rated by-pass and isolation contactors to

enable operation of motor in the event of VFD failure. Mechanical and

electrical interlocks shall be installed between the by-pass and



isolation contactors. Provide a selector switch and transfer delay

timer.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

Provide equipment enclosures conforming to NEMA 250, NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 6.

2.3 WIRES AND CABLES

All wires and cables shall conform to NEMA 250, NEMA ICS 7, NFPA 70.

2.4 NAMEPLATES

Nameplates external to NEMA enclosures shall conform with the requirements

of Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.

Nameplates internal to enclosures shall be manufacturer's standard, with the

exception that they must be permanent.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

2.5.1 VFD Factory Test Plan

To ensure quality, each VFD shall be subject to a series of in-plant quality

control inspections before approval for shipment from the manufacturer's

facilities. Provide test plans and test reports.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Per NEMA ICS 3.1, install equipment in accordance with the approved

manufacturer's printed installation drawings, instructions, wiring

diagrams, and as indicated on project drawings and the approved shop

drawings. A field representative of the drive manufacturer shall supervise

the installation of all equipment, and wiring.


Specified products shall be tested as a system for conformance to

specification requirements prior to scheduling the acceptance tests.

Contractor shall conduct performance verification tests in the presence of

Government representative, observing and documenting complete compliance of

the system to the specifications. Contractor shall submit a signed copy of

the test results, certifying proper system operation before scheduling

tests.

3.2.1 VFD Test

A proposed test plan shall be submitted to the contracting officer at least

28 calendar days prior to proposed testing for approval. The tests shall

conform to NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 7, and all manufacturer's safety

regulations. The Government reserves the right to witness all tests and

review any documentation. The contractor shall inform the Government at

least 14 working days prior to the dates of testing. Contractor shall

provide video tapes, if available, of all training provided to the

Government for subsequent use in training new personnel. All training aids,

texts, and expendable support material for a self-sufficient presentation

../Word/26%2000%2000.00%2020.doc



shall be provided, the amount of which to be determined by the contracting

officer.

3.2.2 Performance Verification Tests

"Performance Verification Test" plan shall provide the step by step

procedure required to establish formal verification of the performance of

the VFD. Compliance with the specification requirements shall be verified

by inspections, review of critical data, demonstrations, and tests. The

Government reserves the right to witness all tests, review data, and request

other such additional inspections and repeat tests as necessary to ensure

that the system and provided services conform to the stated requirements.

The contractor shall inform the Government 14 calendar days prior to the

date the test is to be conducted.

3.2.3 Endurance Test

Immediately upon completion of the performance verification test, the

endurance test shall commence. The system shall be operated at varying

rates for not less than 192 consecutive hours, at an average effectiveness

level of .9998, to demonstrate proper functioning of the complete PCS.

Continue the test on a day-to-day basis until performance standard is met.

During the endurance test, the contractor shall not be allowed in the

building. The system shall respond as designed.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

3.3.1 Training

Coordinate training requirements with the Contracting Officer.

3.3.1.1 Instructions to Government Personnel

Provide the services of competent instructors who will give full instruction

to designated personnel in operation, maintenance, calibration,

configuration, and programming of the complete control system. Orient the

training specifically to the system installed. Instructors shall be

thoroughly familiar with the subject matter they are to teach. The

Government personnel designated to attend the training will have a high

school education or equivalent. The number of training days of instruction

furnished shall be as specified. A training day is defined as eight hours

of instruction, including two 15-minute breaks and excluding lunch time;

Monday through Friday. Provide a training manual for each student at each

training phase which describes in detail the material included in each

training program. Provide one additional copy for archiving. Provide

equipment and materials required for classroom training. Provide a list of

additional related courses, and offers, noting any courses recommended.

List each training course individually by name, including duration,

approximate cost per person, and location of course. Unused copies of

training manuals shall be turned over to the Government at the end of last

training session.

3.3.1.2 Operating Personnel Training Program

Provide one 2 2-hour training session at the site at a time and place

mutually agreeable between the Contractor and the Government. Provide

session to train 4 operation personnel in the functional operations of the



system and the procedures that personnel will follow in system operation.

This training shall include:

a. System overview

b. General theory of operation

c. System operation

d. Alarm formats

e. Failure recovery procedures

f. Troubleshooting

3.3.1.3 Engineering/Maintenance Personnel Training

Accomplish the training program as specified. Training shall be conducted

on site at a location designated by the Government. Provide a one one-day

training session to train 4 engineering personnel in the functional

operations of the system. This training shall include:

a. System overview

b. General theory of operation

c. System operation

d. System configuration

e. Alarm formats

f. Failure recovery procedures

g. Troubleshooting and repair

h. Maintenance and calibration

i. System programming and configuration



Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 1

***************************************************************************


----------------------------------


UFGS-26 33 53.00 20 (January 2008)



***************************************************************************

SECTION 26 33 53.00 20

UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

04/08

***************************************************************************


requirements for static UPS to provide continuous ac

power to critical loads and/or to improve the quality

of ac power to critical loads. The covered range of

UPS units is between 10kVA and 750kVA 3-phase systems

only. Single phase systems are not addressed. This

specification covers UPS with electro-chemical

batteries. Electro-mechanical (stored energy) UPS are

not addressed.

Use of electronic communication is encouraged.








appropriate information. Brackets are used in the

text to indicated designer choices or locations where

text must be supplied by the designer.




***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: For Air Force projects only, UPS

specifications, criteria, and purchases shall be

approved by the Power Conditioning and Continuation

Interfacing Equipment (PCCIE) Group Manager at Ogden

Air Logistics Center (OO-ALC/LGHC)

http://www.hill.af.mil/lg2/WebLGH.htm

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: This guide specification is intended to be

used with individual UPS units which contain a single



http://www.hill.af.mil/lg2/WebLGH.htm


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 2

module or multiple modules within the same assembly.

Parallel units are not specifically addressed and

require additional components. There are two types

of parallel systems commonly available. One is a

parallel system that requires a system control panel,

external static bypass switch to control the

individual units and additional output switchgear

with maintenance bypass to connect the output of all

the units; the other is individual units that have

integrated controls and static bypass switches that

communicate with one another and only require the

output switchgear with maintenance bypass to connect

the output of all the parallel units. The designer

should be aware of the differences and select the

system that addresses the design requirements.

Parallel systems require additional paragraphs to

address the additional components (system control

panel with static bypass switch, output switchgear,

etc) and overall system requirements.

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: This guide specification will not be used in

the preparation of project documents for installation

of Government-furnished (GFE) UPS systems. For UPS

and battery installation instructions for GFE

projects refer to "UPS Manufacturer's Installation

Drawings" and "Battery Manufacturer's Rack Assembly

and Battery Installation Instructions" which must be

obtained from the Contracting Officer.

All plans/specifications having uninterruptible power

supply systems, which were procured as Government-

furnished/Contractor installed equipment, must be

reviewed and concurred by the Contracting Officer.

***************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

***************************************************************************






title.








Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 3





***************************************************************************




ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA)

ASA S1.4 (1983; Amendment 1985; R 2006) Specification

for Sound Level Meters (ASA 47)


ASTM B173 (2017) Standard Specification for Rope-Lay-

Stranded Copper Conductors Having Concentric-

Stranded Members, for Electrical Conductors

ASTM D709 (2017) Standard Specification for Laminated

Thermosetting Materials




IEEE 450 (2010) Recommended Practice for Maintenance,

Testing, and Replacement of Vented Lead-Acid

Batteries for Stationary Applications



IEEE C57.110 (2008) Recommended Practice for Establishing

Liquid-Filled and Dry-Type Power and

Distribution Transformer Capability When

Supplying Nonsinusoidal Load Currents



AC Power Circuits







and Systems

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 4

ISO 9001 (2008; Corr 1 2009) Quality Management

Systems- Requirements




NEMA PE 1 (2012) Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS)

Specification and Performance Verification




U.S. DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY (DOE)

Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency

Labeling System (FEMP)


UL 1449 (2014; Reprint Jul 2017) UL Standard for

Safety Surge Protective Devices

UL 1778 (2014; Reprint Aug 2015) Uninterruptible

Power Systems


***************************************************************************




***************************************************************************

Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING applies to this section,


1.3 DEFINITIONS


used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in

IEEE 100.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

***************************************************************************








../Word/26%2008%2000.doc

../Word/26%2008%2000.doc

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 5





project.






System (RMS) are: "RE" for Resident Engineer

approval, "ED for Engineering approval, and "AE" for

Architect-Engineer approval"AE" for Architect-

Engineer; "DO" for District Office (Engineering

Division or other organization in the District

Office); "AO" for Area Office; "RO" for Resident

Office; and "PO" for Project Office. Codes

following the "G" typically are not used for Navy

projects.







Submittal items not designated with a "G" are

considered as being for information only for Army

projects and for Contractor Quality Control approval

for Navy projects.

***************************************************************************








PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

UPS Drawings; G[, [_____]]

UPS Installation; G[, [_____]]

SD-03 Product Data

UPS Module; G[, [_____]]

Submittal shall include manufacturer's information for each

component, device, and accessory provided with the transformer.

../Word/01%2033%2029.doc

../Word/01%2033%2029.doc

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 6

Factory Testing

UPS System

Energy Star label for battery charging systems and AC-DC/AC-AC

power supply products; S

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete submittal for spare parts on Navy

projects.

***************************************************************************

[UPS Spare Parts; G[, [_____]]]

SD-06 Test Reports

Work Plan; G[, [_____]]

Factory Test Plan; G[, [_____]]

Performance Test Plan; G[, [_____]]

Factory Tests; G[, [_____]]

Performance Tests Report; G[, [_____]]

Factory Tests Report; G[, [_____]]


Initial Inspection and Tests; G[, [_____]]

Performance Tests; G[, [_____]]


UPS Operation and Maintenance, Data Package 5; G[, [_____]]

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section

01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein.


Installation

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1.5.1 Normal Operation

The UPS module rectifier/charger shall convert the incoming ac input power

to dc power for the inverter and for float charging the battery. The

inverter shall supply ac power to the critical load continuously. Inverter

output shall be synchronized with the bypass ac power source, provided that

the bypass ac power source is within the specified voltage and frequency

range.

../Word/01%2078%2023.doc


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 7

1.5.2 Emergency Operation (Loss or deviation of AC Input Power)

Whenever the ac input power source deviates from the specified tolerances or

fails completely, the inverter shall draw its power from the battery system

and shall supply AC power to the critical load without any interruption or

switching. The battery shall continue to supply power to the inverter for

the specified protection time or until return of ac input source. At the

same time, an alarm shall sound to alert operating personnel and a trouble

signal shall be sent over the communication network, allowing startup of a

secondary power source or orderly shutdown of the critical load.

1.5.3 Return of AC Input Power Source

When stable ac input power source returns the rectifier/charger shall resume

operation and shall simultaneously supply the inverter with dc power and

recharge the battery. This shall be an automatic function and shall cause

no disturbance to the critical load.

1.5.4 Failure of AC Input Power to Return

Should the ac input power fail to return before the battery voltage reaches

the discharge limit, the UPS system shall disconnect from the critical load

to safeguard the battery.

1.5.5 Transfer to Bypass AC Power Source

When the UPS controller senses an overload or degradation of the inverter

output, the bypass switch shall automatically transfer the critical load

from the inverter output to the bypass ac power source without an

interruption of power. If the bypass ac power source is outside of

specified tolerance limits, the UPS and the critical load shall shut down.

1.5.6 Retransfer to Inverter

The static bypass switch shall be capable of automatically retransferring

the load back to the inverter output after the inverter output has returned

to normal conditions. Retransfer shall only occur if the two sources are

synchronized.

1.5.7 UPS Bypass Maintenance

Manual closure of the maintenance bypass switch shall transfer the critical

load from the inverter output to the bypass ac power source without

disturbing the critical load bus. UPS module shall be capable of manual

return to normal operation after completion of maintenance.

1.5.8 Battery Maintenance

The battery protective device shall provide the means of disconnecting the

battery from the rectifier/charger and inverter for maintenance. The UPS

module shall continue to function and meet the performance criteria

specified except for the battery back-up time function.


The manufacturer shall have a documented quality assurance program

including:


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 8

a. Inspections of incoming parts, modular assemblies and final product.

b. Final test procedure for the product including proof of performance

specifications.

c. On-site test procedure shall include an inspection of controls and

indicators after installation of the equipment.

d. ISO 9001 quality certification.

1.6.1 UPS Drawings

Detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and materials,

manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, battery sizing

calculations per IEEE 485, installation instructions, single-line diagrams,

ladder-type schematic diagrams, elevations, layout drawings, and details

required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will

function properly as a unit.

1.6.2 UPS Installation

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating

proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories,

piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated

installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate

the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection

between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance

for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices.

Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals

shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical

society publication references.

1.6.3 Work Plan

Submit [6][_____] copies of schedules of dates for factory tests,

installation, field tests, and operator training for the UPS system.

Furnish a list of instrumentation equipment for factory and field test

reports.

1.6.4 Factory Test Plan

Submit [6][_____] copies of factory test plans and procedures at least

[21][_____] calendar days prior to the tests being conducted. Provide

detailed description of test procedures, including test equipment and

setups, to be used to ensure the UPS meets the performance specification and

explain the test methods to be used. As a minimum, the test procedures

shall include the test required under the paragraph entitled "Factory

Testing."

1.6.5 Performance Test Plan

Submit [6][_____] copies of test plans and procedures at least [15][_____]

calendar days prior to the start of field tests. Provide detailed

description and dates and times scheduled for performance of tests, and

detailed description of test procedures, including test equipment (list make

and model and provide functional description of the test instruments and


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 9

accessories) and setups of the tests to be conducted to ensure the UPS meets

the performance specification. Explain the test methods to be used. As a

minimum, the test procedures shall include the tests required under the

paragraph entitled "Performance Tests."

1.6.6 Factory Tests Report

Submit [6][_____] copies of factory test report within [45][_____] calendar

days after completion of tests. Receive approval of test prior to shipping

unit. Factory test reports shall be signed by an official authorized to

certify on behalf of the UPS manufacturer of that the system meets specified

requirements in accordance with the requirements set forth in paragraph

entitled "Factory Testing". Test reports in shall be in booklet form

tabulating factory tests and measurements performed, upon completion and

testing of the installed system. Reports shall state the Contractor's name

and address, the name of the project and location, and list the specific

requirements which are being certified.

1.6.7 Performance Tests Report

Submit report of test results as specified by paragraph entitled

"Performance Tests" within [15][_____] calendar days after completion of

tests. Field test reports shall be signed by an official authorized to

certify on behalf of the UPS manufacturer that the system meets specified

requirements in accordance with the requirements set forth in paragraph

entitled "Performance Tests". Test reports in shall be in booklet form

tabulating factory tests and measurements performed, upon completion and

testing of the installed system. Reports shall state the Contractor's name

and address, the name of the project and location, and list the specific

requirements which are being certified.



provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted

for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these


meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,

installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and

advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are

specified or indicated.

1.6.8.1 Reference Standard Compliance

Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and

technical society reference standards of the organizations such as American

National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for Testing and

Materials (ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA),

Underwriters Laboratories (UL), and Association of Edison Illuminating

Companies (AEIC), submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by

the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance.

1.6.8.2 Independent Testing Organization Certificate

In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent

testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the

Contracting Officer. The certificate shall state that the item has been


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 10

tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that

the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard.












same manufacturer unless stated in this section. Equipment shall be

supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the

Contracting Officer, reasonably convenient to the site.





furnished.




1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Equipment placed in storage shall be protected from humidity and temperature

variations, moisture, water intrusion, dirt, dust, or other contaminants.

In harsh environments where temperatures exceed non-operational parameters

established within this specification, the equipment storage facility shall

be environmentally controlled to ensure temperature parameters are within

equipment specification. Documentation of same shall be provided to the

Government when storage is implemented.

1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

***************************************************************************

NOTE: This paragraph with subparagraphs is used by

the Army. Delete for other projects.

***************************************************************************

1.8.1 Environmental Conditions

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Designer must show approximate elevation

above sea level for project location if it exceeds

1,000 meters (3,300 feet). UPS system including

batteries must be derated if 50 degrees C (122

degrees F) operating temperature is required.

***************************************************************************


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 11

The UPS and battery system shall be capable of withstanding any combination

of the following external environmental conditions without mechanical or

electrical damage or degradation of operating characteristics.

a. Operating altitude: Sea level to 1,000 meters (3,300 ft). (Systems

applied at higher altitudes shall be derated in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions).

b. Non-operating altitude: Sea level to 11,000 meters (36,000 ft).

c. Operating ambient temperature range: 0 to 40 degrees C (32 to 104

degrees F). Range for batteries is 10 to 30 degrees C (50 to 86

degrees F).

d. Non-operating and storage ambient temperature range: Minus 20 to plus

50 degrees C (Minus 4 to plus 122 degrees F).

e. Operating relative humidity: 0 to 95 percent, without condensation.

1.8.2 Sound Pressure Levels

***************************************************************************

NOTE: UPS modules rated up to 125 kVA should have a

dB rating of 65 dBA or lower at 1 meter (39 inches).

UPS modules rated above 125 kVA should have a dBA

rating of 75 dB or lower at 1.5 meters (5 feet).

***************************************************************************

Sound pressure levels produced by the UPS, when operating under full rated

load, at a distance of[ 1.5 meters (5 feet)][ 1 meter (39 inches)][_____] in

any direction from the perimeter of the unit, shall not exceed

[75][65][_____] dB as measured on the A scale of a Type 1 sound level meter

at slow response conforming to ASA S1.4.

1.8.3 Verification of Dimensions

The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify

dimensions in the field, and shall advise the Contracting Officer of any

discrepancy before performing the work.

1.9 SPECIAL TOOLS

Provide one set of special tools, calibration devices, and instruments

required for operation, calibration, and maintenance of the equipment.

1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1.10.1 Additions to UPS Operation and Maintenance Manuals

In addition to requirements of Data Package 5, include the followings on the

actual UPS system provided:

a. An outline drawing, front, top, and side views.

b. Prices for spare parts and supply list.


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 12

c. Routine and field acceptance test reports.

d. Date of Purchase.

e. Corrective maintenance procedures.

f. Test measurement levels with specific test points.

[1.10.2 Spare Parts

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Do not provide spare parts for Navy projects.

***************************************************************************

Furnish the following spare parts, of the same material and workmanship,

meeting the same requirements, and interchangeable with the corresponding

original parts.

a. Fuses: Two of each type and rating.

b. Circuit boards: One circuit board for each critical circuit.

c. Air Filters: One set of filters.

]1.11 WARRANTY





PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 UPS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Connect alternate power source to

bypass/maintenance bypass for systems requiring dual

input.

***************************************************************************

The UPS system shall conform to UL 1778 and shall consist of UPS module,

battery system, battery protective device, static bypass transfer switch,

controls and monitoring. Input ac power shall be connected to the normal

source ac input of the UPS module. [Alternate power source shall be

connected to bypass/maintenance bypass. ]The battery shall be connected to

the dc input of the UPS module through the battery protective device. The ac

output of the UPS system shall be connected to the critical loads.

Provide Energy Star labeled battery charging systems and AC-DC/AC-AC power

supplies. Provide proof of Energy Star label for battery charging systems

and AC-DC/AC-AC power supply products.

2.1.1 Semiconductor Fusing


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 13

Power semiconductors shall be fused with fast-acting fuses to prevent

cascaded or sequential semiconductor failures. Indicator lamp or display

panel denoting blown fuse conditions shall be readily observable by the

operator without removing panels or opening cabinet doors.

2.1.2 Control Power

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Most manufacturers do not have input and

output control power source feature as standard. Use

for systems requiring high reliability.

***************************************************************************

Provide dual control power supplies. [Control power shall be derived from

two sources, input and output, with automatic selective control. ] The

control power circuit shall have suitable protection, appropriately marked

and located in the immediate vicinity of the input protective device.

2.1.3 EMI/RFI Protection

The components and the system shall be designed to minimize the emission of

electromagnetic waves that may cause interference with other equipment.

2.1.4 Internal Wiring

Wiring practices, materials, and coding shall be in accordance with the

requirements of NFPA 70, OSHA, and other applicable standards. Wire runs

shall be protected in a manner which separates power and control wiring.

Control wiring shall be minimum No. 16 AWG extra-flexible stranded copper.

Logic-circuit wiring may be smaller. Ribbon cables shall be minimum No. 22

AWG. Control wiring shall have permanently attached wire numbers.

2.1.5 Internal Assembly

The printed circuit board (PCB) subassemblies shall be mounted in pull-out

and/or swing-out trays where feasible. Cable connections to the trays shall

be sufficiently long to allow easy access to all components. Where not

feasible to mount PCB subassemblies in pull-out or swing-out trays, they

shall be firmly mounted inside the enclosure. Every PCB subassembly shall be

monitored. Self-test and diagnostic circuitry shall be included in the

logic circuits such that a fault can be isolated down to the PCB subassembly

level.

2.1.6 Cabinets

UPS system shall be installed in cabinets of heavy-duty structure meeting

the NEMA PE 1 standards for floor mounting. UPS module cabinet shall be

structurally adequate for forklift handling or lifting. Removable lifting

eyes shall be provided on top of each cabinet. UPS module cabinet shall have

hinged and lockable doors on the front only, with assemblies and components

accessible from the front. Doors shall be [key] lockable. Operating

controls shall be located outside the locked doors. Input, output, and

battery cables shall be installed through the top or bottom of the cabinet.

2.1.6.1 Cabinet Finish


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 14

Equipment cabinet shall be cleaned, primed and painted in the manufacturer's

standard colors, in accordance with accepted industry standards. Cabinets

shall be labeled in accordance with NFPA 70 for arc flash hazard with

warning sign reading: "Warning-Potential Arc Flash Hazard. Appropriate PPE

and Tools Required when working on this equipment" or similar wording.

2.1.6.2 Live Parts (300 Volts and Above)

Live parts (300 volts and above) that are exposed when front access doors

are open shall be adequately protected or covered to minimize the chance of

accidental contact.

2.1.6.3 Drawout Assemblies

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Drawout applies to large units for removing

inverter modules, static switches assemblies, etc.

Delete for units smaller than 500 kVA.

***************************************************************************

Drawout assemblies weighing 23 kg (50 lbs)or more shall be provided with a

means of lifting, either an overhead device or a hoisting device.

2.1.7 Safety

UPS shall be equipped with instruction plates including warnings and

cautions, suitably located, and describing any special or important

procedures to be followed in operating and servicing the equipment. The

control panel display shall also provide warning messages prior to

performing a critical function.

2.1.8 UPS System Load Profile

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Refer to UFC 3-520-01, "Interior Electrical

Systems" for additional information.

***************************************************************************

The UPS system shall be compatible with the load characteristics defined in

the LOAD PROFILE below and load configuration. Compensation for UPS/load

interaction problems resulting from nonlinear loads or transformer and motor

inrush shall be provided.

LOAD PROFILE

Type of load: [data processing equipment][main frame][chilled water

pump][_____].

Size of load: [_____][kVA][kW], [_____]horsepower, [_____]voltage,

[[_____]amperage].

Switching pattern: [unswitched][cycled daily][cycled hourly][operated by

thermostat][building management system control][_____].

Transient characteristics: inrush current magnitude of [_____] times steady

state rms current for duration of [_____] cycle; range of power factor


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 15

variation of [_____] to [_____] [lagging][leading]; voltage dip of

[_____] percent.

Steady-state characteristics: [0.8 lagging][0.9 lagging][1.0][_____] power

factor.

Special factors: [harmonic characteristics - Total Harmonic Distortion

[_____] percent][high elevation][nonstandard input and output

voltages][_____].

2.2 UPS SYSTEM RATINGS

Unless stated otherwise, the parameters listed are under full output load at

[0.8][0.9] power factor, with batteries fully charged and floating on the dc

bus and with nominal input voltage.

2.2.1 System Capacity

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Typical capacities in kVA are 10, 15, 20, 30,

40, 50, 80, 100, 125, 150, 225, 250, 300, 500 and

750.

***************************************************************************

[_____] kVA, [_____] kW.

2.2.2 Battery Capacity

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Typical battery discharge times are 5, 10, 12,

15, and 30 minutes. If no emergency source is

available, longer battery discharge time may be

required.

***************************************************************************

Discharge time to end voltage: [15][_____] minutes, at 25 degrees C (77

degrees F). End voltage at full discharge shall be 1.67 volts per cell.

Battery shall be capable of delivering 150 percent of full rated UPS load at

initial start-up.

2.2.3 Static Switch

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The static switch or static disconnect is a

solid-state disconnect device used to apply or

disconnect ac power. The interrupting capacity

requirements must be determined for each project

distribution system. Typical interrupting capacities

are 30,000 AIC and 50,000 AIC. Interrupting

capacities are normally found on the single line

diagram or in the short circuit calculations provided

with the drawings.

***************************************************************************

[_____] amperes symmetrical interrupting capacity.


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 16

2.2.4 Module Bus Bracing

Braced for [_____] amperes symmetrical interrupting capacity.

2.2.5 AC Input

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Total harmonic current distortion (THD) is

usually specified as follows: modules 15-224 kVA: 10

percent; modules above 225 kVA: 5 percent. If UPS

will be supplied from a generator, the generator

capacity must be at least twice the UPS capacity if

THD exceeds 5 percent. Some of the manufacturers can

provide units with the above THD without input

filters while others require optional input filters

to achieve the desired THD. Delete transformer

inrush paragraph if input isolation transformer is

not required. Use 50 Hz for units shipped or

purchased in Europe. Before specifying them, be

certain units having 60 Hz input with 50 Hz output

and units having 50 Hz input with 60 Hz output are

available in the size specified. Be certain that

units having foreign voltages are clearly specified

since they are not standard for U.S. manufactured

products. For transformer sub-cycle inrush,

selecting a lower value like 6 or 4 in lieu of the

range (4 to 8) is better for coordination of UPS

feeder protection but might add some cost and extra

components. If the range is selected than upstream

breaker should have instantaneous current adjustment.

***************************************************************************

a. Voltage [208][240][480][_____] volts line-to-line.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Some of the smaller UPS units usually <100 kVA

are designed for 3 phase, 4 wire configuration only.

***************************************************************************

b. Number of phases: 3-phase, 3 [4]-wire, plus ground.

c. Voltage Range: Plus 10 percent, minus 20 percent, without affecting

battery float voltage or output voltage.

d. Frequency: [50][60] Hz, plus or minus 5 percent.

e. Power walk-in: 20 percent to 100 percent over 10 to 20 seconds.

f. Total harmonic current distortion (THD) reflected into the primary

line: [5][10] percent maximum.

[g. Transformer sub-cycle inrush: [4 to 8][_____] times full load rating.

]h. Input surge protection: per IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2.

i. Input power factor: Lagging from 1-100 percent load.


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 17

2.2.6 AC Output

***************************************************************************

NOTE: If the output voltage is 120/208 V and the

same voltage is not available for the static bypass

and maintenance bypass, a transformer will be

required in the bypass distribution system.

***************************************************************************

a. Voltage [208][240][480][_____] volts line-to-line, [120][277][_____]

volts line-to-neutral.

b. Number of phases: 3-phase, 4-wire, plus ground.

c. Voltage regulation:

(1) Balanced load: Plus or minus 1.0 percent.

(2) 50 percent load imbalance, phase-to-phase: Plus or minus 2 percent.

(3) No-load voltage modulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.

(4) Voltage drift: Plus or minus 1 percent over any 30 day interval (or

length of test) at stated ambient conditions.

d. Voltage adjustment: Plus or minus 5 percent manually.

e. Frequency: [50][60] Hz.

f. Frequency regulation: Plus or minus 0.1 percent.

g. Frequency drift: Plus or minus 0.1 percent over any 24 hour interval

(or length of test) at stated ambient conditions when on internal

oscillator.

h. Harmonic content (RMS voltage): Voltage THD shall be a maximum of 2

percent with 100 percent linear load and 5 percent with 100 percent

nonlinear load and a crest factor of less than 3 to 1.

i. Load power factor operating range: 1.0 to 0.8 lagging.

j. Phase displacement:

(1) Balanced load: Plus or minus 1 degree of bypass input.

(2) 50 percent load imbalance phase-to-phase: Plus or minus 3

degrees of bypass input.

k. Wave-form deviation factor: 5 percent at no load.

l. Overload capability (at full voltage) (excluding battery):

(1) 125 percent load for 10 minutes.

(2) 150 percent load for 60 seconds.


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 18

(3) 300 percent load for one cycle after which it shall be current

limited to 150 percent until fault is cleared or UPS goes to

bypass.

2.2.7 Transient Response

2.2.7.1 Voltage Transients

a. 100 percent load step: Plus or minus 5 percent.

b. Loss or return of ac input: Plus or minus 1 percent.

c. Automatic transfer of load from UPS to bypass: Plus or minus 4

percent.

d. Manual retransfer of load from bypass to UPS: Plus or minus 4

percent.

e. Response time: Recovery to 99 percent steady-state condition within 20

milliseconds after any of the above transients.

2.2.7.2 Frequency

a. Transients: Plus or minus 0.6 Hz maximum.

b. Slew Rate: 1.0 Hz maximum per second.

2.2.8 Efficiency

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Minimum efficiencies at full load are as

follows:

UPS capacity Module

10 kVA to 125 kVA 88 Percent

Above 125 kVA 90 Percent

Above 300 kVA 92 Percent

A higher efficiency UPS will save money on

electricity bills on the long run and will pay off to

spend more money up front if the funds are available.

***************************************************************************

Minimum Efficiency: [90][_____] percent at full load kW and [90] [_____]

percent at 50 percent load.

2.3 UPS MODULE


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 19

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete input isolation transformer if not

required.

***************************************************************************

2.3.1 General Description

UPS module shall consist of a rectifier/charger unit and a 3-phase inverter

unit with their associated transformers, synchronizing equipment, protective

devices, surge suppression, [input isolation transformer,] and accessories

as required for operation.

2.3.1.1 Interchangeability

The subassemblies in one UPS module shall be interchangeable with the

corresponding modules within the same UPS, and from one UPS system to

another of identical systems.

2.3.2 Rectifier/Charger Unit

Rectifier/charger unit shall be solid state and shall provide regulated

direct current to the dc bus, supplying power to the inverter and charging

the battery plant.

2.3.2.1 Input Protective Device

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Calculate/verify AIC on the single line

diagram at input of the UPS.

***************************************************************************

Rectifier/charger unit shall be provided with an input protective device.

The protective device shall be sized to accept simultaneously the full-rated

load and the battery recharge current. The protective device shall be

capable of shunt tripping and shall have [_____] amperes symmetrical

interrupting rating. The protective device shall have

provision for locking in the "off" position.

2.3.2.2 Surge Protection

A surge suppression device shall be installed at the UPS input to protect

against lightning and switching surges. Internal components shall be

protected from surges that enter at each ac input connection including main

input, static bypass transfer switch, [and maintenance bypass/isolation

switch]. Surge suppressors shall protect internal components according to

IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category B. Surge suppressors shall be UL

1449 approved to fail in "safe" mode.

[2.3.2.3 Input Isolation Transformer

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete the input isolation transformer if it's

not required. Isolation transformers provide

isolation of line induced EMI, common mode noise and

dc offsets. Some of the UPS manufacturers require a

separate cabinet for the transformer.

***************************************************************************


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 20

A dry-type, isolated-winding power transformer shall be used for the

rectifier unit. The transformer's hottest spot winding temperature shall not

exceed the temperature limit of the transformer insulation material when

operating at full load. The transformer insulation shall be Class H, 150

degrees C rise. Transformer connections shall be accessible from the front.

Transformer cabinet, if required, shall match the UPS cabinet and attach to

it.

]2.3.2.4 Power Walk-In

Rectifier/charger unit shall be protected by a power walk-in feature such

that when ac power is returned to the ac input bus, the total initial power

requirement will not exceed 20 percent of the rated full load current. This

demand shall increase gradually to 100 percent of the rated full load

current plus the battery charging current over the specified time interval.

2.3.2.5 Sizing

Rectifier/charger unit shall be sized for the following two simultaneous

operating conditions:

a. Supplying the full rated load current to the inverter.

b. Recharging a fully-discharged battery to 95 percent of rated ampere-

hour capacity within ten times the discharge time after normal ac power

is restored.

2.3.2.6 Battery Charging Current

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete second step current limiting if the UPS

system will not be supplied with ac power from an

auxiliary generator system or if the generator has

been sized to accommodate the recharge current of the

battery. Second step current limit is usually found

in larger units of 150kVA and above.

***************************************************************************

a. Primary current limiting: Battery-charging current shall be voltage

regulated and current limited. The battery-charging current limit shall

be separately adjustable from 2 percent to 25 percent of the maximum

discharge current. After the battery is recharged, the

rectifier/charger unit shall maintain the battery at full float charge

until the next operation under input power failure. Battery charger

shall be capable of providing equalizing charge to the battery.

[b. Second step current limiting: The rectifier/charger unit shall also

have a second-step battery current limit. This second-step current

limit shall sense actual battery current and reduce the input power

demand for battery recharging to 50 percent (adjustable from 30 percent

to 70 percent) of the normal rate without affecting the system's

ability to supply full-rated power to the connected load. The second-

step current-limit circuit shall be activated by a dry contact signal

from the generator set controls and shall prevent normal rate battery

recharging until utility power is restored.


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 21

]2.3.2.7 DC Ripple

Rectifier/charger unit shall minimize ripple current and voltage supplied to

the battery; the ripple current into the battery shall not exceed 3 percent

RMS of the inverter input rated current; the ripple voltage into the battery

shall not exceed 2 percent RMS of the float voltage.

2.3.2.8 DC Voltage Adjustment

Rectifier/charger unit shall have manual means for adjusting dc voltage for

battery equalization, to provide voltage within plus 10 percent of nominal

float voltage.

2.3.2.9 Battery Isolation Protective Device

Module shall have a dc protective device to isolate the module from the

battery system. The protective device size and interrupting rating shall be

as required by system capacity and shall incorporate a shunt trip as

required by circuit design. The protective device shall have provision for

locking in the "off" position.

2.3.3 Inverter Unit

Inverter unit shall be a solid-state device deriving its power from the dc

bus (rectifier or battery source) and providing ac power within specified

limits to the critical load. Inverter shall utilize microprocessor

controlled solid state Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) controlled IGBT power

transistor technology to shape the ac output.

2.3.3.1 Output Overload

The inverter shall be able to sustain an overload as specified across its

output terminals. The inverter shall not shut off, but shall continue to

operate within rated parameters, with inverse-time overload shutdown

protection. If the overload condition persists beyond the rated parameters

of the inverter, the inverter shall current limit, load shall be transferred

to the bypass source, and the inverter shall disconnect automatically from

the critical load bus.

If the bypass source is not available and the overload/fault condition

continues, the inverter shall current limit for a limited time as determined

by the manufacturer and shall shut down to protect the internal components.

2.3.3.2 Output Frequency Control

The inverter shall normally operate in phase-lock and synchronism with the

bypass source. When the bypass source frequency deviates by more than ±0.5

Hz, the internal frequency oscillator shall automatically take control and

become the new frequency reference. Upon restoration of the bypass source

within the required tolerance, the inverter shall synchronize back with that

source at a slew rate not exceeding the specified rate. The oscillator shall

be temperature compensated and shall be manually adjustable.

2.3.3.3 Output Protective Device


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 22

The output protective device shall be capable of shunt tripping or opening

on an applied control signal and shall have the proper frame size and trip

rating to supply overload current as specified. External output protective

device shall have provision for locking in the "off" position. The inverter

output protective device shall work in conjunction with the bypass

protective device for both manual and automatic load transfers to and from

bypass power.

[2.3.3.4 Output Transformer

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete the output transformer unless isolation

is required or the design output voltage is different

then the normal UPS output voltage. Some of the UPS

manufacturers require a separate cabinet for the

transformer.

***************************************************************************

The inverter output transformer shall be similar to the input transformer

and shall be capable of handling up to [K-13][_____] nonlinear loads as

described in IEEE C57.110.

]2.3.4 External Protection

UPS module shall have built-in self-protection against undervoltage,

overvoltage, overcurrent and surges introduced on the ac input source and/or

the bypass source. The UPS shall also have built-in self-protection against

overvoltage and voltage surges introduced at the output terminals by

paralleled sources, load switching, or circuit breaker operation in the

critical load distribution system.

2.3.5 Internal Protection

UPS module shall be self-protected against overcurrent, sudden changes in

output load and short circuits at the output terminals. UPS module shall be

provided with output reverse power detection which shall cause the module to

be disconnected from the critical load bus when output reverse power is

present. UPS module shall have built-in protection against permanent damage

to itself and the connected load for predictable types of failure within

itself and the connected load. At the end of battery discharge limit, the

module shall shut down without damage to internal components.

2.4 STATIC BYPASS TRANSFER CIRCUIT

A static bypass transfer circuit shall be provided as an integral part of

the UPS and shall consist of a static switch, made up of two reverse-

paralleled SCRs (silicon-controlled rectifiers) per phase conductor, and a

bypass protective device or bypass switch, made up of a contactor or motor

operated circuit breaker. The bypass protective device shall be in parallel

with the static switch. The inverter output protective device shall

disconnect and isolate the inverter from the bypass transfer circuit.

The control logic shall contain an automatic transfer circuit that senses

the status of the inverter logic signals and alarm conditions and provides

an uninterrupted transfer of the load to the bypass ac power source, without

exceeding the transient limits specified herein, when a malfunction occurs

in the UPS or when an external overload condition occurs. The power section


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 23

of the static bypass transfer circuit shall be provided as a plug-in type

assembly to facilitate maintenance. The static bypass transfer circuit shall

be used to connect the input bypass ac power source to the critical load

when required, and shall have the following features:

2.4.1 Uninterrupted Transfer

The static bypass transfer switch shall automatically cause the bypass ac

power source to assume the critical load without interruption when the

bypass control logic senses one of the following conditions and the UPS

inverter output is synchronized to the bypass ac power source:

a. Inverter overload exceeds unit's rating.

b. Battery protection period is expired and bypass is available.

c. System failure.

d. Inverter output undervoltage or overvoltage.

2.4.2 Interrupted Transfer

If an overload occurs and the UPS inverter output is not synchronized to the

bypass ac power source, the UPS inverter output shall current-limit for 200

milliseconds minimum. The inverter shall then turn off and an interrupted

transfer to the bypass ac power source shall be made.

If the bypass ac power source is beyond the conditions stated below, an

interrupted transfer shall be made upon detection of a fault condition:

a. Bypass voltage greater than plus or minus 10 percent from the UPS rated

output voltage.

b. Bypass frequency greater than plus or minus 0.5 Hz from the UPS rated

output frequency.

c. Phase differential of ac bypass voltage to UPS output voltage greater

than plus or minus 3 degrees.

2.4.3 Manual Transfer

It shall be possible to make a manually-initiated static transfer from the

system status and control panel. The transfer shall be make-before-break

utilizing the bypass switch.

2.4.4 Automatic Uninterrupted Forward Transfer

The static bypass transfer switch shall automatically forward transfer,

without interruption after the UPS inverter is turned "on", or after an

instantaneous overload-induced reverse transfer has occurred and the load

current has returned to less than the unit's 100 percent rating.

2.4.5 Forced Transfer

The control logic circuitry shall provide the means of making a forced or

reverse transfer of the static bypass transfer circuit on an interrupted


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 24

basis. Minimum interruption shall be 200 milliseconds when the UPS inverter

is not synchronized to the bypass ac power source.

2.4.6 Overload Ratings

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Select 'one minute' for greater than 150kVA;

select '30 seconds' for 10-150kVA.

***************************************************************************

The static bypass transfer switch shall withstand the following overload

conditions:

a. 1000 percent of UPS output rating for one cycle.

b. 150 percent of UPS output rating for [one minute][30 seconds].

c. 125 percent of UPS output rating for 10 minutes.

2.4.7 Static Switch Disconnect

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete if the static switch is of the

draw-out type.

***************************************************************************

A static switch disconnect shall be incorporated to isolate the static

bypass transfer switch assembly so it can be removed for servicing. The

switch shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts.

2.5 MAINTENANCE BYPASS SWITCH

2.5.1 General

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Multi-module UPS systems require a UPS

maintenance bypass that should be incorporated into

the UPS output switchgear.

There are two methods of installing a maintenance

bypass switch. One is a cabinet that bolts to the

UPS module and becomes part of the line-up or is

integral to the UPS module cabinet. The second is

physically isolated from the UPS module in a separate

cabinet mounted on the wall or free-standing floor-

mounted. Choose the appropriate method based on

project conditions and requirements.

***************************************************************************

A maintenance bypass switch shall be provided [as an integral part of the

UPS and located within the UPS module or in a matching cabinet adjacent to

the UPS cabinet][in a wall-mounted enclosure][in a free-standing floor-

mounted enclosure]. The maintenance bypass switch shall provide the

capability to continuously support the critical load from the bypass AC

power source while the UPS is isolated for maintenance. The maintenance


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 25

bypass switch shall be housed [in an isolated compartment inside the UPS

cabinet][in a separate cabinet or enclosure] in such a way that service

personnel will not be exposed to electrically live parts while maintaining

the equipment. Switch shall contain a maintenance bypass protective device

and a module isolation protective device.

2.5.2 Load Transfer

The maintenance bypass switch shall provide the capability of transferring

the critical load from the UPS static bypass transfer switch to maintenance

bypass and then back to the UPS static bypass transfer switch with no

interruption to the critical load.

[2.5.3 Load Bank Protection Device

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete if the ability to load bank test the

UPS system is not required.

***************************************************************************

A load bank protective device shall be provided to allow the UPS system to

be tested using a portable load bank. The load bank protective device shall

be connected on the line side of the maintenance bypass switch isolation

protective device.

][2.5.4 [Voltage Matching][Isolation Transformer]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete if the input and output voltages are

the same and an isolation transformer is not

required.

***************************************************************************

The maintenance bypass cabinet shall contain [a voltage matching

transformer][an isolation transformer] as required to match the output

voltage requirements.

]2.6 MODULE CONTROL PANEL

The UPS module shall be provided with a control/indicator display panel. The

display panel shall be on the front of the UPS module. Controls, meters,

alarms and indicators for operation of the UPS module shall be on this

panel. The display panel shall be menu driven for browsing all the screens.

2.6.1 Module Meters

2.6.1.1 Monitored Functions

The following functions shall be monitored and displayed:

a. Input voltage, phase-to-phase (all three phases).

b. Input current, all three phases.

c. Input frequency.


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 26

d. Battery voltage.

e. Battery current (charge/discharge).

f. Output voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral (all three phases).

g. Output current, all three phases.

h. Output frequency.

i. Output kilowatts.

j. Elapsed time meter to indicate hours of operation, 6 digits.

k. Bypass voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral (all three phases).

l. Output kilovars.

m. Output kilowatt hours, with 15-minute demand attachment.

n. Battery temperature.

o. Output Percentage load.

p. Remaining battery time.

2.6.1.2 Meter Construction

The display panel shall display alphanumeric parameters based on true RMS

metering with 1 percent accuracy (minimum 4 significant digits).

2.6.2 Module Controls

Module shall have the following controls:

a. Lamp test/reset pushbutton.

b. Alarm test/reset pushbutton.

c. Module input protective device trip pushbutton, with guard.

d. Module output protective device trip pushbutton, with guard.

e. Battery protective device trip pushbutton, with guard.

f. Emergency off pushbutton, with guard.

g. DC voltage adjustment potentiometer, with locking guard.

h. Control power off switch.

i. UPS/bypass transfer selector switch.

j. Static bypass transfer switch enable/disable selector switch.

2.6.3 Module Alarm Indicators


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 27

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete 'input transformer overtemperature' if

input transformer is not provided.

***************************************************************************

Module shall have indicators for the following alarm items. Any one of these

conditions shall turn on an audible alarm and the appropriate summary

indicator. Each new alarm shall register without affecting any previous

alarm.

a. Input ac power source failure.

b. Input protective device open.

c. Input power out of tolerance.

d. Overload.

e. Overload shutdown.

f. DC overvoltage/shutdown.

g. DC ground fault.

h. Low battery.

i. Battery discharged.

j. Battery protective device open.

k. Blower fan failure.

[l. Input transformer overtemperature.

]m. Low battery shutdown.

n. UPS on battery.

o. Equipment overtemperature.

p. Fuse blown (with indication where).

q. Control power failure.

r. Charger off/problem.

s. Inverter fault/off.

t. Emergency power off.

u. External shutdown (remote EPO activated).

v. Critical load on static bypass.

w. Static bypass transfer switch disabled/failure.

x. Inverter output overvoltage.


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 28

y. Inverter output undervoltage.

z. Inverter output overfrequency.

aa. Inverter output underfrequency.

bb. Bypass source voltage outside limits.

cc. Bypass frequency out of range.

dd. Bypass source to inverter out of synchronization.

ee. Overtemperature shutdown.

ff. Hardware shutdown.

2.6.4 Module Emergency OFF Button

Pressing the emergency off button shall cause the module to be disconnected

from the system, via its input protective device, output protective device,

and battery protective device. The button shall include a protective cover

to prevent unintentional activation.

[2.7 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUITS

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete if self-diagnostic circuits are not

required. These circuits are normally required in

high reliability applications where it becomes

critical to identify the faulty circuit card in the

shortest time possible. This option is not normally

available in off the shelf UPS units.

***************************************************************************

The control logic shall include status indicators for trouble-shooting the

control circuits. These indicators shall be mounted on the circuit card edge

or face such that they will be visible without repositioning the card, and

shall be labeled with the function name.

][2.8 REMOTE MONITORING PANEL

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete if a remote monitoring panel is not

required.

***************************************************************************

A remote monitoring panel shall be provided to monitor system status. The

panel shall be designed for wall mounting near the critical load.

2.8.1 Indicators

Minimum display shall include the following indicators:

a. Load on UPS.


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 29

b. Load on battery.

c. Load on bypass.

d. Low battery.

e. Summary alarm.

f. New alarm (to alert the operator that a second summary alarm

condition has occurred).

2.8.2 Audible Alarm

Any single indicator shall also turn on the audible alarm. An audible alarm

test/reset button and lamp test/reset button shall be included. This reset

button shall not affect nor reset the alarm on the module.

]2.9 COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA ACQUISITION

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete the communication and data options that

are not required. RS-485 port is not supported by

some of the UPS manufacturers.

***************************************************************************

An [RS 232][RS 485] communications and data acquisition port shall be

provided. This port shall allow the system parameters, status, alarm

indication and control panel functions specified to be remotely monitored

and controlled.

Additionally, a second communication port shall be provided for use with the

following:

a. A set of [six][eight] Form C remote alarm contacts rated at 120V, 0.5A,

shall be provided for remote alarm monitoring.

b. Auto-dial modem communication shall be provided to communicate with a

remote modem in case an alarm function is active.

c. A SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) adapter shall be provided

to communicate UPS monitoring via a network or direct connection to a

PC.

d. A standard Web Browser adapter shall be provided to remotely view and

monitor UPS functions over the Internet.

All the communication ports and contacts shall be capable of simultaneous

communication.

[2.9.1 Emergency Control Contacts

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include this paragraph only when the UPS will

be installed in conjunction with an emergency

generator/alternate source.

***************************************************************************


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 30

Provide normally open contacts to signal when power is supplied to the UPS

from emergency engine generators or alternate source.

]2.10 TEMPERATURE CONTROL

2.10.1 General

Cabinet and enclosure ventilation shall be adequate to ensure that

components are operated within their ratings. Forced-air cooled rectifier,

inverter, and control unit will be acceptable. The cooling fans shall

continue operation if UPS input power is lost. Redundancy shall be provided

so that failure of one fan or associated circuit breaker will not cause an

overheat condition. Cooling air shall enter the lower front of the cabinets

and exhaust at the top. Blower power failure shall be indicated as a visual

and audible alarm on the control panel. Air inlets shall have replaceable

filters that may be located on the inside of the cabinet doors and shall be

easily accessible for replacement.

2.10.2 Blower Power Source

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Select 'output side' for 10-225kVA; select

'input and output sides' for over 225kVA.

***************************************************************************

Blower power source shall be internally derived from the [output side]

[input and output sides] of UPS module, with automatic transfer arrangement.

2.10.3 Temperature Sensors

Temperature sensors shall be provided to monitor the air temperature.

Separate sensors shall monitor the temperature of rectifier and inverter

heat sinks. Separate sensors shall also monitor the transformer temperature.

Critical equipment over-temperature indication shall start a timer that

shall shut down the UPS system if the temperature does not return below the

setpoint level recommended by the UPS manufacturer.

2.11 BATTERY SYSTEM

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Refer to UFC 3-520-01, "Interior Electrical

System"s for battery types and selection information.

***************************************************************************

2.11.1 General

Battery system shall contain the battery cells, racks, battery disconnect,

battery monitor and cabinet, if required. A storage battery with sufficient

ampere-hour rating to maintain UPS output at full capacity for the specified

duration shall be provided for each UPS module. The battery shall be of

heavy-duty, industrial design suitable for UPS service. The cells shall be

provided with flame arrestor vents, intercell connectors and cables, cell-

lifting straps, cell-numbering sets, and terminal grease. Intercell

connectors shall be sized to maintain terminal voltage within voltage window

limits when supplying full load under power failure conditions. Cell and


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 31

connector hardware shall be stainless steel of a type capable of resisting

corrosion from the electrolyte used.

2.11.2 Battery Ratings

a. Type: [lead calcium][lead antimony][nickel cadmium].

b. Specific gravity when fully charged: [1.215][_____].

c. End voltage [1.67][_____] volts per cell.

d. Float voltage: [2.17 to 2.26][2.15 to 2.22] volts per cell.

e. Equalizing voltage: [2.33 to 2.38][_____] volts per cell.

2.11.3 Battery Construction

The battery shall be of the [valve-regulated, sealed, non-gassing,

recombinant type][wet-cell type and shall be supplied complete with

thermometer and hydrometer holder].

[2.11.4 Battery Cabinet

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete if a battery cabinet is not required.

***************************************************************************

The battery pack assembly shall be furnished in a battery cabinet matching

the UPS cabinet. The battery cabinet shall be designed to allow for checking

the torque on the connections in the battery system and to provide adequate

access for annual housekeeping chores. External wiring interface shall be

through the bottom or top of the assembly. A smoke and high temperature

alarm shall annunciate detection of either smoke or high temperature within

the battery cabinet.

][2.11.5 Battery Rack

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete if a battery rack is not required.

Three tier racks should be used only where floor

space is limited. They increase floor loading and

make maintenance more difficult.

***************************************************************************

The battery shall be provided with a suitable number of [two-tier][three-

tier] racks to fit the room layout shown. Battery rack shall be steel and

shall be protected with electrolyte-resistant paint. Battery rack shall be

shipped unassembled and shall include hardware necessary for assembly. Each

rack shall be complete with bus bars to accommodate cables from UPS module.

Bus bar connectors for battery-to-battery connections and high-flex multi-

stranded copper cable (ASTM B173 stranding class H) with proper cable

supports for connecting top row of batteries to bottom row of batteries at

rack ends shall be provided. End sections shall be cut to length to prevent

wasting floor space.


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 32

]2.11.6 Cell-Terminal Covers

Acid-resistant transparent cell-terminal covers not exceeding 1.83 meters (6

feet) in length and with vent holes drilled on top where needed shall be

provided.

2.11.7 Battery Disconnect

Each battery pack assembly shall have a fused disconnect switch provided in

a NEMA 1 enclosure, finished with acid-resistant paint and located in line

with the assembly. Switch shall be complete with line side and load side bus

bars for connection to battery cells. Switch shall be rated [_____] V dc,

[_____] amperes, 3-pole with interrupting rating as required by system

capacity, and shall have an external operator that is lockable in the "off"

position.

[2.11.8 Seismic Requirements

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Do not use this paragraph for Navy projects.

When directed to meet seismic requirements for

battery supports, Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION

FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT and 26 05 48.00 10

SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT must be

edited to suit the project and be included in the

contract documents. Edit the following paragraph and

include it in the project specification. When the

Government designer is the Engineer of Record and for

Navy projects, provide seismic requirements on the

drawings.

***************************************************************************

The battery support system shall [conform to [Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC

PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT] [and to] [Section 26 05 48.00 10

SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT]][be as indicated].

]2.11.9 Battery Monitor

A battery monitor shall be provided for each battery pack assembly. At a

minimum, this device shall monitor the following parameters:

a. Total system voltage.

b. Ambient room temperature.

c. Total battery discharge cycles with a duration of [30 seconds or

less][greater than 30 seconds but less than 5 minutes][greater than 5

minutes].

The monitor shall also record the total accumulated discharge minutes and

accumulated battery system discharge kW hours.

2.12 FACTORY TESTING

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The designer should carefully evaluate the UPS

application and the user's mission to determine

../Word/13%2048%2000.doc

../Word/26%2005%2048.00%2010.doc

../Word/13%2048%2000.doc

../Word/26%2005%2048.00%2010.doc


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 33

critical tests for the UPS that will ensure UPS/load

compatibility. These tests should be conducted at

the factory and the results validated prior to

shipment to the site. The required UPS/load

interaction can be achieved by requesting the

following tests plus any other tests the designer

deems necessary:

a. Tests to ensure that the UPS rated power factor

is verified;

b. Tests to ensure that the UPS system will operate

in total accord and support the rated load;

c. Tests to ensure that the UPS system can deal

with load anomalies (odd harmonics, etc.) associated

with the user's equipment load.

***************************************************************************

The UPS system shall be factory tested to meet the requirements specified

using a test battery (not the battery to be supplied with the system). UPS

module shall be factory load tested as an independent assembly with 3-phase

ac input power and with battery power for a minimum of 8 hours, with meter

readings taken every 30 minutes. Load shall be balanced at rated kVA and

rated power factor. Factory tests for the UPS module shall be run under full

load, and will be witnessed by the Government. Should a malfunction occur,

the problem shall be corrected and the test shall be repeated. As a

minimum, the factory tests shall include the parameters described in

paragraphs ac Input, ac Output, Transient Response and Efficiency. The tests

shall encompass all aspects of operation, such as module failure, static

bypass operation, battery failure, input power failure and overload ratings.

The Contracting Officer shall be notified in writing at least 2 weeks before

testing. Factory-test time shall not be used for system debugging and/or

checkout. Such work shall be done prior to notifying the Government that the

system is ready for testing. Factory tests shall be performed during normal

business hours. The system shall be interconnected and tested for an

additional 8 hours to ensure proper wiring and performance.

2.12.1 Transient Tests

Transient tests shall be conducted using high-speed oscillograph type

recorders to demonstrate the operation of the components to the satisfaction

of the Government. These tests shall include 50 percent to 100 percent load

changes, manual transfer, manual retransfer, low dc bus initiated transfer

and low ac output bus transfer. A recording instrument equipped with an

event marker shall be used.

2.12.2 Efficiency Tests

Testing for efficiency shall be performed at zero output up to 100 percent

of stated kVA output in 25 percent steps, [0.8][0.9] power factor, with

battery fully charged and floating on the dc bus, with nominal input

voltage, and with module connected to represent actual operating conditions.

2.13 CABLE LUGS AND TERMINATIONS


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 34

2.13.1 Cable Lugs

Provide appropriate compression type lugs on all ac and dc power connections

to the UPS system and battery as required. Aluminum or bare copper cable

lugs are not suitable.

2.13.2 Terminations

Terminals shall be supplied for making power and control connections.

Terminal blocks shall be provided for field wiring terminals. Terminal

blocks shall be heavy-duty, strap-screw type. Terminal blocks for field

wiring shall be located in one place in each module. Control wiring shall be

extended to the terminal block location. No more than two wires shall land

on any terminal point. Where control wiring is attached to the same point as

power wiring, a separate terminal shall be provided. If bus duct is used,

bus stubs shall be provided where bus duct enters cabinets.

2.14 INSPECTION

Inspection before shipment is required. The manufacturer shall notify the

Government at least 2 weeks before shipping date so that an inspection can

be made.

2.15 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES

ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment

enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the

drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when

applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 3 mm (0.125

inch) thick, white with [black][_____] center core. Surface shall be matte

finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave

into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be 25 by 65 mm (1.0 by 2.5

inches). Lettering shall be a minimum of 6.35 mm (0.25 inch) high normal

block style.

2.16 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATES

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's

name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a

conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be

acceptable.

2.17 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH

Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which

shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance

test.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to

requirements specified herein. Provide new equipment and materials unless

indicated or specified otherwise.


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 35

3.1.1 Control Cable

***************************************************************************

NOTE: UPS sizes 200 KVA and above are shipped in

sections. Control wiring between module sections

will be connected by the UPS manufacturer's technical

representative.

***************************************************************************

UPS control wiring shall be installed in individual separate rigid steel

conduits, unless connections are made between side by side matching cabinets

of UPS. Tag control wires with numeric identification tags corresponding to

the terminal strip location to where the wires are connected. In addition to

manufacturer's requirements, provide four additional spare conductors

between UPS module and remote alarm panel in same conduit. When routing

control cables inside UPS module, maintain a minimum 155 mm (6 inches)

separation from power cables.

3.1.2 Grounding Conductor

Provide an insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder and branch

circuits. Conductor shall be separate from the electrical system neutral

conductor. Ground battery racks and battery breaker cabinets with a separate

equipment grounding conductor to the UPS cabinet.

3.1.3 UPS Output Conductors

Isolate the UPS output conductors from the UPS cabinet to the critical load

panels and from other conductors by installing in separate conduit.

Isolation shall prevent inductive coupling from other conductors.

[3.1.4 DC Power Conductors

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include this paragraph only when shipping

splits occur or when batteries are remote from the

UPS cabinet.

***************************************************************************

When installed in conduits, place dc power conductors from the UPS cabinet

to the battery circuit breaker such that each conduit contains an equal

number of positive and negative conductors, for example, two positive and

two negative conductors in each conduit.

]3.1.5 Seismic Protection

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Do not use this paragraph for Navy projects.

When directed to meet seismic requirements for UPS

enclosure anchoring, Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC

PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT and 26 05

48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

must be edited to suit the project and be included in

the contract documents. Edit the following paragraph

and include it in the project specification. When

the Government designer is the Engineer of Record and

../Word/13%2048%2000.doc

../Word/26%2005%2048.00%2010.doc

../Word/26%2005%2048.00%2010.doc


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 36

for Navy projects, provide seismic requirements on

the drawings.

***************************************************************************

The UPS enclosure shall [conform to [Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR

MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT][ and to ][26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT]][be as indicated].

3.1.6 Conduit Entries

Conduit entries shall use the available conduit areas shown on

manufacturer's installation drawings. Conduit entries shall not be made

through the front, side or rear panels of the UPS[ or Maintenance Bypass

Cabinet].

[3.1.7 Battery Rack Assembly

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Choose this paragraph or the one below

entitled "Battery Cabinet".

***************************************************************************

Battery racks are typically shipped dismantled in separate rail, frame, and

brace packages. Ensure that manufacturer furnished assembly hardware is used

to assemble battery racks. Installation of battery racks shall conform to

the manufacturer's instructions.

][3.1.8 Battery Cabinet Assembly

Battery cabinets are typically factory assembled for up to 100 KVA UPS

systems. Battery cabinets for larger units typically require assembly at

the site. Installation of battery cabinets shall conform to the


][3.1.9 Battery Installation

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete paragraph and subparagraphs for smaller

UPS units that have batteries installed in the unit

cabinet by the manufacturer at the factory.

***************************************************************************

Installation of batteries shall conform to the manufacturer's instructions.


***************************************************************************

NOTE: The UPS manufacturer's technical

representative is required to inspect the completed

UPS and battery installation. The representative's

visit to the site must be scheduled by the

Contractor.

***************************************************************************

Contractor shall notify Contracting Officer in writing at least 45 calendar

days prior to completion of the UPS system installation. At this time the

Contractor, will schedule the UPS manufacturer's technical representative to

../Word/13%2048%2000.doc

../Word/26%2005%2048.00%2010.doc


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 37

inspect the completed installation. The UPS technical representative shall

provide instruction for activity personnel as specified in paragraph titled

"DEMONSTRATION".

3.2.1 Installation Preparation

***************************************************************************

NOTE: In subparagraph b. choose either battery racks

or cabinets based on the UPS size and configuration.

In subparagraph o. delete the bracketed statement

when the project does not require a UPS maintenance

bypass cabinet.

***************************************************************************

The following items shall be completely installed by the Contractor and be

operational prior to the arrival of the UPS representative for inspection,

unit start-up and testing:

a. Ventilation equipment in the UPS and battery rooms.

b. Battery [racks][cabinets] and cells. This is not applicable for

maintenance-free battery.

c. Battery connections including cell-to-cell, tier-to-tier, and rack-to-

rack connections, with correct polarity;

d. DC power and control connections between UPS and battery circuit

breaker, with correct polarity;

e. DC power connection between battery circuit breaker and battery, with

correct polarity;

f. Clockwise phase rotation of ac power connections;

g. AC power to rectifier input bus;

h. AC power to UPS bypass input bus;

i. AC power to UPS maintenance bypass circuit breaker;

j. AC power from UPS output to UPS maintenance bypass output circuit

breaker;

k. Remote monitors and control wiring;

l. UPS system and battery system properly grounded;

m. Emergency shower and eye wash;

[n. Control connections between UPS and emergency engine generator signal

contacts;

]o. Control connections between UPS module [and UPS maintenance bypass

cabinet];


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 38

p. Clean and vacuum UPS and battery room floors, battery cells, and

UPS equipment, both inside and outside.

q. Ensure that shipping members have been removed.

r. Provide IEEE 450 battery installation certification.

3.2.2 Initial Inspection and Tests

The UPS technical representative and the Contracting Officer, in the

presence of the Contractor, will inspect the completed installation. The

Contractor shall correct construction or installation deficiencies as

directed. Perform acceptance checks in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections,

performed in accordance with NETA ATS.


(1) Compare equipment nameplate data with drawings, specifications and


(2) Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Inspect doors, panels,

and sections for paint, dents, scratches, fit, and missing

hardware. Inspect the displays for scratches, dark pixels or

uneven brightness.

(3) Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required clearances.

(4) Verify that fuse sizes and types correspond to drawings.

(5) Verify the unit is clean inside and out.

(6) Test all electrical and mechanical interlock systems for correct

operation and sequencing.

(7) Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using

one of the following methods:

(a) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.

(b) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections

by calibrated torque-wrench method.

(c) Perform thermographic survey.

(8) Verify operation of forced ventilation.

(9) Verify that vents are clear and new clean filters are installed.

3.2.3 Performance Tests

Provide equipment, test instruments, power, load bank, materials and labor

required for tests. Contracting Officer will witness all tests and the tests

shall be subject to his approval. Perform tests in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations and include the following electrical tests.


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 39

3.2.3.1 UPS Unit Performance Tests

Upon completion of battery activation procedures, Contractor shall connect

load bank to UPS output. Load bank required shall be determined by the

following:

UPS KVA RATING X 0.8 = KW of LOAD BANK

Performance test is to be run under the supervision of the UPS technical

representative. UPS unit shall be operated under full load for a minimum of

one hour. Contractor shall be required to operate feeder and bypass power

feeder breakers during testing of the UPS.

a. Electrical Tests

(1) Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a


(2) Test static transfer from inverter to bypass and back. Use normal

load, if possible.

(3) Set free running frequency of oscillator.

(4) Test dc undervoltage trip level on inverter input breaker. Set

according to manufacturer's published data.

(5) Test alarm circuits.

(6) Verify synchronizing indicators for static switch and bypass

switches.

(7) Perform electrical tests for UPS system breakers.

(8) Perform electrical tests for UPS system batteries.

b. Test Values

(1) Compare bolted connection resistances to values of similar

connections.

(2) Verify bolt-torque levels.

(3) Micro-ohm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high

levels of the normal range as indicated in the manufacturer's

published data. If manufacturer's data is not available,

investigate any values which deviate from similar connections by

more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

[c. Load Test

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Edit as required, depending upon whether a

temporary or permanent load bank is to be provided

and on the type of UPS system. This paragraph may

be deleted for small UPS systems.

***************************************************************************


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 40

The installed system shall be load tested for a continuous 24 hour period

by means of resistive load banks. The system shall be continuously tested

at 1/2 load for 8 hours, 3/4 load for 8 hours and full load for 8 hours.

Provide resistive load banks of total kW load of equipment to facilitate

startup under load conditions, and to conduct load tests described above.

Instrument readings shall be recorded every half hour for the following:

(1) Input voltage (all three phases).

(2) Input current (all three phases).

(3) Input frequency.

(4) Battery voltage.

(5) Output voltage (all three phases).

(6) Output current (all three phases).

(7) Output kilowatts.

(8) Output frequency.

][d. Full Load Burn In Test

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete emergency source testing requirements

if no emergency source is available. This paragraph

may be deleted for small UPS system.

***************************************************************************

The installed system shall undergo an additional full load burn-in period

of 24 continuous hours. If a failure occurs during the burn-in period, the

tests shall be repeated. Instrument readings shall be recorded every half

hour as above. During the burn-in period, the following tests shall be

performed:

(1) With the UPS carrying maximum continuous design load and supplied

from the normal source, switch [100 percent load][50 percent load] on

and off a minimum of five times within [the burn-in period]

[_____].

[(2) With the UPS carrying maximum continuous design load and supplied

from the emergency source, repeat the switching operations

described in step a. Also, verify that the UPS module rectifier

charger unit(s) go into the second-step current limit mode.]

(3) With the UPS carrying maximum continuous design load and operating

on battery power, repeat the switching operations described in step

a above.

(4) Continue operation on battery power for 1 minute, then restore

normal power.

The Contractor shall furnish a high-speed dual trace oscillograph to

monitor ten or more cycles of the above tests at the ON and OFF transitions

and two typical steady-state periods, one shortly after the load is


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 41

energized (at 30 to 60 seconds) and one after operation has stabilized (at

8 to 10 minutes). Four copies of the traces shall be delivered to the

Contracting Officer.

][e. Battery Discharge Test

***************************************************************************

NOTE: This paragraph may be deleted for small UPS

system.

***************************************************************************

With the battery fully charged, the system shall undergo a complete battery

discharge test to full depletion and a recharge to nominal conditions.

Instrument readings shall be recorded every minute during discharge for the

following:

(1) Battery voltage.

(2) Battery current.

(3) Output voltage (all three phases).

(4) Output current (all three phases).

(5) Output kilowatts.

(6) Output frequency.

][3.2.3.2 Emergency Generator Operation

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Include this paragraph only when the UPS will

be installed in conjunction with an emergency

generator.

***************************************************************************

Test UPS to observe operation with emergency generator service. UPS

technical representative shall verify UPS battery current limiting feature

functions properly.

][3.2.3.3 Battery Performance Test (Constant KW)

***************************************************************************

NOTE: This paragraph is applicable for large wet-

cell type battery systems. Delete for sealed (valve

regulated) battery system.

***************************************************************************

Furnish all labor, material and test equipment necessary to conduct

performance test under the direction of UPS technical representative. The

following shall be accomplished:

a. Install a calibrated voltmeter across the battery terminals to measure

voltage, and install a calibrated voltmeter across the UPS dc shunt to

read charging current. UPS technical representative will advise

connection to dc shunt.


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 42

b. Record temperature of pilot cells in battery immediately prior to start

of discharge performance test.

c. Read and record total battery voltage and battery current at start of

discharge and every minute during discharge test.

d. Record minutes and seconds when battery voltage drops below minimum

discharge voltage of 291 volts dc. On initial discharge test, a battery

may be expected to deliver 95 percent of its rated capacity. This will

increase to 100 percent after several complete discharge cycles or

after 12 months of float charge service.

e. Should battery fail to meet the requirements of the first discharge

performance test, open the inverted output breaker. Then put battery on

equalizing charge, with rectifier adjusted to normal equalizing voltage

of [424][_____] volts dc. Equalize for a minimum of [100][_____] hours.

Measure and record time and battery voltage. Run a second discharge

performance test.

]3.3 DEMONSTRATION

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete video tape references if not required.

***************************************************************************

3.3.1 Instructing Government Personnel

Furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to

designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and

maintenance of the specified systems and equipment, including pertinent

safety requirements as required. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar

with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory

as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be

given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has

been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation.

Provide [8][_____] hours of instruction for [_____] personnel.[ When more

than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the

time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with

equipment or system. When significant changes or modifications in the

equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide

additional instructions to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes

or modifications.][ Field training shall be videotaped and the tape shall

be left with the Contracting Officer.][ A factory training videotape shall

be provided as part of the training materials.]

3.4 FINAL ADJUSTMENTS

a. Remove load bank and reconnect system for normal operation.

b. Equalize battery at [424][_____] volts for a period of [72]

[_____] hours.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete this paragraph if battery is sealed

(valve regulated) type.

***************************************************************************


Section 26 33 53.00 20 Page 43

[c. Bring electrolyte level of all cells up to the bottom of the high

level line by adding original filling gravity electrolyte.

]d. Resume charging battery at normal float voltage of [411][_____] volts

dc.

e. Check battery connections are properly torqued to manufacturer's

specifications. Take and record, for cell-to-cell and terminal

connections, detailed micro-ohm resistance readings. Remake connections

having a resistance of more than 10 percent above the average.

f. All manufacturer's data and operation manuals, which are an integral

part of, and shipped with UPS, shall be delivered to Contracting

Officer.

3.5 NAMEPLATE MOUNTING

Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated.

Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or

two rivets.

3.6 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces

or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as

specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.7 DISPOSAL

Upon completion of UPS installation and testing, Contractor shall remove and

dispose of empty, partially full and excess acid drums, including shipping

containers, obsolete batteries, and obsolete UPS modules. Removal shall be

accomplished off-base and in conformance with local laws and regulations

regarding disposal of hazardous material.


../Word/09%2090%2000.doc


Section 26 55 80.00 20 Page 1

***************************************************************************


--------------------------------

Preparing Activity: NAVFAC Replacing without change

UFGS-16553N (Septermber 1999)



***************************************************************************

SECTION 26 55 80.00 20

SURGICAL LIGHTING FIXTURES

04/06

***************************************************************************


requirements for surgical lighting fixtures and

similar related specialities.











present.




***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: This guide specification shall be used in

conjunction with additional design guidance supplied

for that particular project.

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The following information shall be shown on

the project drawings:

1. Lighting fixture schedule.

2. Lighting fixture wiring diagram.

***************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL




Section 26 55 80.00 20 Page 2

1.1 REFERENCES

***************************************************************************






title.











***************************************************************************





ASTM E308 (2017) Standard Practice for Computing the

Colors of Objects by Using the CIE System


NEMA ST 20 (1992; R 1997) Standard for Dry-Type

Transformers for General Applications





UL 544 (1998; R 1999) Standard for Medical and

Dental Equipment


Section 11 70 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MEDICAL AND DENTAL EQUIPMENT,

Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, Section 26 20

00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, apply to this section with the additions

and modifications specified herein.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

../Word/11%2070%2000.doc

../Word/26%2000%2000.00%2020.doc

../Word/26%2020%2000.doc

../Word/26%2020%2000.doc


Section 26 55 80.00 20 Page 3

1.3.1 Lighthead Illumination Level

Lighthead shall produce a minimum of [80,000 lux] ([7440 footcandles])

[_____] of illumination when measured at 1070 mm (42 inches) from the face

of the light.

1.3.2 Color Temperature

Correlated color of the lightbeam shall be between 3,500 degrees and 6,700

degrees Kelvin after filtration, as measured on the ASTM E308 chromaticity

diagram.

1.3.3 Shadow Reduction

Lighting system shall provide a minimum level of 10 percent of the

unshadowed level when measured inside and at the bottom of a tube 50 mm (2

inch) in diameter, and 76 mm (3 inch) long, from a distance of 1070 mm (42

inches) when the beam is obstructed by a disk 254 mm (10 inch) in diameter,

580 mm (23 inches) above the operating table, and normal to the axis of the

tube. Paint inside of tube with flat black.

1.3.4 Beam Temperature

Radiant heat energy in the light beam 1070 mm (42 inches) below the

lighthead shall not exceed 25,000 microwatts per square centimeter at

maximum intensity in the light pattern.

1.3.5 Pattern Size

Smallest pattern size in the focal range shall be a minimum of 150 mm (6

inches). Pattern size shall be adjustable by either raising and lowering

the unit or through operation of a focus control which changes the pattern

size without movement of the unit.

1.3.6 Current Leakage

A maximum of 0.1 milliampere, as measured between the metal parts and

ground.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

***************************************************************************












project.

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc


Section 26 55 80.00 20 Page 4





















***************************************************************************








PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Installation drawings; G[, [_____]]

SD-03 Product Data

Light fixtures; G[, [_____]]

Controls; G[, [_____]]

Surgical Light Transformer; G[, [_____]]

SD-07 Certificates

Installation report

Design requirements

Certify that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted,

and tested, and that each surgical light fixture meets the

provisions of the paragraph entitled "Design Requirements."


../Word/01%2033%2029.doc

../Word/01%2033%2029.doc

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc


Section 26 55 80.00 20 Page 5

Light fixtures, Data Package 5

Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE DATA.


1.5.1 Installation drawings

Submit shop drawing for each specified lighting fixture to include the

following:

a. Mounting detail for the lighting fixture[, transformer and control]

assembly.

b. Wiring diagrams indicating the internal wiring for each item of

equipment, the interconnections between the items of equipment and

connections to normal and emergency power in the building.

Manufacturer's catalog data may be submitted for internal wiring

description.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Package each lighting fixture and protect in accordance with the


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHT FIXTURES

2.1.1 One Lighthead

One lighthead, ceiling mounted on a single extension arm assembly. Lighthead

shall rotate within a clearance circle of 4720 mm (15 1/2 feet) and the

lighthead center describes a circle 3810 mm (12 1/2 feet) when fully

extended. Center of lighthead adjustable vertically from 1190 mm (3 feet 11

inches) to 2250 mm (7 feet 4 1/2 inches) above the floor.

2.1.2 Two Lightheads

Two lightheads, ceiling mounted on a dual extension arm assembly. One

lighthead mounted on the shorter arm and the other lighthead mounted on the

longer arm to enable the outer lighthead to pass by the inner lighthead

without interference. Outer lighthead shall rotate within a clearance

circle of 4720 mm (15 1/2 feet) and the lighthead center describes a circle

3810 mm (12 1/2 feet) when fully extended. Center of the lighthead shall be

adjustable vertically from 1190 mm (3 feet 11 inches) to 2250 mm (7 feet 4

1/2 inches) above the floor.

2.1.3 Track Mounted Light Fixtures

[Single-track system with one or more lightheads] [or] [dual-track system

with one or more lightheads] per track. Lightheads are suspended from a

carriage which rides in track [or tracks] mounted in the ceiling. Steel

suspension tube shall have sufficient length for cutting to the proper

length at installation.

../Word/01%2078%2023.doc


Section 26 55 80.00 20 Page 6

2.1.3.1 Light Ceiling Tracks

Ceiling tracks shall have end closures finished to match the fixture and

shall have an opening in bottom a maximum of 50 mm (2 inches) wide extending

the entire length of track to receive the part of the carriage that moves

inside the track. Provide each track with insulated duct enclosing two

copper bus bars, and a grounding path. Provide tracks with all the

necessary components for mounting, and provide for sliding, nonsparking

electrical contacts and current-conducting components within the track.

2.1.3.2 [One] [and] [Two] Lighthead[s]

Lighthead shall rotate within a clearance circle of 2800 mm (9 feet 2

inches) and the lighthead center describes a circle 1900 mm (3 feet) when

fully extended. Lighthead center shall be adjustable vertically from 1200

mm (3 feet 11 inches) to 2200 mm (7 feet 2 inches) above the floor.

2.1.3.3 Fixture on Two Parallel Tracks

Two lightheads; twin track mounted; including two parallel, 2745 mm (9 foot)

long, surface-mounted fixed tracks, each with a lighthead and carriage.

2.1.3.4 Fixture on Single Lighthead Track

Single lighthead; short track mounted; including a 1370 mm (54 inch) long,

surface-mounted fixed track with a lighthead, and carriage.

2.1.4 Components

UL 544; The surgical lighting fixtures shall be specifically designed for

use in surgical operating rooms.

2.1.5 Electrical Characteristics

120 volts, 60 Hz, single-phase, three-wire grounded circuits.

2.1.6 Lamp

[Quartz halogen][LED] [_____] enclosed by heat-absorbing filter. Lamp shall

be color corrected and heat filtered and shall have a minimum lifespan of

500 hours. Furnish one spare lamp with each lighthead.

2.1.7 Suspension Systems

Mount each lighthead on a counterbalanced arm that can rotate 6.28 rad (360

degrees) horizontally and can provide both vertical and horizontal

adjustments. Fixture shall be controllable from both inside and outside the

sterile field and shall move in a free, smooth, and silent manner throughout

its range of maneuverability without drifting, regardless of position. [In

systems with multiple arms attached to the same mount, each individual arm

and lighthead shall operate independently and shall be mounted so that each

individual arm and lighthead can be positioned outside the sterile area, can

bypass each other and be raised, and can be lowered and rotated.]

2.1.8 [Movement Limits

***************************************************************************


Section 26 55 80.00 20 Page 7

NOTE: Include this paragraph where flammable

anesthestics are used.

***************************************************************************

Provide lighthead with stops which shall prevent surgical light from being

lowered less than 1520 mm (5 feet) above the finished floor.

]2.2 CONTROLS

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Designer should coordinate with User for the

number of controllers required and indicate this

information on the drawing.

***************************************************************************

[Recessed] [or] [Surfaced] mounted. Include circuit breaker, an on/off

switch located outside the sterile field, and a pilot light. Controls shall

have a continuously variable intensity control range from the maximum lux

(footcandle) rating of the lighting fixture to a minimum of 60 percent of

the maximum lux (footcandle) rating of the lighting fixture. Include a

radio frequency suppressor. Provide time-of-use meter to determine when to

replace the lamp. Provide control units with electrical plug connections

designed to allow eased of service or replacement.

2.3 SURGICAL LIGHT TRANSFORMER

NEMA ST 20, [_____] VA, 120 V, 60 Hz primary, 22.8 V - 24 V, 60 Hz

secondary.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Section 11 70 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MEDICAL AND DENTAL EQUIPMENT, and

NFPA 70. Install lighthead in accordance with the approved installation

drawings and submit installation report for each lighthead.

3.1.1 Wiring Methods

Provide conduit and wiring in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR

DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

3.1.1.1 [Outlet Box

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete this paragraph if lighthead intensity

control is surface mounted.

***************************************************************************

Provide three-gang outlet box 75 mm (3 inches) depth for recessed mounted

intensity control. Install box 1525 mm (5 feet) from finished floor to

center line of box.

]3.1.2 Surgical Light Transformer

***************************************************************************

../Word/11%2070%2000.doc

../Word/26%2020%2000.doc


Section 26 55 80.00 20 Page 8

NOTE: Locate transformer so that the maximum length

of wires shall not exceed 9144 mm (30 feet) from

transformer to the lighthead.

***************************************************************************

Provide [mounting bracket] [seismic anchoring] for the transformer. Mount

transformer on the [ceiling] [wall, 1525 mm (5 feet), minimum, from finished

floor].


3.2.1 Inspection

Examine each item visually for conformance to the requirements of this

section.

3.2.2 Tests

Upon completion of installation, conduct an operating test to demonstrate

that each surgical lighting fixture meets the requirements of this section.




***************************************************************************

USACE / NAVFAC / AFCEC / NASA UFGS-26 56 00 (May 2013)

--------------------------


UFGS-26 56 00 (July 2006)



***************************************************************************

SECTION 26 56 00

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

05/13

***************************************************************************

NOTE: This guide specification covers lighting

system requirements for exterior installations.

This specification does not cover all possible

methods or requirements for exterior lighting;

therefore, designer should add special information

required to suit a specific project. Industry

publications exist to aid the designer in choosing

the best lighting system for the project.

Publications include, but are not limited to, the

Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) HB-10,

LIGHTING HANDBOOK and RP-8, RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR

ROADWAY LIGHTING.











present.




***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************



***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: This section contains the following sketches

(plates) and are available in metric (SI) and U.S.






Customary (IP) system dimensions. Sketch titles and

style numbers are unchanged for both types.

Do not include list of sketches, or sketches

themselves, in project specifications. Use luminaire

sketches as details (plates) on drawings whenever

possible. If special features are required, do not

modify sketches, but indicate these changes as notes

in luminaire schedule. The "XL" style numbers and

dates should remain on the drawing details. If

additional luminaire types are needed that are not

covered in sketches, provide additional sketches or

details on drawings, but do not label as XL sketch

type.

Sketch No. Title

XL-1 LED Roadway Luminaire

XL-2 HID/Induction Roadway Luminaire

XL-3 LED Area Luminaire

XL-4 HID Area Luminaire

XL-5 Induction Area Luminaire

XL-6 Low Pressure Sodium Area Luminaire

XL-7 HID High Mast Luminaire

XL-8 HID Apron/Large Sports Field Luminaire

XL-9 HID Sports Field Luminaire

XL-10 LED Pedestrian Post Top Luminaire

XL-11 HID/CFL/Induction Pedestrian Post Top Luminaire

XL-12 Decorative Bollard

XL-13 LED Parking Garage Luminaire

XL-14 HID/Induction Parking Garage Luminaire

XL-15 Exterior Recessed Downlight

XL-16 LED Linear Wall Wash

XL-17 LED Wall Pack



Sketch No. Title

XL-18 HID/Induction Wall Pack

XL-19 Decorative Wall Sconce

XL-20 Aviation Obstruction Luminaire

XL-21 LED Flood Luminaire

XL-22 HID/Induction Flood Luminaire

XL-23 Direct-Set Fiberglass Pole

XL-24 Direct-Set Concrete Pole

XL-25 Direct-Set Steel/Aluminum Pole

XL-26 Anchor Base Fiberglass Pole

XL-27 Anchor Base Steel/Aluminum Pole

XL-28 Anchor Base Concrete Pole

XL-29 Anchor Base Pole Foundation

XL-30 Direct Set Pole Grounding Detail

XL-31 Luminaire Mounting Arm Details

XL-32 Luminaire Mounting Arm Details

XL-33 Luminaire Mounting Bracket Details

XL-34 Luminaire Mounting Bracket Details

NOTE: Do not include this index in project specification.

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: The following information shall be shown on

the project drawings or specified in the project

specifications:

a. Luminaire schedule indicating luminaire type,

mounting, and light source type and quantity;

b. Accessories required, such as photocell, mounting

brackets or arms and pole type;



c. Wattage, operating voltage and frequency;

d. Location and mounting height of poles or

standards;

e. Referenced XL sketch or detail;

f. NEMA distribution type and BUG rating when

applicable; and

g. Extent and location of the work to be

accomplished with wiring and equipment necessary for

a complete installation.

***************************************************************************

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Demolition work that involves disposal of

fluorescent and HID light sources and ballasts will

require the use of Section 02 84 16 HANDLING OF

LIGHTING BALLASTS AND LAMPS CONTAINING PCBs AND

MERCURY.

***************************************************************************

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

***************************************************************************






title.











***************************************************************************


extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the


ALLIANCE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY SOLUTIONS (ATIS)

ATIS ANSI O5.1 (2008) Wood Poles -- Specifications &

Dimensions

../Word/02%2084%2016.doc



AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS

(AASHTO)

AASHTO LTS (2013; Errata 2013) Standard Specifications

for Structural Supports for Highway Signs,

Luminaires and Traffic Signals

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)

ASHRAE 189.1 (2014) Standard for the Design of High-

Performance Green Buildings Except Low-Rise

Residential Buildings

ASHRAE 90.1 - IP (2013) Energy Standard for Buildings Except

Low-Rise Residential Buildings

ASHRAE 90.1 - SI (2013) Energy Standard for Buildings Except

Low-Rise Residential Buildings

AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (AWPA)

AWPA U1 (2017) Use Category System: User

Specification for Treated Wood


ASTM A123/A123M (2015) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-

Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products

ASTM A153/A153M (2016) Standard Specification for Zinc

Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM B108/B108M (2015) Standard Specification for Aluminum-

Alloy Permanent Mold Castings

ASTM B117 (2016) Standard Practice for Operating Salt

Spray (Fog) Apparatus

ASTM C1089 (2013) Standard Specification for Spun Cast

Prestressed Concrete Poles

ASTM G154 (2016) Standard Practice for Operating

Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV Exposure

of Nonmetallic Materials

CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION (CEC)

CEC Title 24 (2008; Effective Jan 2010) California's

Energy Efficiency Standards for Residential

and Nonresidential Buildings

ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY (IES)

IES HB-10 (2011; Errata 2015) IES Lighting Handbook



IES LM-79 (2008) Electrical and Photometric

Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products

IES LM-80 (2015) Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED

Light Sources

IES RP-16 (2010; Addendum A 2008; Addenda B 2009;

Addendum C 2016) Nomenclature and Definitions

for Illuminating Engineering

IES RP-8 (2014) Roadway Lighting

IES TM-15 (2011) Luminaire Classification System for

Outdoor Luminaires

IES TM-21 (2011; Addendum B 2015) Projecting Long Term

Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources






IEEE C62.41 (1991; R 1995) Recommended Practice on Surge

Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits



AC Power Circuits





ANSI ANSLG C78.41 (2016) Electric Lamps--Guidelines for Low-

Pressure Sodium Lamps

ANSI ANSLG C78.42 (2009; R 2016) For Electric Lamps: High-

Pressure Sodium Lamps

ANSI C136.13 (2004; R 2009) American National Standard for

Roadway Lighting Equipment, Metal Brackets

for Wood Poles

ANSI C136.21 (2014) American National Standard for Roadway

and Area Lighting Equipment - Vertical Tenons

Used with Post-Top-Mounted Luminaires

ANSI C136.3 (2014) American National Standard for Roadway

and Area Lighting Equipment Luminaire

Attachments



ANSI C78.1381 (1998) American National Standard for

Electric Lamps - 250-Watt, 70 Watt, M85

Metal-Halide Lamps

ANSI C82.4 (2017) Lamp Ballasts - Ballasts for High-

Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium

Lamps

ANSI/ANSLG C78.43 (2013) American National Standard for

Electric Lamps - Single-Ended Metal-Halide

Lamps

ANSI/NEMA C78.LL 1256 (2003; R 2015) Procedures for Fluorescent

Lamp Sample Preparation and the Toxicity

Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP)



NEMA ANSLG C78.377 (2017) Electric Lamps— Specifications for the

Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products

NEMA ANSLG C78.380 (2007) Electric Lamps - High Intensity

Discharge Lamps, Method of Designation

NEMA ANSLG C78.44 (2008) For Electric Lamps - Double-Ended

Metal Halide Lamps

NEMA ANSLG C82.11 (2017) Lamp Ballasts - High-Frequency

Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

NEMA ANSLG C82.14 (2016) Lamp Ballasts Low-Frequency Square

Wave Electronic Ballasts -- for Metal Halide

Lamps

NEMA C136.10 (2010) American National Standard for Roadway

and Area Lighting Equipment-Locking-Type

Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles--

Physical and Electrical Interchangeability

and Testing

NEMA C136.20 (2012) American National Standard for Roadway

and Area Lighting Equipment - Fiber

Reinforced Composite (FRC) Lighting Poles

NEMA C136.31 (2010) American National for Roadway and Area

Lighting Equipment - Luminaire Vibration

NEMA C78.LL 3 (2003; R 2015) Electric Lamps - Procedures

for High Intensity Discharge Lamp Sample

Preparation and the Toxicity Characteristic

Leaching Procedure

NEMA C82.77 (2002) Harmonic Emission Limits - Related

Power Quality Requirements for Lighting

Equipment



NEMA ICS 2 (2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Industrial

Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors,

and Overload Relays Rated 600 V

NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2016) Industrial Control and

Systems: Enclosures

NEMA IEC 60529 (2004) Degrees of Protection Provided by

Enclosures (IP Code)

NEMA WD 7 (2011; R 2016) Occupancy Motion Sensors

Standard




U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)

RUS Bull 1728F-700 (2011) Specification for Wood Poles, Stubs,

and Anchor Logs

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY (DOE)

Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency

Labeling System (FEMP)


47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices

47 CFR 18 (2011) Industrial, Scientific, and Medical

Equipment


UL 1029 (1994; Reprint May 2017) UL Standard for

Safety High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts

UL 1310 (2011; Reprint Dec 2014) UL Standard for

Safety Class 2 Power Units

UL 1598 (2008; Reprint Oct 2012) Luminaires

UL 773 (1995; Reprint Jul 2015) Standard for Plug-

In, Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with

Area Lighting

UL 773A (2016) Standard for Nonindustrial

Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control

UL 8750 (2015; Reprint Aug 2017) UL Standard for

Safety Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment

for Use in Lighting Products



UL 916 (2007; Reprint Aug 2014) Standard for Energy

Management Equipment

UL 935 (2001; Reprint Aug 2014) Standard for

Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts


***************************************************************************

NOTE: Select applicable tri-service, Army, Navy, Air

Force or NASA specification section reference(s).

***************************************************************************

Materials not considered to be luminaires or lighting equipment are

specified in Section(s) [33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION] [33

71 01.00 40 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION] [33 71 01 OVERHEAD

TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION]. Luminaires and accessories installed in

interior of buildings are specified in Section [26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING]

[26 51 00.00 40 INTERIOR LIGHTING].

1.3 DEFINITIONS

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Delete definitions that are not applicable to

project.

***************************************************************************

a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics

terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings shall be as

defined in IEEE 100 and IES RP-16.

[b. For HID, fluorescent, and induction luminaire light sources, "Average

Rated Life" is the time after which 50 percent of a large group of

light sources will have failed and 50 percent will have survived under

normal operating conditions.]

[c. For LED luminaire light sources, "Useful Life" is the operating hours

before reaching 70 percent of the initial rated lumen output (L70) with

no catastrophic failures under normal operating conditions. This is

also known as 70 percent "Rated Lumen Maintenance Life" as defined in

IES LM-80.]

[d. The "Groundline Section" of wood poles is that portion of the pole

between 305 mm (one foot) above, and 610 mm (2 feet) below the

groundline.]

1.4 SUBMITTALS

***************************************************************************




required for the project. Submittals should be kept

to the minimum required for adequate quality control.



../Word/33%2071%2002.doc

../Word/33%2071%2001.00%2040.doc

../Word/33%2071%2001.00%2040.doc

../Word/33%2071%2001.doc

../Word/26%2051%2000.doc

../Word/26%2051%2000.00%2040.doc

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc








project.





Recommended codes for Army projects are "RE" for

Resident Engineer approval, "ED" for Engineering

approval, and "AE" for Architect-Engineer approval.

Codes following the "G" typically are not used for

Navy projects.







Submittal items not designated with a "G" are

considered as being for information only for Army

projects and for Contractor Quality Control approval

for Navy projects.

***************************************************************************



approval] [for information only]. [When used, a designation following the

"G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the




PROCEDURES:

SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Required for all area and roadway designs.

Contractor shall provide calculations to verify

luminaires and design layout meet required

illumination and photometric values of the design.

This requirement has been added as a quality

assurance step. Absolute photometry of LED

luminaires provided by IES LM-79 data should provide

accurate values to assure contractor's luminaires

meet the standards of the initial design.

***************************************************************************

Photometric Plan; G[, [_____]]

LED Luminaire Warranty; G[, [_____]]

../Word/01%2033%2029.doc

../Word/01%2033%2029.doc

../Word/01%2033%2000.doc



SD-02 Shop Drawings

Luminaire drawings; G[, [_____]]

Poles; G[, [_____]]

SD-03 Product Data

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Designer may include Energy Star label for LED

luminaire if it is confirmed that adequate

availability exists of Energy Star products that are

appropriate for the project.

***************************************************************************

[[LED,] [HID,] [LPS,] [Fluorescent,][ and] [Induction] [and LED]

Luminaires; G[, [_____]]]

[Energy Star label for LED luminaire product; S]

Luminaire Light Sources; G[, [_____]]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Choose "Ballasts" for HID, LPS and

fluorescent; "Generators" for induction; and "Power

Supply Units (Drivers)" for LED applications.

***************************************************************************

Luminaire[ Ballasts,][ Generators][ and][ Power Supply Units

(Drivers)]; G[, [_____]]

Lighting contactor; G[, [_____]]

Time switch; G[, [_____]]

Lighting Control Relay Panel; G[, [_____]]

Motion Sensor; G[, [_____]]

Bi-level HID Controller; G[, [_____]]

Photocell; G[, [_____]]

Concrete poles; G[, [_____]]

Aluminum poles; G[, [_____]]

Steel poles; G[, [_____]]

Fiberglass poles; G[, [_____]]

Brackets

Obstruction Marker Luminaires; G[, [_____]]

[SD-04 Samples



***************************************************************************

NOTE: Samples involve additional shipping cost. Use

only for special luminaires or for an item for which

a large quantity is required on a project.

***************************************************************************

[LED, ][HID,] [LPS,] [Fluorescent,][ and] [Induction] [and] [LED]

Luminaires; G[, [_____]]

Submit one sample of each luminaire type[, complete with light

source and ballast, generator or power supply unit].[ Submit one

sample for each item other than luminaires.] Sample will be

returned to the Contractor for installation in the project work.

]SD-05 Design Data

Design Data for luminaires; G[, [_____]]

SD-06 Test Reports

LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report; G[, [_____]]

LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report; G[, [_____]]

[Pressure treated wood pole quality

][Tests for fiberglass poles; G[, [_____]]

]Operating test

Submit operating test results as stated in paragraph entitled

"Field Quality Control."

SD-07 Certificates

Luminaire Useful Life Certificate; G[, [_____]]

Submit certification from the manufacturer indicating the expected

useful life of the luminaires provided. The useful life shall be

directly correlated from the IES LM-80 test data using procedures

outlined in IES TM-21. Thermal properties of the specific

luminaire and local ambient operating temperature and conditions

shall be taken into consideration.

SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

Concrete poles

Submit instructions prior to installation.

Fiberglass poles

Submit instructions prior to installation.


Electronic Ballast Warranty



Operational Service

Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary of

procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to the

project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials

for recycling and/or reuse.


1.5.1 Drawing Requirements

1.5.1.1 Luminaire Drawings

Include dimensions, effective projected area (EPA), accessories, and

installation and construction details. Photometric data, including zonal

lumen data, average and minimum ratio, aiming diagram, and[ computerized]

candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings.

[1.5.1.2 Poles

Include dimensions, wind load determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS, pole

deflection, pole class, and other applicable information.[ For concrete

poles, include: section and details to indicate quantities and position of

prestressing steel, spiral steel, inserts, and through holes; initial

prestressing steel tension; and concrete strengths at release and at 28

days.]

][1.5.2 Pressure Treated Wood Pole Quality

Ensure the quality of pressure treated wood poles. Furnish an inspection

report (for wood poles) of an independent inspection agency, approved by the

Contracting Officer, stating that offered products comply with AWPA U1 and

RUS Bull 1728F-700 standards. The RUS approved Quality Mark "WQC" on each

pole will be accepted, in lieu of inspection reports, as evidence of

compliance with applicable AWPA treatment standards.

]1.5.3 Photometric Plan

For LED luminaires, include computer-generated photometric analysis of the

"designed to" values for the "end of useful life" of the luminaire

installation using a light loss factor of 0.7. For LED and all other types

of luminaires, the submittal shall include the following:

Horizontal illuminance measurements at finished grade, taken at a maximum

of every 3050 mm (10 feet).

Vertical illuminance measurements at 1500 mm (5 feet) above finished grade.

Minimum and maximum lux (footcandle) levels.

Average maintained lux (footcandle) level.

Maximum to minimum ratio for horizontal illuminance only.

1.5.4 Design Data for Luminaires



a. Provide distribution data according to IES classification type as

defined in IES HB-10.

b. Shielding as defined by IES RP-8 or B.U.G. rating for the installed

position as defined by IES TM-15.

c. Provide safety certification and file number for the luminaire family.

Include listing, labeling and identification per NFPA 70 (NEC).

Applicable testing bodies are determined by the US Occupational Safety

Health Administration (OSHA) as Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratories (NRTL) and include: CSA (Canadian Standards Association),

ETL (Edison Testing Laboratory), and UL (Underwriters Laboratories).

d. Provide long term lumen maintenance projections for each LED luminaire

in accordance with IES TM-21. Data used for projections shall be

obtained from testing in accordance with IES LM-80.

e. Provide wind loading calculations for luminaires mounted on poles.

Weight and effective projected area (EPA) of luminaires and mounting

brackets shall not exceed maximum rating of pole as installed in

particular wind zone area.

1.5.5 LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report

Submit test report on manufacturer's standard production model luminaire.

Submittal shall include all photometric and electrical measurements, as well

as all other pertinent data outlined under "14.0 Test Report" in IES LM-79.

1.5.6 LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report

Submit report on manufacturer's standard production LED package, array, or

module. Submittal shall include:

a. Testing agency, report number, date, type of equipment, and LED light

source being tested.

b. All data required by IES LM-80.

1.5.6.1 Test Laboratories

Test laboratories for the IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 test reports shall be one

of the following:

a. National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited

for solid-state lighting testing as part of the Energy-Efficient

Lighting Products laboratory accreditation program.

b. One of the qualified labs listed on the Department of Energy - Energy

Efficiency & Renewable Energy, Solid-State Lighting web site.

c. A manufacturer's in-house lab that meets the following criteria:

1. Manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and

production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires

and the manufacturer's lab has been successfully certifying these

fixtures for a minimum of 15 years.



2. Annual equipment calibration including photometer calibration in

accordance with National Institute of Standards and Technology.

[1.5.7 \[Tests for Fiberglass Poles

a. Ultraviolet resistance tests: Perform according to ASTM G154 using a

UV-B light source having a 313 nanometer wavelength, operated at 54

degrees C (130 degrees F), cycling the light source on for 4 hours and

off for 4 hours for a total test period of 1500 hours minimum with the

following results:

Fiber exposure: None

Crazing: None

Checking: None

Chalking: None

Color: May dull slightly

b. Flexural strength and deflection test: Test loading shall be as a

cantilever beam with pole butt as fixed end and a force simulating wind

load at the free end.

\]]1.5.8 Regulatory Requirements


provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted

for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these


meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,

installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and

advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are

specified or indicated.












same manufacturer unless stated in this section.



if the manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and production

of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires for a minimum of 15



years. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial

use for 15 years prior to bid opening. The product shall have been on sale

on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or

brochures during the 15-year period.


Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site


[1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF POLES

[1.6.1 Wood Poles

Do not store poles on ground. Stack poles stored for more than 2 weeks on

decay-resisting skids arranged to support the poles without producing

noticeable distortion. Store poles to permit free circulation of air; the

bottom poles in the stack shall be at least 305 mm (one foot) above ground

level and growing vegetation. Do not permit decayed or decaying wood to

remain underneath stored poles. Do not drag treated poles along the ground.

Do not use pole tongs, cant hooks, and other pointed tools capable of

producing indentation more than 25 mm (one inch) in depth in handling the

poles. Do not apply tools to the groundline section of any pole.

][1.6.2 Concrete Poles

Do not store poles on ground. Support poles so they are at least 305 mm

(one foot) above ground level and growing vegetation.

][1.6.3 [Fiberglass] [Aluminum] [Steel] Poles

Do not store poles on ground. Support poles so they are at least 305 mm

(one foot) above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove

factory-applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole.

]]1.7 WARRANTY





[1.7.1 LED Luminaire Warranty

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Choose this paragraph for LED applications.

***************************************************************************

Provide Luminaire Useful Life Certificate.







a. Provide a written five year on-site replacement warranty for material,

fixture finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes

transportation, removal, and installation of new products.

1. Finish warranty shall include warranty against failure and against

substantial deterioration such as blistering, cracking, peeling,

chalking, or fading.

2. Material warranty shall include:

(a) All power supply units (drivers).

(b) Replacement when more than 10 percent of LED sources in any

lightbar or subassembly(s) are defective or non-starting.

b. Warranty period must begin on date of beneficial occupancy. Contractor

shall provide the Contracting Officer signed warranty certificates

prior to final payment.

][1.7.2 Electronic Ballast Warranty

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Choose this paragraph for HID, LPS, and

fluorescent applications.

***************************************************************************

Furnish the electronic ballasts manufacturer's warranty. The warranty

period shall not be less than five (5) years from the date of manufacture.

Ballast assembly in the lighting fixture, transportation, and on-site

storage shall not exceed twelve (12) months, thereby permitting four (4)

years of the five (5) year warranty to be in service and energized. The

warranty shall state that the malfunctioning ballast shall be exchanged by

the manufacturer and promptly shipped to the using Government facility. The

replacement ballast shall be identical to, or an improvement upon, the

original design of the malfunctioning ballast.

]1.8 OPERATIONAL SERVICE

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Maintenance agreements are standard practice

in the building industry. Take-back programs refer

to programs in which the product manufacturer "takes-

back" scrap material and/or packaging associated with

its product. Under a green lease, when the customer

no longer requires the use of the particular product

or requires an updated model, the manufacturer is

obligated to reclaim it and refurbish it or

disassemble it for recycling as appropriate. Using

one of these manufacturer's services contributes to

the following LEED credit: MR2may contribute to

achievement of sustainability requirements.

NOTE: This is optional for Army Projects.

***************************************************************************

Coordinate with manufacturer for [maintenance agreement] [take-back

program]. Collect information from the manufacturer about [maintenance



agreement] [green lease] options, and submit to Contracting Officer.

Services shall reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse. Services shall

not deposit materials in landfills or burn reclaimed materials. Indicate

procedures for compliance with regulations governing disposal of mercury.

When such a service is not available, local recyclers shall be sought after

to reclaim the materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


***************************************************************************

NOTE: Choose bracketed options as applicable for

Army, Navy or Air Force project.

***************************************************************************

Products and materials not considered to be luminaires, equipment or

accessories are specified in[ Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL

DISTRIBUTION,][ Section 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION,][

and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.] Luminaires and

associated equipment and accessories for interior applications are specified

in Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING.

2.2 [LED, ][HID,] [LPS,] [FLUORESCENT,][ AND] [INDUCTION] [AND] [LED]

LUMINAIRES

***************************************************************************

NOTE: XL series luminaire plates and details shown

on project plans are provided for a visual

perspective of the luminaire desired. Shapes,

dimensions and other requirements shown are not

intended to restrict selection to luminaires of a

specific manufacturer. Luminaires producing

comparable or competitive photometric results on a

given plan area, and of similar or equal material,

finish and craftsmanship will be considered for

approval.

Choose appropriate bracketed options for type of

luminaires being used.

NOTE: Designer may include Energy Star label for LED

luminaire if it is confirmed that adequate

availability exists of Energy Star products that are

appropriate for the project.

***************************************************************************

UL 1598, NEMA C82.77 and UL 8750. Provide luminaires as indicated in

luminaire schedule and XL plates or details on project plans. Provide

luminaires complete with light sources of quantity, type, and wattage

indicated. All luminaires of the same type shall be provided by the same

manufacturer. [Provide Energy Star labeled LED luminaire product. Provide

proof of Energy Star label for LED luminaire product.]

2.2.1 General Requirements

../Word/33%2071%2002.doc

../Word/33%2071%2001.doc

../Word/26%2020%2000.doc

../Word/26%2051%2000.doc



a.[ LED luminaire housings shall be die cast or extruded aluminum.][

Housings for luminaires other than LED shall be die cast, extruded, or

fabricated aluminum. Fabricated aluminum housings shall have all seams

and corners internally welded to resist weathering, moisture and dust.]

***************************************************************************

NOTE: 40 degrees C (104 degrees F) is "standard"

upper level rating of most LED luminaires. Choose

higher 50 degrees C (122 degrees F) rating when an

installation location warrants a higher ambient

temperature rating and the additional cost it incurs.

***************************************************************************

[b. LED luminaires shall be rated for operation within an ambient

temperature range of minus 30 degrees C (minus 22 degrees F) to[ 40

degrees C (104 degrees F)][ 50 degrees C (122 degrees F)].

]c. Luminaires shall be UL listed for wet locations per UL 1598.[ Optical

compartment for LED luminaires shall be sealed and rated a minimum of

IP65 per NEMA IEC 60529.]

[d. LED luminaires shall produce a minimum efficacy as shown in the

following table, tested per IES LM-79. Theoretical models of initial

raw LED lumens per watt are not acceptable.

Application Luminaire Efficacy in

Lumens per Watt

Exterior Pole/Arm-Mounted Area and

Roadway Luminaires

65

Exterior Pole/Arm-Mounted Decorative

Luminaires

65

Exterior Wall-Mounted Area Luminaires 60

Bollards 35

Parking Garage Luminaires 70

]e. Luminaires shall have IES distribution and NEMA field angle

classifications as indicated in luminaire schedule on project plans per

IES HB-10.

f. Housing finish shall be baked-on enamel, anodized, or baked-on powder

coat paint. Finish shall be capable of surviving ASTM B117 salt fog

environment testing for 2500 hours minimum without blistering or

peeling.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Lighting zones referenced below are taken from

the joint IDA/IES Model Lighting Ordinance, published

in 2011. Zones included range from LZ-0 through LZ-4,



and outline requirements for minimal to very high

ambient light levels respectively.

***************************************************************************

g. Luminaires shall not exceed the following IES TM-15 Backlight, Uplight

and Glare (B.U.G.) ratings:

1. Maximum Backlight (B) rating shall be determined by lighting zone

in which luminaire is placed.

2. Maximum Uplight (U) rating shall be U0.

3. Maximum Glare (G) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in

which luminaire is placed.

h. Luminaires shall be fully assembled and electrically tested prior to

shipment from factory.

i. The finish color shall be as indicated in the luminaire schedule or

detail on the project plans.

[j. Luminaire arm bolts shall be 304 stainless steel or zinc-plated steel.

]k. Luminaire lenses shall be constructed of[ clear][ frosted] tempered

glass or UV-resistant acrylic.[ Provide polycarbonate vandal-resistant

lenses as indicated.]

[l. The wiring compartment on pole-mounted, street and area luminaires

must be accessible without the use of hand tools to manipulate small

screws, bolts, or hardware.

]m. Incorporate modular electrical connections, and construct luminaires

to allow replacement of all or any part of the optics, heat sinks,

power supply units, ballasts, surge suppressors and other electrical

components using only a simple tool, such as a manual or cordless

electric screwdriver.

n. Luminaires shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name,

address, model number, date of manufacture, and serial number securely

affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing

agent will not be acceptable.

[o. Roadway and area luminaires shall have an integral tilt adjustment of

plus or minus 5 degrees to allow the unit to be leveled in accordance

with ANSI C136.3.

]p. Luminaire must pass 3G vibration testing in accordance with NEMA

C136.31.

q. All factory electrical connections shall be made using crimp, locking,

or latching style connectors. Twist-style wire nuts are not

acceptable.

2.2.2 Luminaire Light Sources

***************************************************************************



NOTE: The Energy Independence and Security Act

(EISA) of 2007, Title III, Subtitle B, Section 324

limits the use of certain metal halide light sources

and ballasts. Do not specify any of the light

sources listed in that document.

***************************************************************************

[2.2.2.1 High Pressure Sodium (HPS) Light Sources

***************************************************************************

NOTE: For Army and Navy projects, high pressure

sodium light sources are not recommended for new

installations, but can be used where existing

conditions and continuity of source type make their

use necessary. For Air Force projects, high pressure

sodium light sources should be avoided for new

installations if possible and considered only when a

more energy efficient alternative is not available to

meet photometric and performance requirements.

***************************************************************************

ANSI ANSLG C78.42 and NEMA ANSLG C78.380. HPS light sources shall have a

minimum average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum color rendering index

(CRI) of 21, and a minimum correlated color temperature (CCT) of 1900

degrees K. Provide type and wattage as indicated in luminaire schedule on

project plans. Light sources shall be compliant with the most current TCLP

test procedure per NEMA C78.LL 3 at the time of manufacture.

][2.2.2.2 Metal Halide (MH) Light Sources

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Metal halide light sources are available in a

wide variety of configurations and wattages. Only a

few typical examples are shown below. Utilize pulse-

start technology for all wattages as they become

available. They have longer life and better lumen

maintenance. Some are rated for vertical use only,

so be wary of light source orientation. Like other

HID sources, re-strike time is a factor to consider.

PAR envelopes are an efficient choice for lower

wattage applications, but must be specified with beam

type and angle. In most cases, choose light sources

rated for use in an enclosed luminaire. Typically,

choose sources with highest CRI and longest life, and

closest CCT to match LED temperature of no greater

than 4300 degrees K.

***************************************************************************

ANSI/ANSLG C78.43, NEMA ANSLG C78.44, ANSI C78.1381, and NEMA ANSLG C78.380.

Provide type and wattage as indicated in luminaire schedule on project

plans. Open fixtures are prohibited unless provided with a mechanism to

utilize only Type O light sources and prohibit the use of Type E or S light

sources. Light sources shall be specifically suited to operate in the

burning position which they are installed, and shall be compliant with the

most current TCLP test procedure per NEMA C78.LL 3 at the time of

manufacture.



[a. All probe-start metal halide light sources shall utilize [a] [an] BT

[ED][ET]-type envelope, with an E-39[_____] screw base. The arc tube

shall be a ceramic[-fused quartz]-type, with a rating of

[400][1000][_____] watts, having a minimum initial output of

[35,000][105,000][_____] lumens. The correlated color temperature

(CCT) shall be [3000][_____] degrees K, with a minimum color rendering

index (CRI) of [65][_____]. The minimum average rated life shall be

[15,000][12,000] hours, based on 10 hours operation per start.

][b. All pulse-start metal halide light sources shall utilize [a] [an]

[Tube][PAR][ED][ET][BD]-type envelope, [G-12][E-26 Medium][E-39][mogul]

base, ceramic[fused quartz] arc tube type, rated at

[70][100][250][_____] watts, with a minimum initial output of

[6300][6200][21,000][_____] lumens. Correlated color temperature (CCT)

shall be [3000][_____] degrees K, minimum color rendering index (CRI)

shall be [80] [_____], with a minimum average rated life of [12,000]

hours, based on 10 hours operation per start.

]][2.2.2.3 Low Pressure Sodium (LPS) Light Sources

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Use low-pressure sodium light sources only in

unique applications such as sea turtle nesting

habitats and only when approved by the state or local

governing authority.

***************************************************************************

ANSI ANSLG C78.41 and NEMA ANSLG C78.380. Low Pressure Sodium light sources

shall have average rated life of 18,000 hours minimum and a correlated color

temperature (CCT) of 1700 degrees K. Provide in a T17 or T21 type envelope

with a D.C. Bayonet type base rated at [55][90][135][180] watts, with an

initial output of [7800][14300][22600][32000] lumens.

][2.2.2.4 Fluorescent Light Sources

[a. T5HO fluorescent light sources shall have miniature bi-pin bases, be

low-mercury type, in nominal length(s) of 1170 mm (46 in) 1475 mm (58

in), rated at [54][80] watts, with minimum initial output of [4450]

[6150] lumens. Light source correlated color temperature (CCT) shall

be [3500] [4100] degrees K, with a minimum CRI value of 75, and a

minimum average rated life of [25,000][_____] hours, based on 3 hours

operation per start. Light sources shall be compliant with the most

current TCLP test procedure per ANSI/NEMA C78.LL 1256 at time of

manufacture.

][b. T8 fluorescent light sources shall have medium bi-pin bases, be low-

mercury type, in nominal length(s) of 1220 mm (48 in) 2438 mm (96 in),

rated at [32] [59] watts, with minimum initial output of [2800] [5700]

lumens. Light source correlated color temperature (CCT) shall be

[3500] [4100] degrees K, with a minimum CRI value of 75, and a minimum

average rated life of [30,000][_____] hours, based on 3 hours operation

per start. Light sources shall be compliant with the most current TCLP

test procedure per ANSI/NEMA C78.LL 1256 at time of manufacture.

][c. Compact fluorescent (CFL) light sources shall be 4-pin base, low-

mercury, programmed-start, energy-savings type, rated at [26] [32]

[42][57][70] watts, correlated color temperature of [3500] [4100]



degrees K, minimum CRI of 82, with an average rated life of

[16,000][_____] hours minimum. Light sources shall be compliant with

the most current TCLP test procedure per ANSI/NEMA C78.LL 1256 at time

of manufacture.

]][2.2.2.5 Induction Light Sources

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Induction light sources have high

efficiencies, superior color rendering, instant

on/off switching ability, and extremely long lives.

Relamping is typically in the 60,000 plus hour range

and because of this, savings in maintenance make

these a viable solution to certain outdoor

applications. Typically select CCT of 4000 degrees K

to match LED and other exterior light sources.

***************************************************************************

Induction light sources shall consist of an electrodeless, inductively-

coupled, phosphor-coated fluorescent envelope rated at [55] [85] [100] [150]

[165] watts, color temperature of [3000/3500] [4000/4100] [5000] degrees K,

minimum CRI of 80, with an average rated life of 100,000 hours minimum based

on 3 hours operation per start.

][2.2.2.6 LED Light Sources

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Typically, select a CCT in the range of 4000

degrees K. Some studies have shown that luminaires

with higher CCT values approaching 6500 degrees K

attribute to skyglow, cause erratic behavior in some

animals, and possibly cause circadium rhythm

abnormalities. Although all of these issues have not

been fully documented, a lower color temperature is

recommended.

***************************************************************************

a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) shall be in accordance with NEMA

ANSLG C78.377:

[Nominal CCT: 4000 degrees K: 3985 plus or minus 275 degrees K

]b. Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be:

Greater than or equal to [70] [_____] for 4000 degrees K light sources.

c. Color Consistency:

Manufacturer shall utilize a maximum 4-step MacAdam ellipse binning

tolerance for color consistency of LEDs used in luminaires.

]2.2.3 Luminaire[ Ballasts,][ Generators][ and][ Power Supply Units

(Drivers)]

***************************************************************************



NOTE: Choose "Ballasts" for HID, LPS and

fluorescent; "Generators" for induction; and "Power

Supply Units (Drivers)" for LED applications.

***************************************************************************

[2.2.3.1 HID Ballasts

2.2.3.1.1 Electronic HID Ballasts

NEMA ANSLG C82.14, IEEE C62.41, 47 CFR 18 and shall meet the following

requirements:

a. Minimum power factor shall be greater than 90 percent.

b. Input voltage shall be 120-277 volts plus or minus 10 percent.

c. Shall have end of life circuitry to prevent ballast from operating if

light source is inoperable.

d. Shall have a sound rating of A and a lamp current crest factor less

than 1.5.

e. Input current total harmonic distortion shall be less than 15 percent.

f. Minimum starting temperature shall be minus 30 degrees C (minus 22

degrees F).

g. Shall be thermally protected to prevent overheating.

h. Shall be UL listed and RoHS compliant.

2.2.3.1.2 Magnetic HID and LPS Ballasts

***************************************************************************

NOTE: For metal halide luminaires, provide

electronic ballasts whenever available. Otherwise,

constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) or high

reactance/high power factor (HX-HPF), pulse-start

magnetic ballasts should be specified.

***************************************************************************

ANSI C82.4. Pulse-start constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) type shall

be used when available. Probe-start constant wattage autotransformer (CWA),

high reactance/high power factor (HX-HPF) or regulator type shall be used

for metal halide light sources when pulse-start is not available, and for

high and low pressure sodium light sources. Ballasts shall meet the

following requirements:

a. Shall have minimum Class "H" insulation rating.

b. Shall be designed for 60,000 hours of operation at maximum rated

temperature.

c. Shall have minimum starting temperature for high and low pressure

sodium shall be minus 40 degrees C (minus 40 degrees F), and for metal

halide minus 30 degrees C (minus 22 degrees F).



d. Nominal ballast factor shall be 1.0.

e. Capacitors shall have a self-contained bleeder resistor as required by

UL 1029.

f. Oil-filled capacitors shall be housed in an aluminum or corrosion-

resistant steel can and be provided with 6 mm (0.25 in) quick

disconnect terminals.

g. Capacitor maximum case temperature shall be 90 degrees C (194 degrees

F) for oil-filled and 105 degrees C (221 degrees F) for dry film type.

h. Starter/igniter shall provide six months of light source open circuit

operation without failure and be designed to withstand 10,000 hours of

continuous pulsing (not applicable for LPS).

][2.2.3.2 Fluorescent Ballasts

UL 935, NEMA ANSLG C82.11, NFPA 70 and CEC Title 24, with no magnetic core

and coil components, and shall meet the following requirements:

a. Shall provide transient protection as recommended by IEEE C62.41.1 and

IEEE C62.41.2.

b. Shall be programmed-start or instant-start type as indicated in

luminaire schedule on project drawings elsewhere in this specification.

c. Shall be UL listed Class P, have a Class A sound rating, and have a

minimum power factor of 0.98.

d. Shall be designed for the wattage and quantity of light sources powered

in the luminaire specified, and have circuit diagrams and lamp

connection information printed on the exterior of the ballast housing.

e. Shall contain no PCBs and be RoHS compliant.

f. Shall be manufactured in an ISO 9001-certified facility.

g. Shall operate at a frequency greater than 20 kHz minimum, preferably

greater than 40 kHz, and shall have a Lamp Current Crest Factor less

than 1.7.

h. Shall have a light regulation of plus or minus 10 percent of lumen

output when operated within a plus or minus 10 percent range of input

voltage.

i. Shall have a full replacement warranty of 5 years from date of

manufacture for a maximum case temperature of 70 degrees C (158 degrees

F) and 3 years for a maximum case temperature of 90 degrees C (194

degrees F).

j. All ballasts provided to operate 1220 mm (48 in) T8 light sources shall

be NEMA Premium type.

2.2.3.2.1 T5HO Electronic Fluorescent Ballasts



Shall be programmed-start type with nominal ballast factor of 1.0, maximum

input current THD of 10 percent, lamp end of life protection circuitry, and

have a minimum starting temperature of minus 18 degree C (0 degree F).

Ballast efficacy factor (BEF), rated at 120 volts shall be:

[Minimum 3.66 for one 24W light source.

][Minimum 1.83 for two 24W light sources.

][Minimum 2.23 for one 39W light source.


][Minimum 1.62 for one 54W light source.


][Minimum 0.57 for three 54W light sources.

][Minimum 0.42 for four 54W light sources.

]

Input power shall be:

[Maximum 30 watts for one 24W light source.

][Maximum 59 watts for two 24W light sources.

][Maximum 47 watts for one 39W light source.


][Maximum 63 watts for one 54W light source.


][Maximum 184 watts for three 54W light sources.

][Maximum 240 watts for four 54W light sources.

]

2.2.3.2.2 T8 Electronic Fluorescent Ballasts

Shall be[ programmed-start][ instant-start] type, with minimum ballast

factor of 0.87, maximum current THD of 10 percent, and have a minimum

starting temperature of minus 18 degrees C (0 degrees F).

[For programmed-start ballasts:


[Minimum 2.9 for one 32 W, 1220 mm (48 in) light source (NEMA

Premium).

][Minimum 1.49 for two 32 W, 1220 mm (48 in) light sources (NEMA

Premium).

][Minimum 1.03 for three 32 W, 1220 mm (48 in) light sources (NEMA

Premium).

][Minimum 0.8 for four 32 W, 1220 mm (48 in) light sources (NEMA

Premium).

]Input power shall be:

[Maximum 35 watts for one 32 W, 1220 mm (48 in) light source (NEMA

Premium).

][Maximum 59 watts for two 32 W, 1220 mm (48 in) light sources

(NEMA Premium).

][Maximum 85 watts for three 32 W, 1220 mm (48 in) light sources

(NEMA Premium).

][Maximum 112 watts for four 32 W, 1220 mm (48 in) light sources

(NEMA Premium).



]][For instant-start ballasts:


[Minimum 2.9 for one 32 W, 1220 mm (48 in) light source (NEMA

Premium).

][Minimum 1.49 for two 32 W, 1220 mm (48 in) light sources (NEMA

Premium).

][Minimum 1.03 for three 32 W, 1220 mm (48 in) light sources (NEMA

Premium).

][Minimum 0.8 for four 32 W, 1220 mm (48 in) light sources (NEMA

Premium).

][Minimum 1.36 for one 59 W, 2438 mm (96 in) light source.

][Minimum 0.77 for two 59 W, 2438 mm (96 in) light sources.

]Input power shall be:

[Maximum 35 watts for one 32 W, 1220 mm (48 in) light source (NEMA

Premium).

][Maximum 59 watts for two 32 W, 1220 mm (48 in) light sources

(NEMA Premium).

][Maximum 85 watts for three 32 W, 1220 mm (48 in) light sources

(NEMA Premium).

][Maximum 112 watts for four 32 W, 1220 mm (48 in) light sources

(NEMA Premium).

][Maximum 72 watts for one 59 W, 2438 mm (96 in) light source.

][Maximum 113 watts for two 59 W, 2438 mm (96 in) light sources.

]]2.2.3.2.3 Compact Fluorescent (CFL) Electronic Ballasts

Shall be programmed start type with ballast factor greater than or equal to

0.98, maximum input current THD of 10 percent, lamp end of life protection

circuitry, and have a minimum starting temperature of minus 18 degrees C (0

degrees F) for primary light source(s).

The ballast efficacy factor rated at 120 volts shall be:

[Minimum 3.64 for one 26W CFL light source.

][Minimum 2.72 for one 32W CFL light source.




]

The input power shall be:

[Maximum 29 watts for one 26W CFL light source.

][Maximum 36 watts for one 32W CFL light source.



][Maximum 75 watt for one 70W CFL light source.

]

][2.2.3.3 Induction Generators

Generator shall be connected to, and operate in conjunction with, an

inductive power coupler or coil(s). These in turn activate a glass light



source enclosure from either inside or outside of the enclosure. The

generator shall be solid-state, high-frequency (200kHz - 2.67MHz) type, with

a power factor greater than 0.9, a Class A sound rating, a maximum input

current THD of 15 percent, an operating voltage of 120-277V and a minimum

starting temperature of minus 40 degrees C (minus 40 degrees F). Generator

shall be dimmable to 50 percent of lumen output and be UL, CSA, and RoHS

compliant.

][2.2.3.4 LED Power Supply Units (Drivers)

UL 1310. LED Power Supply Units (Drivers) shall meet the following

requirements:

a. Minimum efficiency shall be 85 percent.

b. Drive current to each individual LED shall not exceed 600 mA, plus or

minus 10 percent.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: 40 degrees C (104 degrees F) is "standard"

upper level rating of most LED luminaires. Choose

higher 50 degrees C (122 degrees F) rating when an

installation location warrants a higher ambient

temperature rating and the additional cost it incurs.

***************************************************************************

c. Shall be rated to operate between ambient temperatures of minus 30

degrees C (minus 22 degrees F) and 40 degrees C (104 degrees F)[ 50

degrees C (122 degrees F)].

d. Shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are

connected, typically ranging from 120 V to 480 V nominal.

e. Operating frequency shall be: 50 or 60 Hz.

f. Power Factor (PF) shall be greater than or equal to 0.90.

g. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) current shall be less than or equal to

20 percent.

h. Shall meet requirements of 47 CFR 15, Class B.

i. Shall be RoHS-compliant.

j. Shall be mounted integral to luminaire. Remote mounting of power supply

is not allowed.

k. Power supplies in luminaires mounted under a covered structure, such as

a canopy, or where otherwise appropriate shall be UL listed with a

sound rating of A.

[l. Shall be dimmable, and compatible with a standard dimming control

circuit of 0 - 10V or other approved dimming system.

]m. Shall be equipped with over-temperature protection circuit that turns

light source off until normal operating temperature is achieved.



]2.2.4 LED Luminaire Surge Protection

Provide surge protection integral to luminaire to meet C Low waveforms as

defined by IEEE C62.41.2, Scenario 1, Location Category C.

[2.3 OBSTRUCTION MARKER LUMINAIRES

***************************************************************************

NOTE: If no other airfield lighting is required in

project, cut and paste required paragraph on

obstruction marker luminaires in this paragraph. If

other airfield lighting is required, include entire

section in project specifications as noted below.

Designer shall also be aware of a conflict between

LED obstruction luminaires and pilots using night

vision goggles (NVG). The output wavelength and low

heat signature of LED luminaires render them

invisible for pilots using NVG.

Do not use LED obstruction luminaires for Air Force

projects. See Air Force ETL 11-29 "Use of Light-

Emitting Diode (LED) Fixtures in Airfield Lighting

Systems on Air Force Installations and

Enduring/Contingency Locations" for more information.

***************************************************************************

Provide obstruction marker luminaires for facilities as required by the FAA

and in accordance with [ Section 26 56 20.00 10 AIRFIELD AND HELIPORT

LIGHTING AND VISUAL NAVIGATION AIDS] [Section 26 54 21.00 10HELIPAD LIGHTING

AND VISUAL NAVIGATION AIDS][ Section 34 43 00.00 20 AIRFIELD LIGHTING].

]2.4 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRE CONTROLS

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Currently, policy for networked control of

lighting systems are still being developed. Issues

such as security and standard protocols need further

review and certification. So, lighting control

"systems" at this point shall be limited to stand-

alone type, and wireless control strategies shall not

be employed at this time.

Typically, controls shall be provided to turn

luminaires on at dusk and off after a certain time

period, when sufficient daylight is available, or

when illumination is not required.

Provide control at each individual luminaire or by a

single device or system controlling a group of

luminaires.

Use reference to ASHRAE 189.1 in lieu of ASHRAE 90.1

for Army projects.

***************************************************************************

Controls shall comply with[ Section 9 of ASHRAE 90.1 - SI (ASHRAE 90.1 -

IP)] [ASHRAE 189.1].[ Provide a control system interface within each

../Word/26%2056%2020.00%2010.doc

../Word/26%2054%2021.00%2010.doc

../Word/34%2043%2000.00%2020.doc



luminaire that is compatible with the energy management or control system

used by the utility department in charge of the project area for control of

site lighting.]

[2.4.1 Photocell

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Cadmium sulfide is the older of the two

technologies. Silicon diode sensors are a solid

state device and more resistant to higher

temperatures and environmental contamination.

Silicon diode type are usually specified when

mounting directly to luminaires, but both types are

proven, reliable technologies.

***************************************************************************

UL 773 or UL 773A. Photocells shall be hermetically sealed,[ cadmium

sulfide][ silicon diode] light sensor type, rated at [_____] watts, [_____]

volts, 50/60 Hz with single-pole, [single][double]-throw contacts.

Photocell shall be designed to fail to the ON position. Housing shall be

constructed of [polycarbonate] [die cast aluminum] [UV stabilized

polypropylene], rated to operate within a temperature range of minus 40 to

70 degrees C (minus 40 to 158 degrees F).[ Photocell shall have a 13 mm

(1/2 in) threaded base for mounting to a junction box or conduit. Provide[

fixed][ swivel] base type housing.][ Photocell shall be twist-lock

receptacle type conforming to NEMA C136.10. Provide with solid brass prongs

and voltage markings and color coding on exterior of housing.] Photocell

shall turn on at 10-30 lux (1-3 footcandles) and turn off at 30 to 150 lux

(3 to 15 footcandles). A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from

transient light sources.[ Provide a directional lens in front of the cell

to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff condition.][ Provide

photocell with metal oxide varistor (MOV) type surge protection.]

][2.4.2 Timeswitch

[Timeswitch shall be electromechanical type with a [24 hour] [7 day]

[astronomic] dial [that changes on/off settings according to seasonal

variations of sunset and sunrise]. Switch shall be powered by an enclosed

synchronous motor with a maximum 3 watt operating rating. Timeswitch

contacts shall be rated for [40] [_____] amps at 120-277 VAC resistive load

in a [SPST][DPST][SPDT][DPST][ normally open (NO)][ normally closed (NC)]

configuration. Switch shall have an automatic spring mechanism to maintain

accurate time for up to 16 hours during a power failure.[ Provide switch

with function that allows automatic control to be skipped on certain

selected days of the week.][ Provide switch with manual bypass or remote

override control.]]

[Timeswitch shall be an electronic type with a[ 24 hour][ 7 day]

[astronomic] programming function [that changes on/off settings according to

seasonal variations of sunset and sunrise], providing a total of [56][_____]

on/off set points. Digital clock display format shall be[ AM/PM 12 hour][24

hour] type. Provide power outage backup for switch utilizing a[ capacitor][

alkaline batteries][ lithium battery] which provides coverage for a minimum

of [7 days][3 years][8 years]. Timeswitch shall provide control to

[1][2][4][_____] channels or loads. Contacts shall be rated for [30]

[_____] amps at 120-277 VAC resistive load in a [SPST][DPST][SPDT][DPST]

[normally open (NO)][normally closed (NC)] configuration. [Provide switch



with [function that allows automatic control to be skipped on certain

selected days of the week][manual bypass or remote override

control][daylight savings time automatic adjustment][EEPROM memory

module][momentary function for output contacts][ability for photosensor

input]].]

Timeswitch shall be housed in a surface-mounted, lockable NEMA [1][3R]

enclosure constructed of painted steel or plastic polymer conforming to NEMA

ICS 6.

][2.4.3 Lighting Contactor

NEMA ICS 2. Provide a [mechanically][electrically]-held lighting contactor

[housed in a NEMA [1][3R][4][_____] enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6].

Contactor shall have [2][4][6][_____] poles, configured as [normally open

(NO)][normally closed (NC)]. Contacts shall be rated [600] [_____] volts,

[30][_____] amperes for a resistive load. Coil operating voltage shall be

[24][120][277][_____] volts. Contactor shall have silver cadmium oxide

double-break contacts [and coil clearing contacts for mechanically held

contactors] and shall require no arcing contacts. [Provide contactor with

hand-off-automatic [on-off] selector switch.] [Provide contactor as

specified above along with [disconnect switch][circuit breaker] in integral

NEMA [1][3R][_____] enclosure with flange-mounted handle to satisfy

requirement for a "combination lighting contactor" when specified.]

][2.4.4 Lighting Control Relay Panel

***************************************************************************

NOTE: NOTE: When providing a control panel that

interfaces with the building automated control

system, reference IES Technical Memorandum IES TM-23-

11 for technical information on various protocols,

architectures and topologies for such systems.

***************************************************************************

Panel shall consist of a single NEMA [1][3R] [flush][surface]-mounted

enclosure with two separate interior sections; one for Class 1 (branch

circuit) and one for Class 2 (low voltage) wiring. Provide panel with

[8][16][32][_____] relays. Panel shall be designed as [a stand alone][an

automated control system interface] type. The Class 1 section shall contain

the load side of all relays and the incoming branch circuit wiring. The

Class 2 section shall contain the control power transformer (24 volt

output), relays, relay control modules, and control wiring[, and native

BACnet[LONworks] field-programmable application controller for panels

connected to the facility automated control system]. Panel enclosure shall

be constructed of [16][14] gauge cold-rolled steel with baked-on enamel

finish. Panel shall meet requirements of UL 916, ASHRAE 90.1 - SI ( ASHRAE

90.1 - IP), CEC Title 24 and 47 CFR 15.

Relays shall be [1][2]-pole, rated at 20 amperes [300][480] VAC with rated

life of 120,000 mechanical operations minimum.

Relay control module shall be 24 volt, electronic type and control up to 16

separate relays (16 channel) or programmed groups of relays. Provide with

inputs for signals from devices such as photocells, timeclocks, and motion

sensors. [Relay control module with integral timeclock function shall be 24



volt, electronic type with LCD display and control up to 8 separate relays

(8 channel)].

][2.4.5 Motion Sensor

NEMA WD 7, UL 773A. Provide [passive infrared][microwave][dual technology

passive infrared/microwave] type sensors with [270][_____] degree coverage,

time delay that can be adjusted from 15 seconds to 15 minutes, and "fail to

ON position" default state. Sensors shall be located to achieve coverage of

areas as indicated on project plans. Coverage patterns shall be derated as

recommended by manufacturer based on mounting height of sensor and any

obstructions such as trees. Do not use gross rated coverage in

manufacturer's product literature. Sensors installed integral to the

luminaire must be provided by the luminaire manufacturer. Sensors shall

have an integral light level sensor that does not allow luminaires to

operate during daylight hours and shall be designed to operate on a voltage

of [120/277 VAC][24 VDC]. [Provide sensors to operate in conjunction with

bi-level controllers that lower HID or LED luminaires to a 50 percent

output.] Sensor shall be [equipped with a threaded base for mounting to a

weatherproof junction box][mounted directly to luminaire].

][2.4.6 Bi-level HID Controller

UL 1598. Provide device to switch full lumen output of HID luminaires to 50

percent output upon receiving 24 VDC signal from motion sensor, photocell or

control system circuit. Device shall be compatible with constant wattage

autotransformer (CWA) ballasts only and have maximum load rating of 1000

watts. Provide controller in a weatherproof housing and mount adjacent to

luminaire on pole or luminaire mounting structure. Controller requires

separate bi-level capacitor[, supplied with luminaire][, supplied with

controller] to operate.

][2.5 POLES

***************************************************************************

NOTE: This specification does not cover decorative

poles or high-mast lighting systems. Poles,

luminaire mounting assemblies, and lowering

mechanisms for high-mast lighting are specially

fabricated and should be individually designed to

suit a specific project. Pole specifications for

high-mast system should, as a minimum, include wind

loading and ultimate strength meeting the loading

requirements of AASHTO LTS. Do not specify embedded

type metal poles for Army facilities.

***************************************************************************

Provide poles designed for wind loading of [161][_____] km/hr ([100][_____]

miles per hour) determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS while supporting

luminaires and all other appurtenances indicated. The effective projected

areas of luminaires and appurtenances used in calculations shall be specific

for the actual products provided on each pole. Poles shall be[ embedded][

anchor]-base type designed for use with[ underground][ overhead] supply

conductors.[ Poles[, other than wood poles,] shall have oval-shaped

handhole having a minimum clear opening of 65 by 130 mm (2.5 by 5 inches).

Handhole cover shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws.][ Metal

poles shall have an internal grounding connection accessible from the



handhole near the bottom of each pole.] Scratched, stained, chipped, or

dented poles shall not be installed.

[2.5.1 Concrete Poles

Provide concrete poles conforming to ASTM C1089. Cross-sectional shape

shall be[ round][ or][ multi-sided].

2.5.1.1 Steel Reinforcing

Prestressed concrete pole shafts shall be reinforced with steel prestressing

members. Design shall provide internal longitudinal loading by either

pretensioning or post tensioning of longitudinal reinforcing members.

2.5.1.2 Tensioned Reinforcing

Primary reinforcement steel used for a prestressed concrete pole shaft shall

be tensioned between 60 to 70 percent of its ultimate strength. The amount

of reinforcement shall be such that when reinforcement is tensioned to 70

percent of its ultimate strength, the total resultant tensile force does not

exceed the minimum section compressive strength of the concrete.

2.5.1.3 Coating and Sleeves for Reinforcing Members

Where minimum internal coverage cannot be maintained next to required core

openings, such as handhole and wiring inlet, reinforcing shall be protected

with a vaporproof noncorrosive sleeve over the length without the 13 mm (1/2

inch) concrete coverage. Each steel reinforcing member which is to be post-

tensioned shall have a nonmigrating slipper coating applied prior to the

addition of concrete to ensure uniformity of stress throughout the length of

such member.

2.5.1.4 Strength Requirement

As an exception to the requirements of ASTM C1089, poles shall be naturally

cured to achieve a 28-day compressive strength of 48.23 MPa (7000 psi).

Poles shall not be subjected to severe temperature changes during the curing

period.

2.5.1.5 Shaft Preparation

Completed prestressed concrete pole shaft shall have a hard, smooth,

nonporous surface that is resistant to soil acids, road salts, and attacks

of water and frost, and shall be clean, smooth, and free of surface voids

and internal honeycombing. Poles shall not be installed for at least 15

days after manufacture.

][2.5.2 Aluminum Poles

Provide aluminum poles manufactured of corrosion resistant aluminum alloys

conforming to AASHTO LTS for Alloy 6063-T6 or Alloy 6005-T5 for wrought

alloys and Alloy 356-T4 (3,5) for cast alloys. Poles shall be seamless

extruded or spun seamless type with minimum 4.8 mm (0.188 inch) wall

thickness. Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent

electrolysis when used with copper ground wire. Tops of shafts shall be

fitted with a round or tapered cover. Base shall be anchor bolt mounted,

made of cast 356-T6 aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B108/B108M and



shall be machined to receive the lower end of shaft. Joint between shaft

and base shall be welded. Base cover shall be cast 356-T6 aluminum alloy in

accordance with ASTM B108/B108M. Hardware, except anchor bolts, shall be

either 2024-T4 anodized aluminum alloy or stainless steel.[ Aluminum poles

and brackets for [walkway][_____] lighting shall have a[ uniform satin][

dark anodic bronze][_____] finish to match fixtures and shall not be

painted.] Manufacturer's standard provision shall be made for protecting

the finish during shipment and installation. Minimum protection shall

consist of spirally wrapping each pole shaft with protective paper secured

with tape, and shipping small parts in boxes.

][2.5.3 Steel Poles

AASHTO LTS. Provide steel poles having minimum 11-gage steel with minimum

yield/strength of 331 MPa (48,000 psi) and[ hot-dipped galvanized in

accordance with ASTM A123/A123M][ iron-oxide primed] factory finish.

Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when

used with copper ground wire. Pole shall be[ direct set][ anchor bolt

mounted] type. Poles shall have tapered tubular members, either round in

cross section or polygonal.[ Pole shafts shall be one piece. Poles shall

be welded construction with no bolts, rivets, or other means of fastening

except as specifically approved.] Pole markings shall be approximately 900

to 1270 mm (3 to 4 feet) above grade and shall include manufacturer, year of

manufacture, top and bottom diameters, and length.[ Base covers for steel

poles shall be structural quality hot-rolled carbon steel plate having a

minimum yield of 248 MPa (36,000 psi).]

][2.5.4 Wood Poles

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Other wood species which are covered by ATIS

ANSI 05.1 and AWPA may be specified, provided they

are available at the project location. Indicate pole

class and height on the drawings.

***************************************************************************

ATIS ANSI O5.1 and RUS Bull 1728F-700 of[ Southern Yellow Pine][ Douglas

Fir][_____]. Poles shall be gained, bored, and roofed before treatment.

Poles shall be treated full length with chromated copper arsenate (CCA) or

ammoniacal copper arsenate (ACA) according to AWPA U1 as referenced in RUS

Bull 1728F-700. Poles shall be branded by manufacturer with manufacturer's

mark and date of treatment, height and class of pole, wood species,

preservation code, and retention. Place the brand so that the bottom of the

brand or disc is 3050 mm (10 feet) from the pole butt for poles up to 15250

mm (50 feet) long[ and 4270 mm (14 feet) from the butt for poles over 15250

mm (50 feet) long].

][2.5.5 Fiberglass Poles

NEMA C136.20. Designed specifically for supporting luminaires and having

factory-formed cable entrance and handhole. Resin color shall be[ dark

bronze][ as indicated][_____], and pigment shall provide uniform coloration

throughout entire wall thickness. Finish surface shall be pigmented

polyurethane having a minimum dry film thickness of 0.038 mm (1.5 mils).

Polyurethane may be omitted if the surface layer of the pole is inherently

ultraviolet inhibited. Minimum fiberglass content shall be 65 percent with

resin and pigment comprising the other 35 percent material content.



]][2.6 BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS

ANSI C136.3, ANSI C136.13, and ANSI C136.21, as applicable. Pole brackets

shall be not less than 31.75 mm (1 1/4 inch)[ galvanized steel pipe][

aluminum] secured to pole. Slip-fitter or pipe-threaded brackets may be

used, but brackets shall be coordinated to luminaires provided, and brackets

for use with one type of luminaire shall be identical. Brackets for pole-

mounted street lights shall correctly position luminaire no lower than

mounting height indicated. Mount brackets not less than 7320 mm (24 feet)

above street. Special mountings or brackets shall be as indicated and shall

be of metal which will not promote galvanic reaction with luminaire head.

][2.7 POLE FOUNDATIONS

Anchor bolts shall be steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 344.5 MPa

(50,000 psi); the top 305 mm (12 inches) of the rod shall be galvanized in

accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. Concrete shall be as specified in[ Section

03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE][ Section 03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE

CONCRETE].

]2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

2.8.1 Manufacturer's Nameplate

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's

name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a

conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be

acceptable.

2.8.2 Labels

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Labeling of lighting components is an

inexpensive and effective method for helping

facilities personnel properly operate and maintain

the lighting systems. The labels shall be easy to

read when standing next to the equipment, and durable

to match the life of the equipment to which they are

attached. Refer to the FEMP guidelines for lighting

at

http://www.eere.energy.gov/femp/technologies/eep_ligh

ting_guidance.cfm.

***************************************************************************

Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements.

Luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific light sources

and ballasts according to proper light source type. The following light

source characteristics shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____":

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Choose requirements as applicable for project.

***************************************************************************

[a. Light source tube diameter code (e.g. T-5, T-8), tube quantity

configuration (e.g. twin, quad, triple), base type (e.g. G24q-2, GX 24

../Word/03%2030%2000.doc

../Word/03%2030%2000.00%2010.doc

http://www.eere.energy.gov/femp/technologies/eep_lighting_guidance.cfm

http://www.eere.energy.gov/femp/technologies/eep_lighting_guidance.cfm



q-4), and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent

luminaires.

][b. Light source type, wattage, bulb type (e.g. ED17, BD56) and coating

(clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

][c. Start type (e.g. programmed-start, rapid-start, instant-start) for

fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

][d. ANSI ballast type (e.g. M98, M57) for HID luminaires.

]e. Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for

all luminaires.

Markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily

visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when

lamps are in place.[ Ballasts shall have clear markings indicating multi-

level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various outputs.]

2.9 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH

***************************************************************************

NOTE: This paragraph covers only the basic painting

requirements for most electrical equipment. Include

any special finishes for high or low temperatures and

corrosive atmospheres.

***************************************************************************

Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which

shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance

test.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


requirements specified herein.

[3.1.1 Wood Poles

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Poles set in swampy or rocky soil will require

different settings or foundations than those set in

average bearing soils. Consult pole manufacturer and

structural engineer for proper setting or foundation

requirements for these and other unusual soil

conditions.

***************************************************************************

Pole holes shall be at least as large at the top as at the bottom and shall

be large enough to provide 100 mm (4 inches) of clearance between the pole

and the side of the hole.

***************************************************************************

NOTE: At the text below, delete setting information

for pole lengths not required.



***************************************************************************

a. Setting depth: Pole setting depths shall be as follows:

Length of Pole (mm) Setting in Soil (mm)

6100 1575

7625 1575

9150 1575

10675 1830

12200 1830

13725 1985

12250 2135

16775 2285

18300 2440

(

Length of Pole (feet) Setting in Soil (feet)

20 5.0

25 5.5

30 5.5

35 6.0

40 6.0

45 6.5

50 7.0

55 7.5

60 8.0

)b. Soil setting: "Setting in Soil" depths shall apply where pole holes

are in soil, sand, or gravel or any combination of these.[ At corners,

dead ends and other points of extra strain, poles 12,200 mm (40 feet)

long or more shall be set 150 mm (6 inches) deeper.]



c. Setting on sloping ground: On sloping ground, measure the depth of the

hole from the low side of the hole.

d. Backfill: Tamp pole backfill for the full depth of the hole and mound

the excess fill around the pole.

][3.1.2 Concrete Poles

***************************************************************************






conditions.

***************************************************************************

Install according to pole manufacturer's instructions.

][3.1.3 Fiberglass Poles

***************************************************************************






conditions.

***************************************************************************

Install according to pole manufacturer's instructions.

][3.1.4 [Aluminum][Steel] Poles

***************************************************************************






conditions.

***************************************************************************

Provide pole foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts, threaded at the

top end and bent 1.57 rad (90 degrees) at the bottom end. Provide

ornamental covers to match pole and galvanized nuts and washers for anchor

bolts. Concrete for anchor bases, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit ells,

and ground rods shall be as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND

ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Thoroughly compact backfill with compacting

arranged to prevent pressure between conductor, jacket, or sheath and the

end of conduit ell. Adjust poles as necessary to provide a permanent

vertical position with the bracket arm in proper position for luminaire

location.[ After installation, paint exposed surfaces of steel poles with

two finish coats of[ exterior oil paint of a color as indicated][ aluminum

paint]. Install according to pole manufacturer's instructions. Alterations

to poles after fabrication will void manufacturer's warranty and shall not

be allowed.]

../Word/33%2071%2002.doc



]3.1.5 Pole Setting

[Depth shall be as indicated. ][Poles in straight runs shall be in a

straight line. Dig holes large enough to permit the proper use of tampers

to the full depth of the hole. Place backfill in the hole in 150 mm (6

inch) maximum layers and thoroughly tamp. Place surplus earth around the

pole in a conical shape and pack tightly to drain water away.]

[3.1.6 Photocell Switch Aiming

Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations.[ Mount switch on or

beside each luminaire when switch is provided in cast weatherproof aluminum

housing with swivel arm.][ Set adjustable window slide for [_____] lux

([_____] footcandles) photocell turn-on.]

]3.1.7 GROUNDING

Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including[ metal poles,]

luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures as specified in

Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Where copper

grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide

specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose.

3.1.8 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

***************************************************************************

NOTE: Use and coordinate paint and coating

requirements with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND

COATINGS when provided in the job. When requirements

are beyond what is specified in Section 09 90 00,

specify the requirements in this paragraph.

***************************************************************************

Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces

or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as

specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.


Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly

installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test after 100

hours of burn-in time to show that the equipment operates in accordance with

the requirements of this section.


../Word/33%2071%2002.doc

../Word/09%2090%2000.doc

../Word/09%2090%2000.doc

../Word/09%2090%2000.doc

********************************************************** 26 Sections - Pr… · IEEE C57.13...

Documents

Transcript of ********************************************************** 26 Sections - Pr… · IEEE C57.13...